{"1": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3536", "width": "2464", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0001.jp2"}, "2": {"fulltext": "Class.\\nBook.\\nCOPYRIGHT DEPOSIT", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0002.jp2"}, "3": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0003.jp2"}, "4": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0004.jp2"}, "5": {"fulltext": "THE SCIENCE\\nOF\\nHYPNOTISM\\nthe wonder of the\\n20th century\\nAll Known Methods Explained.\\nTHE WAY TO BECOME\\nAN EXPERT OPERATOR, ETC.\\nEDITED AND COMPILED BY\\nL E. YOUNG.\\nBrooklyn, N, Y.:\\nM. YOUNG, Publisher,\\n363 Hen*^ Street.", "height": "3506", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0005.jp2"}, "6": {"fulltext": "X\\nt.\\\\\\nA\\nSi\\n45298\\nCopyright\\nAugust, 1899,\\nBy M. Young.\\nTWO COPIES RECEIVED\\nsee JND OOPY.", "height": "3558", "width": "2396", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0006.jp2"}, "7": {"fulltext": "PREFACE.\\nnpHE tidal wave of Hypnotism Is fast approaching the\\nshores of America. The press, the medical faculty,\\nthe scientist, the layman, in fact the masses, all are\\nreaching out and seeking for more knowledge, for facts,\\nand for Information on this most wonderful and strange\\nsubject. Many that have in the past been sceptical, are\\nnow counted among the believers and adherents. The\\nstudy of Hypnotism has proved to be not only interesting\\nbut instructive, and therefore, the demand Is increasing\\nfor books, treating this subject fairly, and without preju-\\ndice, and such works find a welcome reception and are\\neagerly sought after. It has become a common topic*\\nof conversation among all classes from the. college pro-\\nfessor to the schoolboy.\\nThe Importance of Hypnotism as a healing agent is\\nfast becoming understood by many throughout our land.\\nHypnotism does not come before the American people\\nan entire stranger. Its advance guard has already marched", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0007.jp2"}, "8": {"fulltext": "over the entire Continent of Europe, and its noble work\\nhas been witnessed there by thousands of our citizens,\\nmany of whom have tested its wonderful healing power.\\nThousands of invalids have been cured in the hospitals\\nof France and Germany of diseases that appear not\\nto have been reached by any other method. Hypnotism\\npromises a great deal to those who suffer from terrible\\nhabits especially the morphine, the alcoholic, the tobacco,\\nthe opium, and many others, and if we can reach these\\nunfortunates by the publication of this book we feel\\npositive in saying that a large percentage of those who\\nstudy its pages can be cured, and all more or less\\nbenefitted.\\nWe have traversed a very large field to gain the\\ninformation this book gives. We have embodied the\\nexperiences and views of many who rank high in the\\nmedical world, and have for many years treated success-\\nfully thousands of patients every year by Hypnotism,\\nin European hospitals, and their success appears to have\\nbeen something bordering on the miraculous. In some\\nof the chapters we have given their methods and their\\nmode of treatment, and such facts as might interest the\\ngeneral reader.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0008.jp2"}, "9": {"fulltext": "CONTENTS\\nCHAPTER I.\\nHypnotism as a Science What Hypnotism means When Hyp-\\nnotism was discovered, and by whom The different names\\nthis Science has been known by. 13\\nCHAPTER n. 1/\\nHypnotism as discovered by Dr. J. Br^id; his method, and a\\nfew interesting cases as cited by him, in his noted book\\nNeurypnology. 28\\nCHAPTER HI.\\nThe School of Nancy\u00e2\u0080\u0094 The Nine Degrees of Hypnotism\u00e2\u0080\u0094 The\\nTheory of Hypnotism as advanced by Dr. Liebault, the founder\\nof the Nancy School The discovery of Suggestion, showing\\nhow it has helped the Science of Hypnotism to advance in the\\nMedical World 51\\nCHAPTER IV.\\nDr. Liebault of Nancy\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Description of his treatment and the\\nmethod employed at the School at Nancy\u00e2\u0080\u0094 His system free\\nfrom Mysticism\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Curative Suggestion, as applied by Dr. Lie-\\nbault Absolute sleep or unconsciousness unnecessary for\\ncurative treatment\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Different stages of Hypnotism, as known\\nat the Nancy School. 66", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0009.jp2"}, "10": {"fulltext": "CHAPTER V.\\nM. Charcot experiments at La Salpetriere Dr. Burq s discovery\\nThe method used at La Salpetriere Hysteria and Hypnotism\\nclosely combined, says M. Charcot Neurosis theory has many\\nfollowers. 88\\nCHAPTER VL\\nThe School of the Hospital de la Charite\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Dr. J. Luys method, and\\nhis many finds, which have helped Hypnotism The hypnotic\\nmirror Its uses and successes The effects of colored balls on\\nhypnotized patients The use of animal magnetism as united\\nwith hypnotism The uses of drugs, and their influence on\\nhypnotized persons The uses of magnets in hypnotism. 102\\nCHAPTER Vn.\\nThe Classifications of Hypnotism The Inductive Stages of Hyp-\\nnosis Classified as used in the different Methods Gurney,\\nSpeculative Stages of Hypnosis Lloyd Tuckey s Classifica-\\ntions of Hypnosis Dr. Li^bault Stages of Hypnotism, numbers\\nsix Bernheim s Divisions of Hypnotism The Method used by\\nRalph H. Vincent, of London, England Very Important to\\na Student in Hypnotism. 11 1\\nCHAPTER VIII.\\nThe Induction of Hypnosis, by the Fascination method The\\nmethod as first used by Donato Dr. Bremaud s method of\\nFascination as it differs from other methods Abbot Faria s\\nmethod The power of the magnet to induce Hypnosis Carl\\nSaxtus, method The candle method Professor Bernheim s\\nmethod of Suggestion, as used by himself on his patients. 126\\nCHAPTER IX.\\nTelepathic suggestion Hallucination Auto-suggestion Post-\\nhypnotic suggestion. 13.S", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0010.jp2"}, "11": {"fulltext": "CHAPTER X.\\nSomnambulism Arousing Latent Memories, after Waking from a\\nSomnambulistic Sleep The use of Tobacco Cured\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Curing\\nDrunkenness The Curing of the Morphia Mania The dangers\\nof Hypnotism and Drugs compared 155\\nCHAPTER XL\\nThe Phenomena of Hypnotism Why Hypnosis is different in\\ndifferent subjects Proof that such a Science as Hypnotism\\nexists Rapport Double Consciousness Max Dessoir Theory\\nH. Bernheim Theory. .168\\nCHAPTER Xn.\\nWhat can be done with Hypnotism The elevated moral tone of\\nSubjects when hypnotized Three rules, never to be forgotten\\nby the operator Can hypnotism be simulated? Professor\\nGregory s views\u00e2\u0080\u0094 How to waken subjects without harm. 184\\nCHAPTER Xni.\\nThe Wonders of Hypnotism Hypnotism as a Curative Power\\nThe effects of Hypnotism upon the Senses The effect of\\nHypnotism on the Function of Individual Organs All Turns\\non the way Suggestion is made Donatism. 195\\nCHAPTER XIV.\\nThe Wonders of Hypnotism Continued Catalepsy Automatic\\nMovement The Phenomena of Imitative Speech Hemi-\\nHypnosis Increased Sensitiveness of Hypnotic Subjects\\nHypersesthesia of the Eye Suggestion and Hypnosis\\nCirculation and Respiration in Hypnotism\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Memory in\\nHypnotism Hypermnesia 206", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0011.jp2"}, "12": {"fulltext": "CHAPTER XV.\\n{From the New Yolrk Journal, June, 1899.]\\nA Boy who can see straight through your clothes to your very\\nBones How he has diagnosed Diseases which puzzled Physi-\\ncians Described Internal Disorders which Science had no\\nway of finding out, and explained Fractures of Bones which\\nthe Doctors did not suspect Physicians confronted with a\\nScientific Phenomenon which it is impossible to explain. 218\\nCHAPTER XVI.\\nThe dangers of Hypnotism. ^32\\nCHAPTER XVn.\\nBrief Explanations of Important Points in Hypnotism Special\\nAdvice and Instructions to Young Experimenters, and Particular\\nReference to Inducing Hypnotic Sleep and Awaking. 241\\nPART 11.\\nAnimal Magnetism Magnetic Clairvoyance Influence of Animal\\nMagnetism on the Body Plan of Mesmer Principles of Del-\\neuze Influence of Animal Magnetism on the Mind New\\nTheory of Animal Magnetism Process used in India to produce\\nMagnetic Sleep\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Art of Mind Reading. 264-320", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0012.jp2"}, "13": {"fulltext": "Noted Writers on Hypnotism,\\nWE would suggest to all who expect to study Hypnotism in\\ndetail to secure the latest and best books on that subject.\\nYou will find the titles of several of the Standard Books named\\nbelow, to which we owe a tribute of thanks for extracts we have\\nmade.\\nNeurypnology, By Dr. James Braid.\\nThe Elements of Hypnotism, By Ralph H. Vincent.\\nPsychotherapeutics, By Lloyd Tuckey, M.D.\\nLe Magnetisme Animal, By Binet and Fere.\\nDer Hypnotismus, By Forel.\\nDu SoMMEiL, By Liebault.\\nThe Subliminal Consciousness, By F. Myers.\\nSuggestion and Reflex, By Karl Schoffer.\\nDe la Suggestions et du Somnambulisme, By Liegeois.\\nEiNE Experimentelle Studie auf dem Gebiete\\nDES Hypnotismus, By Krafft-Ebing.\\nDe la Suggestion Mentale, By Ochorowicz.\\nDas Doppel-Ich, By Max Dessoir.\\nThe two following books are published by the London Society\\nof Psychical Researches:\\nPeculiarities of Certain Post-Hypnotic States,\\nBy Gurney.\\nPhantasms of the Living.\\nThe following books we can furnish sent prepaid by mail, at\\nthe prices named in this book:\\nSuggestive Therapeutics, By Bernheim.\\nHypnotism, By Albert Moll.\\nThe Law of Psychic Phenomena, By Thomson J. Hudson,\\nHypnotism, How it is Done, By James R. Cocke, M.D.\\nHypnotism, By Dr. Foveau de Courmelles.\\nHypnotism, By Carl Saxtus.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0013.jp2"}, "14": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0014.jp2"}, "15": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM.\\nCHAPTER I.\\nHYPNOTISM.\\nHypnotism as a Science What Hypnotism means Wiien Hyp-\\nnotism was discovered, and by whom The different names\\nthis Science has been known by.\\nHypnotism, comparatively speaking, is a new word,\\nalthough the science is as old as the world as old as\\nthe human mind.\\nIn whatever quarter we direct our researches, whether\\nit be in dusty old manuscripts or deciphering hieroglyphics,\\nwe find the indelible traces of the influence of man over\\nman.\\nDiodorus of Sicily, writes The ancient Egyptian\\npriests threw each other into trances, thus showing that\\nthey understood something of the art of Hypnotism.\\nOn the Zodiac, in the arched wall of the Temple at\\nDenderah, Isis Is depicted holding a child by the hand,\\nwhile she passes her other hand in front of him In the\\nthe attitude of a magnetlzer.\\nProsper Alplnus, in his treatise on the Egyptian\\npractice of medicine, mentions their mysterious chafing\\nand rubbing, and manipulating of the body, for all disease.\\nIn India, Mythology represents Vishun with flames\\nissuing from his finger-ends, and it was said that the\\nlight and heat from them cured all the Ills of life.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0015.jp2"}, "16": {"fulltext": "14 HYPNOTISM.\\nThe fakirs of India have great dexterity In their\\nSankhya philosophy, and believed that they, like Kopila\\nare perpetually exempt from every sort of evil and bodily\\nills. They practice their arts to-day the same as they have\\nfor thousands of years. India is the home of Occult\\nSciences, and the peculiar rules and doctrines of their\\nfaith are laid down in several of their holy books,\\nespecially in the Yoga Satra, which teaches how an\\nascetic or devotee can enter the fourth stage of life, in\\nwhich the human soul becomes permanently united to the\\nSupreme Being, which gives man the mysterious power\\nto control all other men who are not advanced into the\\nyoga system of Hindoo philosophy.\\nSanskrit literature tells of one Indian god, Brahman,\\nwho introduced medicine into all India. Charaka, tells\\nus, that Brahman, with gentle v/ords and a few passes of\\nthe left hand over the forehead of his patient, would\\nproduce a sleep which had a wonderful power; and that\\nhe became renowned as a healer of bodily ills, and seldom\\nused herbs. From Brahman, comes down the long road\\nof time the saying, that magic and medicine are\\ncombined.\\nThe Assyrian scholars, have recently brought to\\nlight, the proof, that the old word magi, signifies\\nreverend, and that the early Scythian, who inhabited\\nBabylonia 500 years B. c, gave the title magi to their\\nmost learned priests and philosophers. They were not\\nonly the keeper of the sacred things, the learned of\\nthe people, the philosophers and servants of God, but\\ndiviners and mantles, wonder-workers and prophets.\\nThey were believed to have the power to call up the\\ndead, to be able to bring disaster wherever they wished", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0016.jp2"}, "17": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 15\\nby resorting to awful formulas which were in their exclusive\\npossession, to heal the sick by means of water, and passes\\nof the hand.\\nThe oldest traditions of Persia, hold that these Baby-\\nlonian sages had control over darkness and fire, as well\\nas over the mind and body of man. In matter of fact,\\nthe word magi, became a general name for wonderful\\neffects, produced in some mysterious way. The law of\\nnature being Httle known one thing was not more\\nincredible than another and effects were assigned to\\ncauses in the most arbitrary and accidental way. The\\nRosicrucian physicians treated a case of wounding by\\napplying the salve to the weapon instead of to the wound\\nitself, and, the wound was healed. Hyppocrates believed\\nin somnambulistic powers. It is also well-knov/n that\\nexhibitions were got up, and that Aristophanes openly\\nderided the wizards of olden days.\\nThus we find that the broad idea that man is endowed\\nwith a dual mental organization Is far from being 7iew.\\nThe essential truth of the proposition has been recognized\\nby philosophers of all ages and nations of the civilized\\nworld. That man Is a trinity, made up of body, soul, and\\nspirit was a cardinal tenet in the early faith of the ancient\\nGreek philosophers, who thus clearly recognized the dual\\ncharacter of man s mental or spiritual organization. Plato s\\nidea of terrestrial man was that he is a trinity of soul,\\nsoul-body, and earth-body. The mystic jargon of the\\nHermetic philosopher declares the same general idea. The\\nsalt, sulphur, and mercury of the ancient alchemists\\ndoubtless refers to man as being composed of a trinity of\\nelements. The early Christian Fathers confidently pro-\\nclaimed the same doctrine as Is shown in the writings of", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0017.jp2"}, "18": {"fulltext": "1 6 HYPNOTISM.\\nClement, Orlgen, Titian, and many other early exponents\\nof Christian doctrine.\\nTherefore it is safe to state that man, has, or appears\\nto have, two minds, each endowed with separate and\\ndistinct attributes and powers; each capable, under certain\\nconditions, of independent action. It should be clearly\\nunderstood at the outset that for the purpose of arriving at\\na correct conclusion it is a matter of indifference whether\\nwe consider that man is endowed with two distinct minds,\\nor that his one mind possesses certain attributes and\\npowers under some conditions, and certain other attributes\\nand powers under other conditions. It is sufficient to know\\nthat everything happens just as though he were endowed\\nwith a dual mental organization.\\nIn recent years, the doctrine of duality of mind is\\nbeginning to be more clearly defined, and it may now be\\nsaid to constitute a cardinal principal in the philosophy\\nof many of the ablest exponents of this new, yet old\\npsychology.\\nThousands of examples might be cited to show that\\nin all the ages the truth has been dimly recognized by\\nmen of all civilized races and in all conditions of life.\\nIndeed, it way be safely predicted of every man of\\nintelligence and refinement, that he has often felt within\\nhimself an intelligence not the result of education, a\\nperception of truth independent of the testimony of his\\nbodily senses.\\nIt is natural to suppose that a proposition, the sub-\\nstantial correctness of which has been so widely recognized,\\nmust not only possess a sohd basis of truth, but must, if\\nclearly understood, possess a veritable significance of the\\nutmost importance to mankind.\\nNow, as we are willing to acknowledge two minds,", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0018.jp2"}, "19": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 17\\nand recognize that the two minds possess distinct charac-\\nteristics essentially unlike, we know that each is endowed\\nwith separate and distinct attributes and powers, and that\\neach is capable, under certain conditions and limitations,\\nof independent action. We know, then, that the general\\ndifference between man s two minds may be stated as\\nfollows\\nThe objective mind takes cognizance of the objective\\nworld. It is the outgrowth of man s physical necessities.\\nIt is his guide in his struggles with his material environment.\\nIts highest function is that of reasoning clearly.\\nThe second, or subjective mind takes cognizance of\\nits environment by means independent of the physical\\nsenses. It perceives by intuition. It is the seat of the\\nemotions and the storehouse of memory. It performs its\\nhighest functions when the objective senses are in abey-\\nance. In a word, it is that intelligence which makes\\nitself manifest in a hypnotic subject, when he is in a\\nstate of somnambulism.\\nIt is in this state many of the most wonderful feats of\\nthe subjective mind are performed. It sees without the\\nuse of the natural organs of vision; and in this, as in many\\nother grades, or degrees, of the hypnotic state, it can be\\nmade, apparently, to leave the body, and travel to distant\\nlands and bring back intelligence, oftentimes of the most\\nexact and truthful character. It also has the power to read\\nthe thought of others, even to the minutest details; to read\\nthe contents of sealed envelopes and of closed books. In\\nshort, it is the subjective mind that possesses what is\\npopularly designated as clairvoyant power, and the ability\\nto apprehend the thought of others without the aid of the\\nordinary objective means of communication.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0019.jp2"}, "20": {"fulltext": "1 8 HYPNOTISM.\\nTwo thousand years ago, the inhabitants of East\\nIndia understood the relations of the two minds to each\\nother, and this we must partly attribute to their great\\nsuccess in all matters relating to this most wonderful of\\nscience.\\nThe history of the middle ages is full of wonders\\nmysteries and experiments, all wrought to master this\\nscience, which comes down to us, with a newness and a\\nvast undiscovered sphere that no other science offers this\\ngeneration.\\nDuring the Middle Ages all Europe studied this\\nscience under many names, such as Magic, Mind-reading,\\nWonder-working, Secret-mysterious, Animal- magnetism,\\nHindoo-science, Will-power, Soul-power, Unnatural sleep,\\nPsychology, Clairvoyance, Witchcraft, Somnambulism,\\nMesmerism, Mineral-power, Personal-magnetism, and now\\nthe name of this century, is HYPNOTISM.\\nThe Middle Ages can boast of many distinguished\\nnames among the students who attempted to treat the\\nSecret-Mysterious as a grand science, by which the\\nworkings of nature could be discovered, and a god-\\nlike power be acquired over the spirits, men and the\\nelements. The principal students and professors were\\nPope Sylvester 11. Albertus Magnus, Roger Bacon, Ray-\\nmond Lully, Pico della Mirandola, Paracelsus, Cornelius\\nAgrippa, Trithemius, Van Helmont, and perhaps the most\\nnoted of that era, Jerome Cardan, who left behind him\\nmany valuable papers pertaining to his researches along\\nthis line. He mentions a state of insensibility produced\\nby a magnet, he also speaks of bright spots throwing a\\nsubject to sleep; again, he says, a sudden glance cast", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0020.jp2"}, "21": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 19\\nunexpectedly upon a highly sensitive subject will cause\\nhim to start forward.\\nParacelsus asserts his theory of double magnetism, and\\nshows that the magnetic fluid of a healthy body attracts\\nthe weaker and deteriorated magnet of an unhealthy one;\\nso also do Glocenius, Burgraeve, Helinotius, Robert Fludd,\\nFather Kircher and Maxwell, in the latter part of the\\nsixteenth and early part of the seventeenth centuries.\\nThese latter considered that the magnet was endowed with\\nthe principle of existence. A great number of more or less\\nhazy works, full of abstract terms, often misunderstood by\\nthose who employed them, have been handed down to\\nposterity, and they all show the influence of that passionate\\nlove of the marvelous which humanity seems unable to\\nshake ofl It would seem, indeed, from all past experience,\\nand even judging from the present state of society, that an\\nirresistible attraction draws us toward the study of the\\nOccult Sciences at the close of each century, then the\\nattraction dies away and vanishes, to rejoin the forgotten\\nbygone ages that have preceded it, only to return to us\\nwhen another age is about to depart.\\nThe close of the eighteenth century, filled as it was\\nwith a feverish and mystical activity, proved no exception\\nto the rule. A worldly-minded generation, overflowing\\nwith nervous temperament, and over excited by the\\nexpectation of some great event, was inevitably destined\\nto produce such a man as Mesmer.\\nIn this name, full of magic reminiscences, our waning\\nnineteenth century sees one who has been cruelly traduced,\\nand is almost ready to worship him. His name is to\\nbe rehabilitated, and the charlatan of former days is very\\nnear being transformed into the great man of the present\\ntime.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0021.jp2"}, "22": {"fulltext": "20 HYPNOTISM.\\nMesmer Is proclaimed the creator of scientific mag-\\nnetism, the scholar who has given us the fruitful Inheritance;\\nwhose ideas and labors have led to vast researches.\\nMesmer argued that the sun, moon and stars acted\\non the human body by means of a subtle fluid, which\\nhe called Animal Magnetism, in order to point out its\\naflinity with the magnet.\\nA few years later came Father Hell, a Jesuit, who\\ncured diseases by means of magnetized Iron.\\nIn 1787, a pupil of Doctor Mesmer, the Marquis\\nChastenet de Puysegur, attracted all the scientific world\\nto Buzancy, near Soissons, where he obtained most\\nremarkable results.\\nDoctor Cloquet relates that he saw there, patients no\\nlonger the victims of violent hysterical fits, but enjoying\\na calm, peaceful restorative and silent slumber. It may\\nbe said that from this moment, really efficacious and\\nuseful magnetism became known. Puysegur had resus-\\ncitated magnetism, public opinion had become infatuated\\nonce more about this new agent that was to be the\\ngratuitous means of curing mankind. Puysegur s tree\\nimpregnated with the fluid, was touched by hundreds of\\npersons who came from all parts, and the effects were\\nmost beneficial. The learned naturalist Deleuze, wrote\\nin 18 13, the HIstoIre Critique du Magnetlsme Animal,\\nwhich sums up the question as It stood at that period.\\nAbout the same time there appeared in Southern\\nGermany, Father Gassner, a priest, who effected some\\nwonderful cures. This method consisted of the patient\\nbeing ushered into a semi-dark room, and then, from a\\nportiere, Father Gassner emerged with outstretched hands,\\ncarrying the crucifix held aloof Directing his gaze", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0022.jp2"}, "23": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 21\\nsharply on the patient, he exclaimed in thundering tones\\nin Latin: Detur mihi evidens signum proestigice\\n-braeternaiuralis proecipio hoc in nomine Jesu!^^\\nIf the individual was at all susceptible he would fall into\\nthe crisis or unconscious state. Father Gassner was a wise\\nman, much ahead of his time, and he took advantage of it.\\nAmong the men who stood by him and believed in his\\nscience were Carl Albrecht, Prince of Hohenlohe-Walden-\\nburg-, and Ludwig Joseph, Bishop of Freisinger. In 1820,\\nDr. Bertrand, formerly a cadet at the Ecole Polytechnique,\\nheld a course of public lectures on Magnetism and ortho-\\ndox science, now took up the interesting questions. Dr.\\nHusson at the Hotel-Dieu; Dr. Goerget and Dr. Rastan at\\nthe Salpetriere, induced Baron du Potet to perform experi-\\nments in their different wards, many experiments proving\\nvery w^onderful.\\nIn 1825, Dr. Foissac persuaded the Academy of Med-\\nicine of Paris, France, to take up the subject, and that\\nlearned body of the most noted men of the world admitted\\nthat magnetism did exist:\\nConsidered either as an agent of physiological phen-\\nomena or as a curative means, said the members of this\\ncommission, magnetism must be allotted a place in\\nmedical knowledge; consequently doctors alone must make\\nuse of it, or at least superintend its application. The com-\\nmission has collected and noted down facts important\\nenough to warrant the Academy s authorizing the study of\\nmagnetism as a serious branch of Psychology and Natural\\nHistory.\\nThe above declaration was signed by Bourdois, De\\nla Motte, Fenguier Gueneau de Mussy, Guersant, Itard,\\nJ. Leroux, Marc, Thillaye.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0023.jp2"}, "24": {"fulltext": "22 HYPNOTISM.\\nFrom this time, Magnetism was in the hands of honest\\nmen, and has never since gone astray. It is of course,\\nHke all great sciences, open to doubt, and its partisans\\nmay even be considered mad, but with the exception of\\nMesmer s cupidity none of its adherents have been swayed\\nby mercenary motives. Puysegur, indeed offered a striking\\ncontrast to Mesmer, and avoided all public exhibitions\\nand everything that could affect the imagination, never\\nchoosing special subjects, but experimenting on peasants\\nmale or female\u00e2\u0080\u0094 afflicted with stubborn and matter of\\nfact diseases. He however, admitted the marvellous and\\nbelieved in somnambulistic lucidity.\\nAbout the same period, Baron du Potet invented the\\nMagic Mirror, which convulsed so many people. The\\nfamous magnetiser first traced on the floor with a bit of\\ncharcoal, a complete and blackened circle. The subject\\ndrew near and then receded, looking alternately at the\\nspectators and at the circle. Soon, writes Baron du\\nPotet, the effect is visible. The 6-?^4^V head is lowered,\\nhis whole person becomes uneasy; he turns round and\\nround the circle without taking his eyes off it, then bends\\nlower, rises again, draws back a few steps, then advances\\nagain, frowns, looks morose and gloomy, and breathes\\nheavily. The most curious scene then follows. The\\nsubject, without doubt, sees images reflected in the mirror,\\nfor his perturbation, his emotion, his strange motions,\\nhis sobs, tears, anger, despair, and fury, all prove the\\ndisorder and agitation of his mind. For him it is no\\ndream or nightmare the apparitions are relative, and a\\nseries of future events represented by figures and signs\\nthat he understands, unfold themselves before him, filling\\nhim in turn with joy or sadness, as they pass before his", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0024.jp2"}, "25": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 23\\neyes. Soon he is seized with a transport of frenzy,\\nstrives to lay hold of the phantoms, and dashing forward\\nstamps with his foot on the blackened circle, the dust\\nflies up, and the operator now approaches and puts an\\nend to this dramatic performance, so full of excitement\\nand terror.\\nIn all this, du Potet fancied he saw magic but\\nHypnotism obtained by physical means brings about the\\nsame results, but in a very pleasant way.\\nFather Lacordaire, from the pulpit of Notre Dame,\\nacknowledged the existence of magnetism. Wrapped in\\na fictitious sleep, he said, man sees through opaque\\nbodies; he is able to indicate remedies that heal, and\\nappears to know things he knew not while awake.\\nThe enthusiasm now became universal in France. The\\nnew ideas found disciples even amongst the clergy, and an\\nencyclical letter from the Holy Inquisition was addressed\\nto the Roman CathoHc Bishops (July 30th, 1856), warning\\nthem against the errors and dangers of magnetism.\\nThe next to call attention to it was Dr. James Braid, a\\nsurgeon of Manchester, England. After incredulously\\nwitnessing experiments by La Fontaine, a French traveling\\nmesmerist, he became interested in the science, and later\\non Dr. Braid renamed this science to Hypnotism, and\\nemployed his method in all cases possible.\\nDr. Braid, however, did not seek to deny magnetism for\\nhe wrote as follows in his book on Neurypnology\\nFor a long time I beHeved the phenomena produced\\nby my experiments and those produced by mesmerists to\\nbe identical; and after a close investigation, I have come to\\nthe conclusion that there is a certain analogy in the effects\\nproduced on the nervous system. Nevertheless, and judg-", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0025.jp2"}, "26": {"fulltext": "24 HYPNOTISM.\\ning from the effects magnetizers declare they have obtained\\nin certain cases, there seems to be enough differentia to\\nlead one to consider HypJiotism and Mesmerism as two\\ndistinct agents.\\nWhen Dr. Braid made this discovery, hypnotism had\\nits origin, and the fact was established, that sleep coula\\nbe induced by physical agents. This, it must be remembered,\\nis the essential difference between these two classes of\\nphenomena for magnetism supposes a direct action of\\nthe magnetizer on the magnetized subject an action\\nwhich does not exist in Hypnotism. This distinction is\\nnot generally made, hence the confusion between the two\\nmethods. Whenever the word hypnotism is therefore\\nemployed, the reader must remember that it is sleep\\ninduced by physical agents that is understood, that is to\\nsay, sleep obtained by fixing the gaze on some object\\n(as Dr. Braid discovered) or by some sudden sound,\\nlike that of a Chinese gong (such as is used at present\\nat Salpetriere). When, on the other hand, the word\\nmagnetism is employed, it will be understood that reference\\nis made to a subject passing from a waking condition\\ninto that of sleep, owing to the personal action of the\\nexperimentist on the experimentized.\\nFollowing his example, came Dr. Esdaile, Presidency\\nSurgeon of Bengal, at Calcutta, who employed hypnotism\\nin nearly all his operations.\\nThen for a few years this science made little if any\\nprogress. The value of this wonderful Braid discovery\\nwas not appreciated by the English, and it was not until\\nthe Continental scientists extended their researches that he\\nobtained substantial recognition.\\nLiebault was the first to confirm his experiments. He", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0026.jp2"}, "27": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 25\\nwas, in fact, the founder of what is now known as the\\nNancy school of hypnotism. It was founded in 1866.\\nMany prominent scientists have followed him, among\\nthem worth especial mention: Ch. Richet, Bremaund,\\nBeaunes, Delboeuf, Beyon, Facachau, Mabille, Liegeois,\\nForel, Chas. Fere, and Alfred Binet, also Professor Bern-\\nheim, the author of the book Suggestive Therapeutics\\nwhich many assert to be the best medical work on hyp-\\nnotism and therapeutic suggestion which has ever been\\nwritten. Prof Bernheim for years was a member of the\\nf iculty at Nancy.\\nProfessor Charcot, of the Paris Salpetriere, is also the\\nfounder of a school of hypnotism, which is generally known\\nas the Paris school, or school of the Salpetriere. Charcot s\\ngreat reputation as a scientist obtained for him many\\nfollowers.\\nProf Charcot mostly hypnotized ladies, and especially\\nhysterics. At La Salpetriere, he studied hypnotism mostly\\nthrough hysterical subjects. Charcot has, by his cures,\\ndone an immense good, curing people by the thousands\\nof a number of diseases.\\nTo Charcot is given the honor of first classifying the\\ndifferent phases of hypnotic sleep into the Lethargic,\\nCataleptic and Somnambulistic stages.\\nTo Dr. Burg is given the honor of reviving hypnotism\\nin France and it is to him the world owes the knowledge\\nof the effects of different metals upon the human system.\\nDr. J. Luys, a member of the Academy of Medicine, has\\nperformed many curious experiments in the Hospital de\\nla Charite. The action of physical agents \u00e2\u0080\u0094even at a\\ndistance and of Suggestion are both admitted at La\\nCharite. Dr. Luys method we give later on in this work.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0027.jp2"}, "28": {"fulltext": "26 HYPNOTISM.\\nJarval, an Ophthalmologist Member of the Academy\\nof Medicine, and Dr. Foveau de Caurmelles are making\\nwonderful discoveries in their researches on the eyes,\\nthrough the power and aid of hypnotism.\\nWe can furnish Dr. Foveau de Caurmelles latest\\nbook on Hypnotism, as it is practised in the European\\nHospitals. This work is illustrated and sells for $2.50,\\nsent post-paid by mail.\\nAlbert Moll, of Berlin, Germany, who is one of the\\nablest, and certainly one of the most unprejudiced of\\nmodern scientific writers on the subject of hypnotism,\\nwrites as following\\nConsidering the light of our present knowledge of\\nhypnotism, the most we can accomplish toward an\\nexplanation of it Is to compare its phenomena with those\\nobserved in waking life. By way of explanation, let us\\nsuppose that we are trying to explain a hypnotic negative\\nhallucination of sight. We must compare it with a corres-\\nponding phenomenon in waking life. By so doing we\\nwill notice that in the hypnotic state the patient fails to\\nperceive any object which the operator tells him he cannot\\nsee, while in waking life we should be all the more certain\\nto see an object when told that it is not there, from the\\nfact of our attention being directed toward it.\\nIn explanation of this point of difference. Dr. Moll, fol-\\nlowing Wundt, assumed the existence of a so-called dream\\nconsciousness In the hypnotic state.\\nIt is believed by means of this method of analogy,\\nmany phenomena, both hypnotic and post-hypnotic, can be\\nexplained. Self-observation is a most valuable aid to\\ninvestigation. A great number of different states are\\nincluded under the head of hypnosis, and takes up the", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0028.jp2"}, "29": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 27\\ndiscussion of the various hypnotic phenomena in the fol-\\nlowing order:\\nFirst: The phenomena of Suggestion as regards vol-\\nuntary movements.\\nSecond: Positive and negative delusions of the Senses.\\nThird \u00e2\u0080\u0094Rapport.\\nFourth: The phenomena of Memory.\\nFifth Post-Hypnotic Suggestion.\\nTwo rules are emphasized by Dr. Moll as of great\\nimportance in enabling us to clearly comprehend the\\nvarious symptoms of the hypnotic condition. The first\\nis, that men have a certain proneness to allow themselves\\nto be influenced by others through their ideas, and, in\\nparticular, to believe much without making conscious\\nlogical deductions the second rule, A psychological\\nor physiological effect tends to appear in a man if he is\\nexpecting it.\\nDr. Moll gives some very interesting cases of his\\nresearches, in his new book Hypnotism as a Science.\\nThe price of this book is $2.50 sent by mail, fully prepaid.\\nWe furnish all books mentioned in this volume that we can\\nprocure in America. We will do this to accommodate the\\nreaders who may be unable to purchase it in their locality.\\nThe time Is coming, in fact almost at hand, when the\\nsubject of Hypnotism will interest this entire nation, and\\nthat class of literature will be eagerly sought after.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0029.jp2"}, "30": {"fulltext": "28 HYPNOTISM.\\nCHAPTER II.\\nHYPNOTISM.\\nAs discovered by Dr. J. Braid; his method, and a few interesting\\ncases as cited by him, in his noted book Neurypnology.\\nThis science had lived under many names, none,\\nquite what the world demanded, for science so profound\\nand mysterious, yet so simple and easily applied. It\\nhad received many names before Dr. Braid undertook\\nthe task of rechristening it, but each was objectional,\\nbecause they all implied something more or less than the\\nscience gave. But when Dr. Braid denominated it,\\nHypnotism\u00e2\u0080\u0094 ixovci the Greek word signifying sleep it\\nwas hailed as a compromise sufficiently non-commital to\\nentitle it to recognition, and hypnotism it will be\\ncalled until some Academician drags to light the ultimate\\ncause of all things.\\nDr. Braid is entitled to great credit for the discovery\\nthat the hypnotic state can be induced independently of\\nthe presence or co-operation of another person. Two\\nfacts seem to have been demonstrated by his experiments,\\nboth of which are of the utmost importance.\\nFirst That the hypnotic sleep can be induced\\nindependently of personal contact with, or the personal\\ninfluence of, another.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0030.jp2"}, "31": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM, 29\\nSecond:\u00e2\u0080\u0094 That the sleep can be induced by his\\nmethod without the aid of any suggestion.\\nThe mistake which his followers have made is in\\njumping to the conclusion that because one of the primary\\nconditions of hypnotic phenomena can be induced without\\nthe aid of the magnetic hypothesis, therefore the magnetic\\nhypothesis is necessarily incorrect. The same logic would\\ninduce a man who for the first time sees a railroad train\\nin motion to conclude that any other method of locomotion\\nis impracticable. Braid, himself, was not so illogical; for\\nhe expressly says that he does not consider the methods\\nidentical, but does consider the condition of the nervous\\nsystem induced by both modes to be analogous.\\nThe scientific development of hypnotism we will now\\nbegin to give. In this we see, to a certain extent, a\\ncombination of the two processes just mentioned. That\\nis to say, it is found that special manipulation can call\\nforth a changed mental condition, hypnosis; it can, how-\\never, also be shown that when a man calls this out it is\\nnot by virtue of any pecuhar and mysterious unknown\\npower as until Braid s time was supposed.\\nAt first. Dr. Braid considered hypnotism to be identical\\nwith the mesmeric states, but he soon gave up this view\\nhe was of opinion that the two conditions were only\\nanalogous, and he left mesmerism in an independent\\nposition by the side of Hypnotism. Braid was acquainted\\nwith the cataleptic phenomena, (as we will show) and\\ncertain suggestions, and used hypnotism therapeutically;\\nin particular, he used it to perform painless surgical\\noperations. Already, earlier, mesmerism had been several\\ntimes made use of in surgical operations.\\nTo Dr. Braid is due the discovery of hypnotism, and", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0031.jp2"}, "32": {"fulltext": "30 HYPNOTISM,\\nthe A\\\\ords Braidism and Braidic suggestion have remained\\nin science to commemorate a new doctrine which arose\\nin the very face of Mesmerism.\\nDr. Braid proved that no magnetic fluid exists, and\\nthat no mysterious force emanates from the hypnotizer.\\nThe hypnotic state and its associated phenomena are\\npurely subjective in their origin, which is in the nervous\\nsystem of the subject himself The fixation of a brilliant\\nobject so that the muscle which holds up the upper eyelid\\nbecomes fatigued, and the concentration of the attention\\non a single idea brings about the sleep. The subjects\\ncan even bring about this condition themselves, by their\\nown tension of mind, without being submitted to any\\ninfluence from without. In this state, the imagination\\nbecomes so lively that every idea spontaneously developed\\nor suggested by a person to whom the subject gives this\\npeculiar attention and confidence, has the value of\\nan actual representation for him. The oftener these\\nphenomena are induced, the more readily and easily can\\nthey be induced, for such is the law of association and\\nhabit. If the hypnotizer s will is not expressed by his\\nwords or his gestures, or if the subject does not under-\\nstand them, no phenomena appears. The attitude which\\nis given the hypnotized subject, the position into which\\nthe muscles of his limbs or face are put, may give rise\\nto sentiment, passions, and acts corresponding to these\\nanatomical attitudes, in the same manner that the sug-\\ngestion of certain sentiments or passions may give rise to\\nco-relative mimicked attitude or expression.\\nThis part of Braid s work cannot be attacked. Obser-\\nvation confirms it on all points. But Braid s experiments\\ndid not make such stir till years after the discovery of\\nhypnotism.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0032.jp2"}, "33": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 31\\nDr. Braid also showed besides that these phenomena\\ncould be induced in certain subjects, in the waking con-\\ndition, by simple vocal suggestion, which fact he published\\nin a memoir entitled: The Power of the Mind over the\\nBody. Emotion, sensation, the passions, and even the\\nexercise of the organic functions could be modified by a\\nforeign will without the induction of hypnotism.\\nBraid had proved that the concentration of the attention\\nand thought, obtained by fixation of the gaze, were the\\ndetermining causes of the hypnotic state, but he did not try\\nto fathom the physiological and psychological mechanism\\nof the phenomena.\\nDurand de Gros tried to go further, and to explain\\nthe relations which exist between this concentration of\\nthought (the first point of departure of the Braidic\\nmodification), and the appearance of insensibility, catalepsy,\\nand ecstacy; that is, in a word, the profound and general\\nrevolution of the economy which is its culminating point.\\nThe following is the author s theory, as he himself\\ngives it\\nA general and sufiiciently intense activity of thought\\nis necessary for the regular diffusion of nervous force in\\nthe nerves of sensibility. If this activity ceases, the\\ninnervation of these nerves is suppressed, and they lose\\ntheir ability to conduct external impressions to the brain.\\nIn fact, we know that idiots are more or less anaesthetic,\\netc. On the other hand, sensation is the necessary\\nstimulus to mental activity.\\nFrom this it follows, that in order to bring about\\ninsensibility, it suffices to suspend the exercise of thought,\\nand, in order to suspend this, it is necessary to isolate\\nthe senses from the external agents which act upon them.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0033.jp2"}, "34": {"fulltext": "32 HYPNOTISM.\\nIt is not possible to suspend the actions of the mind, but\\nthey may be reduced to a minimum, by submitting them\\nexclusively to a simple, homogeneous, and continuous\\nsensation; thus, its sphere of action is reduced to a simple\\npoint. The cerebral ganglion-cell continues to secrete its\\nnervous force, but that only consumes a very small part\\nof the whole amount; hence its nervous force accumulates\\nin the brain until congestion takes place. This is the\\nfirst part of the Braidic operation, which produces what\\nthe author calls the hypotaxic condition. This condition\\nbeing once produced, the impression glides in as far as\\nthe brain, through the half open door of the sensorium,\\nalong the path of sight, of hearing, or of muscular sense,\\nand the point to which this excitation is transferred,\\nimmediately emerges from its torpor, to become the seat\\nof an activity which the tension of the nervous force\\nincreases with all its power. Thus it is that general arrest\\nof innervation will all at once succeed an excessive local\\ninnervation, which for example, will instantaneously\\nsubstitute hypersesthesia for insensibility, and catalepsy,\\ntetanus, etc., for relaxation of the muscular system, etc.\\nThe available nervous force may be called to this or\\nthat functional point of the centre of innervation, by direct-\\ning toward this point an impression, which arouses its\\npeculiar activity. To accomplish this, a mental impression\\nis employed, that is to say, an idea is suggested. This\\nconstitutes the second stage of the Braidic operation, which\\nDurand de Gros calls ideo-plastic. The idea becomes a\\ndetermining cause of the functional modifications to be\\ninduced. The mental excitation reproduces the sensation\\npreviously induced by means of organic excitations. These\\nsensations, which are originated by means of an idea, are\\ncalled sensations of recollection.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0034.jp2"}, "35": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 33\\nIt is quite natural for any man to prefer the evidence\\nof his own senses to that of all others; no one who has\\nthe opportunity to examine the phenomena for himself\\nshould neglect to do so. However, there are some cir-\\ncumstances which ought to be particularly borne in mind,\\nor very erroneous opinion may be formed by the uninitiated,\\nfrom what is actually witnessed.\\nFirst. There is a remarkable difference in the degree\\nof susceptibility of different individuals to the hypnotic\\ninfluence, some becoming rapidly and intensely affected;\\nothers slowly and feebly so. This is one, analogous to\\nwhat we experience in regard to the effects of medicine\\non different individuals, and especially as regards wine\\nand opium and nitrous oxide. Whilst this is a recognized\\nfact, as regards the latter, it appears to me somewhat\\nsurprising to find many and even professional men too,\\nwho seem to expect as much uniformity ought to obtain,\\nin regard to the Phenomena during hypnotism as if we\\nwere operating on inanimate matter. On the contrary,\\nthey ought to be ready to admit that a variety might be\\nexpected to arise even in the same individual, according\\nto the physical and mental condition of the patient at the\\nmoment the operation is performed.\\nThe next most important point for consideration is the\\nfact of all the Phenomena being consecutive, we have thus\\nthe extremes of insensibility and exalted sensibility, of\\nrigidity and mobility, at different stages, and these merging\\ninto each other by the most imperceptible gradations, or\\nin the most abrupt manner, according to the mode of\\ntreating the patient. It is no unusual thing for different\\nparties to be testing, or calling for tests, for the opposite\\nconditions at the same instant of time. These, of course,", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0035.jp2"}, "36": {"fulltext": "34 HYPNOTISM.\\nare incompatible, but at a certain stage, the transitions\\nfrom torpor of all the senses and cataleptiform rigidity\\nto the most exalted sensibility, and flaccidity of muscle,\\nmay be effected almost with the celerity of thought, even\\nso slight a cause as a breath of air directed against the\\npart. If left at rest, it will speedily merge back again,\\nand thus those unacquainted with such peculiarities will\\nbe continually liable to think they discover discrepancies\\nwhich, however, only originate from their imperfect\\nknowledge of the subject; just as an unskilful manipulator\\nwill be ready to suppose from his different results that\\nthe observations of other chemists have been erroneous.\\nThe third point meriting especial attention is the con-\\ndition of the mind at different stages. As results from\\nopium, so also from hypnotism. At one stage it gives\\nan extraordinary power of concentration of thought, or\\ndisposition to rapt contemplation, whereas, at another stage\\nthe discursive or imaginative faculties are excited into\\nfull play, and thus the most expanded, bright and glowing\\nscenes and images are presented to the fervid imagination.\\nIt must also be borne in mind that these opposite\\nmental conditions may glide into each other by the most\\nimperceptible degrees; or by the most abrupt transitions,\\naccording to the modes of management, and thus con-\\nsciousness or unconsciousness, sound sleep, or somnambulism\\nwill result, according as sensations or ideas predominate.\\nIt appears quite evident that whatever images or mental\\nemotions or thoughts have been excited in the mind during\\nthe nervous sleep are generally liable to recur, or be\\nrenovated or manifested when the patient is again placed\\nunder similar circumstances. I am induced to adopt this\\ncourse from my anxiety to remove every possible source of\\n1", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0036.jp2"}, "37": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 35\\nerror as to the cause of the original manifestations, and\\nfrom the recollection of the remarkable circumstance of\\nthe woman who during natural somnambulism could repeat\\ncorrectly portions of the Hebrew Bible, and other books\\nin languages she had never studied, and was perfectly\\nignorant of when awake, but was at length discovered to\\nhave been acquired from hearing a clergyman with whom\\nshe had resided when a girl reading them aloud to himself;\\nand also from patients whilst laboring under diseases\\nremembering languages long forgotten. Then during the\\nnervous sleep there is the power of exciting patients to\\nmanifest the passions and emotions, and certain mental\\nfaculties in a more striking manner than the same indi-\\nviduals are capable of in the waking condition. No one\\ncan doubt who has seen much of these experiments, and\\nit can in no way alter the importance of hypnotism as a\\ncurative power and extraordinary means of co7itrolling a7id\\ndirecting vienial fu7ictions in a particular manner by a\\nsimple association of impressions w^hether we thus act on\\nthe brain as a single organ or a combination of separate\\norgans or whether the primary associations have origin-\\nated from the special organic connections, or from some\\naccidental and unknown cause, or from preconcerted\\narrangement and arbitrary association.\\nThe experiments that I have made, says Dr. Braid,\\nof having caused patients to hypnotize, manipulate, and\\nrouse themselves (by simply desiring them to rub their\\nown eyes), and which produced results precisely the same\\nas when done by any one else, seem to me to be the most\\ndecisive proof possible that the whole result from the mind\\nand body of the patients acting and reacting on each other,\\nand that it has no dependence on any special influence", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0037.jp2"}, "38": {"fulltext": "36 HYPNOTISM.\\nemanating from another. My first experiments on this\\npoint were instituted in the presence of some friends on the\\nfirst day of May, 1843, and following days. I believe they\\nwere the first experiments of the kind which had ever been\\ntried, and they have succeeded in every case in which I\\nhave operated.\\nObservation, having thus shown what the simple hyp-\\nnotic suggestion can perform in the healthy condition, it\\nwas natural to apply these qualities to pathological states,\\nand to make use of the nervous activity concentrated by\\nmeans of suggestion, in neutralizing morbid phenomena.\\nIt was natural to say to oneself if, in a hypnotized\\nsubject, anaethesia, constructure, movements, pains, can\\nbe produced at will by an analogous mechanism, it ought\\nto be possible in some cases to suppress anaethesia, con-\\ntracture, or paralysis caused by disease, to increase the\\nweakened muscular force, to modify favorably, or to restore\\nthe functional force perverted or diminished by the patho-\\nlogical condition, as far, of course, as the organic condition\\npermits this restoration.\\nIt would seem that an idea so simple as this would\\nhave forced itself upon the attention of the first physicians\\nwho learned to recognize suggestion. But it has been a\\nlong time coming to the front. As long as magnetic\\nphenomena were considered the effect of a fluid acting\\nupon the organism, it was to this fluid action that the\\ncures were attributed. Magnetism, by its mysterious\\ninfluence upon the vital principle, reestablished functional\\nharmony it was beneficial like warmth, light, and\\nelectricity.\\nSince Braid s time, the hypothesis of a magnetic fluid\\nhas had few adherents, hyponotic suggestion has replaced", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0038.jp2"}, "39": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 37\\nmagnetism. It is the subject s imagination alone, which\\nrendered active, and causes all the phenomena.\\nIt is a singular thing that Braid, who was first to\\nestablish the doctrine of suggestion (caught sight of, for\\na moment by Bertrand) Upon firm foundation, thought no\\nmore of applying suggestion itself in its most natural\\nioxv[\\\\\u00e2\u0080\u0094 suggestion by speech to bring about the hypnosis\\nand the therapeutic effects. He induced sleep by fixation\\nupon a brilliant object he brought about therapeutic\\nefiects by means of special manipulation.\\nThe manipulations are based upon this fact, that the\\ncataleptiform rigidity of a limb produces, according to\\nBraid, an acceleration of the pulse, which becomes small.\\nThis acceleration of the pulse caused by the effort to\\nhold the limbs stretched out for five minutes, is much\\ngreater in the hypnotic than in the normal condition.\\nIf the muscles are made to relax while the subject is still\\nunder the influence of the hypnosis, the pulse declines\\nrapidly to its rate before the experiment, and even below\\nit.\\nThis understood, Braid varies the manipulation accord-\\ning to the object in view. In order to diminish,\\nBraid says, the force of the circulation in a limb and\\nreduce its sensibility, it is necessary to set the muscles\\nof this limb in activity, leaving the other limbs relaxed.\\nIf we wish to increase the force and the sensibility of a\\nlimb, it must be kept relaxed and the other limbs must\\nbe put into catalepsy. If we wish to obtain a general\\ndepression, after one or two of the limbs have been\\nextended for a short time, we must put them back care-\\nfully into the normal position, and let the entire body\\nrest. To obtain a general excitation, all the limbs should", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0039.jp2"}, "40": {"fulltext": "38 HYPNOTISM.\\nbe rendered cataleptic, whence arises difficulty in the free\\ntransmission of blood to them, and consequently an\\naugmentation of the cardiac activity, rush of blood to\\nthe brain, and excitation of the nervous centres.\\nFurther, in keeping a particular organ in action while\\nthe others are quiet, there is a considerable augmentation\\nof its activity by concentration of its nervous energy in\\nkeeping the other organs in activity, and the one which is\\ntoo active quiet, its activity is diminished.\\nThe following we give in Dr. Braid s own words, as\\nfound in his noted book, Neurypnology. We feel the\\nreaders will better understand his method if given to them\\nas he gave it to the public:\\nIt will be observed I have now entirely separated\\nHypnotism from animal magnetism, I consider it to be\\nmerely a simple, speedy and certain mode of throwing\\nthe nervous system into a new condition, which may be\\nrendered eminently available in the cure of certain dis-\\norders. I feel quite confident we have acquired in this\\nprocess a valuable addition to our curative means, but I\\nrepudiate the idea of holding it up as a Universal Remedy;\\nnor do I understand, as yet, the whole range of diseases in\\nwhich it may be useful.\\nI am aware great prejudice has been raised against\\nmesmerism from the idea that it might be turned to\\nimmoral purposes. In respect to the Neuro-Hypnotic\\nstate, induced by my methods (James Braid, M. R. C. S.\\nE., C. M. W. S.), I am quite certain that it deserves no\\nsuch censure. I have proved by experiments, both In\\npublic and in private, that during the state of excitement\\nthe judgment Is sufficiently active to make the patients, if\\npossible, even more fastidious as regards propriety of", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0040.jp2"}, "41": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 39\\nconduct than in the waking condition; and from the state\\nof rigidity and insensibility, they can be roused to a state\\nof mobihty and exalted sensibility either by being rudely\\nhandled or even by a breath of air. Nor is it requisite\\nthis should be done by the person who put them in the\\nHypnotic state. It will follow equally from the manipula-\\ntions of any one else, or a current of air infringing against\\nthe body from any mechanical contrivance whatever. And,\\nfinally, the state cannot be induced in any stage, unless with\\nthe knowledge and consent of the party operated on. This\\nis more than can be said respecting a great number of our\\nmost valuble medicines, for there are many of which we are\\nin the daily habit of using with the best advantage in the\\nrelief and cure of disease, which may be and have been\\nrendered^ most potent for the furtherance of the ends of the\\nvicious and cruel, and which can be administered without\\nthe knowledge of the i?itended victim. It ought never to be\\nlost sight of that there is the 2ise and abuse of everything\\nin nature. It is the use and only the judicious use of\\nhypnotism which I advocate.\\nDEFINITION OF FORMS.\\nNeurypnology is derived from the Greek words\\nfor Nerve Sleep, a Discourse; and means the nationale, or\\ndoctrine of nervous sleep, which I define to be a peculiar\\ncondition of the nervous system, induced by a fixed and\\nabstracted attention of the mental and visual eye, on one\\nobject, not of an exciting nature.\\nBy the term Neuro-Hypnotism this is to be\\nunderstood nervous sleep, and for the sake of brevity,\\nsuppressing the prefix Neuro by the terms as follows:", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0041.jp2"}, "42": {"fulltext": "40 HYPNOTISM.\\nHypnotic. The state or condition of nervous sleep.\\nHypnotize. To induce nervous sleep.\\nHypnotized. One who has been put Into the state of\\nnervous sleep.\\nWxY^onisiA.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Nervous sleep.\\nDehypnotize.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 To restore from the state or condition\\nof nervous sleep.\\nDehypnotized. Restored from the state or condition\\nof nervous sleep.\\nHypnotist. One who practices Neuro-Hypnotlsm.\\nI now proceed to detail the mode which I practice\\nfor inducing the Phenomena. Take any bright object, (I\\ngenerally use my lancet case), between the thumb and fore\\nand middle fingers of the left hand. Hold it from eight to\\nfifteen inches from the eyes, at such position above the\\nforehead as may be necessary to produce the greatest\\npossible strain upon the eyes and eyelids, and enable the\\npatient to maintain a steady fixed stare at the object. The\\npatient must be made to understand that he is to keep the\\neyes steadily fixed on the object, and the mind riveted on\\nthe idea of that one object.\\nIt will be observed that owing to the consensual\\nadjustment of the eyes the pupils will be at first contracted,\\nthey will shortly begin to dilate, and after they have done\\nso to a considerable extent, and have assumed a wavy\\nmotion, if the fore and middle fingers of the right hand\\nextended and a little separated, are carried from the object\\ntoward the eyes, most probably the eyelids will close\\ninvoluntarily, with a vibratory motion. If this is not the\\ncase, or the patient allows the eyeballs to move, desire him\\nto begin anew, giving him to understand that he Is to allow\\nthe eyelids to close when the fingers are again carried", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0042.jp2"}, "43": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM, 41\\ntoward the eyes, but the eyeballs must be kept fixed in the\\nsame position, and the mind riveted to the one idea of the\\nobject held above the eyes. It will generally be found that\\nthe eyelids close with a vibratory motion, or become\\nspasmodically closed. After ten or fifteen seconds have\\nelapsed, by gently elevating the arms and legs it will be\\nfound that the patient has a disposition to retain them in\\nthe situation they have been placed, if he is inteiisely\\naffected. If this is not the case, in a soft tone of voice\\ndesire him to retain the limbs in the extended position, and\\nthus the pulse will speedily become greatly accelerated, and\\nthe limbs in process of time will become quite rigid and\\ninvoluntarily fixed. It will also be found that all the organs\\nof special sense, excepting sight, including heat and cold,\\nand muscular motion and resistance, and certain mental\\nfaculties are at first prodigiously exalted, such as happens\\nwith regard to the primary efifects of opium or spirits.\\nAfter a certain point, however, this exaltation of functions\\nis followed by a state of depression far greater than the\\ntorpor of 7iatural sleep. By mere repose the senses will\\nspeedily merge into the original condition again.\\nFrom the state of the most profound torpor of the\\norgans of special sense, and tonic rigidity of the muscles,\\nthey may at this stage instantly be restored to the opposite\\ncondition of extreme mobihty and exalted sensibility, by\\ndirecting a current of air against the organ or organs we\\nwish to excite to action, or the muscles we wish to render\\nlimber, and which had been in the cataleptiform state.\\nAn abrupt blow or pressure over the rigid muscle will\\nde-hypnotize a rigid part, biit I have found that pressing\\nthe nose will not restore smell, unless very gentle and\\ncontinued, nor will pressing a handkerchief against the", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0043.jp2"}, "44": {"fulltext": "42 HYPNOTISM.\\near restore hearing when the ear has become torpid, nor\\nwill gentle friction over the skin restore sensibility to the\\ndormant skin or mobility to the rigid muscles underneath\\n(unless so gentle as to be titillation properly so called),\\nand yet a slight puff of wind will instantly rouse the whole\\nto abnormal sensibility and mobility, a fact which has\\nperplexed and puzzled me exceedingly.\\nAt first I required the patients to look at an object until\\nthe eyeHds closed of themselves, involuntarily. I found,\\nhowever, in many cases this was followed by pain in the\\nglobes of the eyes, and slight inflammation of the conjunc-\\ntival membrane. In order to avoid this I now close the\\neyelids, when the impression on the pupil already referred\\nto has taken place, because I find that the beneficial\\nphenomena follow this method, provided that the eyeballs\\nare kept fixed, and thus too, the unpleasant feelings in the\\nglobes of the eyes will be prevented. Were the object to\\nproduce astonishment in the person operated on, by finding\\nhimself unable to open his eyes, the former method is the\\nbetter; as the eyes once closed it is generally impossible for\\nhim to open them, whereas they may be opened for a\\nconsiderable time after being closed in the other mode I\\nnow recommend. However, for curative purposes, I prefer\\nthe plan which leaves no pain in the globes of the eyes.\\nI feel confident that the Phenomena are induced solely\\nby an impression made on the nervous centres by the\\nphysical psychical condition of the patient, irrespective\\nof any agency proceeding from or excited into action by\\nanother, as any one can hypnotize himself by attending\\nstrictly to the simple rules I lay down; and the following is\\na striking example of the fact which was communicated\\nto me and two other gentlemen by a most respectable", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0044.jp2"}, "45": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 43\\nteacher. He found that a number of his pupils had been in\\nthe habit of hypnotizing themselves, and he had ordered\\nthem to discontinue the practice. However, one day he\\nascertained a girl had hypnotized herself by looking at the\\nwall, and that a companion had put a pen in her hand\\nwith which she had written the word Manchester, and\\nshe held the pen very firmly\u00e2\u0080\u0094 in fact the fingers were\\ncatileptiforml)/ rigid. He spoke to her in a very gentle\\ntone of voice, and called her. She arose and advanced\\ntowards him, and when awake was not aware he had called\\nher or of what had passed. A patient may be hynotized\\nby keeping the eyes fixed in any direction. It occurs\\nmost slowly and feebly when the eyes are directed straight\\nforward, and most rapidly and intensely when they can be\\nmaintained in the position of a double internal and upward\\nsquint.\\nIt is very important to remark that the oftener the\\npatients are hypnotized, from association of ideas and\\nhabit, the more susceptible they become and in this way\\nthey are liable to be affected entirely throngh the imagin-\\nation. Thus, if they consider or imagine there is something\\ndoing, although they do not see it, from which they are to\\nbe affected, they will become affected but on the contrary,\\nthe most expert hypnotist in the world may exert all his\\nendeavors in vain if the party does not expect it, and\\nmentally and bodily comply, and thus yield to it.\\nIt is on this very principle of over exerting the attention\\nby keeping it riveted on one subject or idea which is not\\nof itself of an exciting ?iature, and over-exercising one set\\nof muscles, and the state of the strained eyes, with the\\nsuppressed respiration, and general repose which attend\\nsuch experiments, which excites in the brain and whole", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0045.jp2"}, "46": {"fulltext": "44 HYPNOTISM.\\nnervous system that peculiar state which I call Hypnotism\\nor Nervous Sleep. The most striking proofs that it is\\ndifferent from common sleep are the extraordinary effects\\nproduced by it. In deep abstraction of mind it is well\\nknown the individual becomes unconscious of surrounding\\nobjects, and in some cases of. severe bodily inflictions.\\nDuring Hypnotism or Nervous Sleep, the functions in\\naction seem to be so intensely active as must in a great\\nmeasure rob the others of that degree of nervous energy\\nnecessary for exciting their sensibility. This alone may\\naccount for much of the dullness of common feeling during\\nthe abnormal quickness and extended range of action of\\ncertain other functions.\\n*I shall now point out the symptoms of danger, with the\\nmode of arousing patients, and thus preventing mischief\\nwhich might ensue for want of due caution in the operator.\\nWhenever I observe breathing very much oppressed, the\\nface greatly flushed, the rigidity excessive, or the action\\nof the heart very quick and tumultuous, I instantly arouse\\nthe patient, which I have always readily and speedily\\nsucceeded in doing by a clap of the hands, an abrupt shock\\non the arm or leg, by striking them sharply with the flat\\nhand, pressure and friction over the eyelids, and by a\\ncurrent of air wafted against the face. I have never failed\\nby these means to restore my patients very speedily.\\nI feel convinced that Hypnotism is not only a valuable\\nbut also a perfectly safe remedy for many complaints, if\\njudiciously used. Still it ought not to be trifled with by\\nignorant persons for the mere sake of gratifying idle\\ncuriosity. In all cases of apoplectic tendency, or where\\nthere is aneurism or serious organic disease of the heart, it\\nought not to be resorted to, excepting with the precaution", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0046.jp2"}, "47": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 45\\nthat it may be In the mode calculated to depress the force\\nand frequency of the heart s action.\\nIn passing into common or natural sleep, objects are\\nperceived more and more faintly, the eyelids close and\\nremain quiescent, and all the other organs of special\\nsense become gradually blunted, and cease to convey\\ntheir usual impressions to the brain, the limbs becorne\\nflaccid from cessation of muscular tone and action, the\\npulse and respiration become slower, the pupils are\\nturned upwards and inwards, and are contracted. Miiller.\\nIn the Hypnotic state induced with the view of\\nexhibiting what I call the Hypnotic Phenomena, vision\\nbecomes more and more imperfect, the eyelids are closed,\\nbut have for a considerable time a vibratory motion,\\n(in some few they are forcibly closed, as by spasm of the\\norbiculares) the organs of special sense, particularly of\\nsmell, touch, and hearing, heat and cold, and resistance,\\nare greatly exalted, and afterwards become blunted, in a\\ndegree far beyond natural sleep the pupils are turned\\nupwards and inwards, but contrary to what happens in\\nNatural Sleep. They are greatly dilated,, and highly\\ninsensible to light; after a length of time the pupils\\nbecome contracted, whilst the eyes are still insensible to\\nlight. The pulse and respiration are, at first, slower\\nthan is natural, but immediately, on calling muscles into\\naction, a tendency to cataleptiform rigidity is assumed,\\nwith rapid pulse, and oppressed and quick breathing.\\nThe limbs are thus maintained in a state of tonic rigidity\\nfor any length of time I have yet thought it prudent to\\ntry, instead of that state of flaccidity induced by common\\nor natural sleep and the most remarkable circumstance\\nis this, that there seems to be no corresponding state\\nof muscular exhaustion from such action.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0047.jp2"}, "48": {"fulltext": "46 HYPNOTISM.\\nIn passing into natural sleep, anything held in the\\nhand is soon allowed to drop from our grasp, but in the\\nartificial sleep now referred to, it will be held much more\\nfirmly than before falling asleep. This is a very remark-\\nable difference.\\nThe power of balancing themselves is so great that I\\nhave never seen one of these hypnotic somnambulists fall.\\nThe same is noted of natural somnambulists. This is a\\nremarkable fact, and would appear to occur in this way,\\nthat they acquire the centre of gravity, as if by instinct, in\\nthe most natural, and therefore^ in the most graceful maimer\\nand if allowed to remain in this position they will speedily\\nbecome cataleptiform and immovably fixed. From observ-\\ning these two facts, and the general tendency and taste for\\ndancing displayed by most patients on hearing lively music\\nduring hypnotism, the peculiarly graceful and appropriate\\nmovement of many when thus excited, and the varied and\\nelegant postures they may be made to assume by slight\\ncurrents of air, and the faculty of retaining any position\\nwith so much ease, I have hazarded the opinion that the\\nGreeks may have been indebted to Hypnotism for the\\nperfection of their Sculpture, and the fakirs of India for\\ntheir wonderful feats of suspending their bodies by a leg\\nor an arm.\\nIt thus clearly appears that it differs from common\\nsleep in many respects, that there is first a state of\\nexcitement as with opium and wine, and spirits, and\\nafterwards a state of corresponding deep depression or\\ntorpor.\\nEFFECT OF HYPNOTISM.\\nThe tactual sensibility is so great that the slightest\\ntouch is felt. The sense of heat, cold and resistance are", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0048.jp2"}, "49": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 47\\nalso exalted to that degre as to enable the patient to feel\\nanything 7vitlwut actual contact. In some cases, at a consid-\\nerable distance, some will feel a breath of air from the\\nlips, at the distance of 50 to 90 feet, and bend from it,\\nand by making a back current, as by waving the hand,\\nor a fan, will move in the opposite direction. The patient\\nhas a tendency to app7 oach tOy or recede from iuipj essions\\naccording as they are agreeable or disagreeable, either in\\nquality or intensity. Thus they will approach to soft\\nsounds, but they will recede from loud sounds, however\\nharmonious. By allowing a little time to elapse, and the\\npatient to be in a state of quietude, he will lapse into\\nthe opposite extreme of rigidity and torpor of all the\\nsenses, so that he will not hear the loudest noise, nor\\nsmell the most fragrant or pungent odor nor feel what is\\nhot or cold, although not only approximated to but\\nbrought into contact with the skin. He may now be\\npricked or pinched or maimed, without exciting the\\nslightest symptom of pain or sensibility, and the limbs will\\nremain rigidly fixed. At this stage a puff of wind directed\\nagainst any organ instantaneously rouses it to sensibility,\\nand the rigid muscles to a state of mobility. Thus the\\npatient may be unconscious of the loudest noise, but by\\nsimply causing a current of air to come against the ear a\\nmoderate noise will instantly be heard so intensely as to\\nmake the patient start and shiver violently, although the\\nwhole body had immediately before been rigidly catalepti-\\nform. A rose, valerian, or strong ammonia may have\\nbeen held close under the nostrils without being perceived,\\nbut a puff of wind directed against the nostrils will instantly\\narouse the sense so much that supposing the rose had been\\ncarried forty-six feet distant, the patient has instantly set", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0049.jp2"}, "50": {"fulltext": "48 HYPNOTISM.\\noff in pursuit of it, and even whilst the eyes were bandag-ed,\\nreached it as certainly as a dog traces out game but as\\nrespects valerian or ammonia, will rush from the unpleasant\\nsmell with great haste. The same with the sense of\\ntouch.\\nCURATIVE POWERS OF HYPNOTISM.\\nOf all the circumstances connected with Hypnotic\\nSleep, nothing so strongly marks the difference between it\\nand natural sleep as the wonderful power the former\\nevinces in curing many diseases of long standing, and\\nwhich had resisted natural sleep, and every known agency\\nfor years patients who have been born deaf and dumb,\\nof various ages, up to thirty-two years of age, had con-\\ntinued without the power of hearing sound until the time\\nthey were operated on by me, and yet they were enabled\\nto do so by being kept in the hypnotic state for eight, ten\\nor twelve months, and have had their hearing still further\\nimproved by a repetition of similar operations. Now\\nsupposing these patients to have spent six hours out of\\ntwenty-four in sleep, many of them had had five, six or\\neight years of continuous sleep, but still awoke as they lay\\ndown, incapable of hearing sound, and yet they had some\\ndegrees of it communicated to them by a few minutes\\nof Hypnotism. Can any stronger proof be wanted or\\nadduced than this, that it is very different from common\\nsleep. A lady, fifty-four years of age, had been suffering\\nfor sixteen years from incipient amarosis. When she called\\non me she could with difficulty read two words of the\\nlargest heading of a newspaper. After eight minutes\\nhypnotic sleep, however, she could read the other words,\\nand in three minutes more the whole of the smaller heading,", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0050.jp2"}, "51": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 49\\nand the same afternoon, with the aid of her glasses, she\\nread the ii8th Psalm, 29 verses, in the small Diamond\\nPolyglot Bible, which for years had been a sealed book to\\nher. There has also been a most remarkable improvement\\nin this lady s general health since she was hypnotized.\\nIs there any individual who can fail to see in this case\\nsomething different from common sleep? Whilst I feel\\nassured from personal experience and the testimony of\\nprofessional friends on whose judgment and candor I can\\nimplicitly rely, that in this we have acquired an important\\ncurative agency for a certai?i class of diseases, I desire\\nit to be distinctly understood that I by no means wish\\nto hold it up as a universal remedy. I believe it is\\ncapable of doing great good, if judiciously applied. Dis-\\neases evince totally different pathological conditions, and\\nthe treatment ought to be varied accordingly. We have,\\ntherefore, no right to expect to find a universal remedy\\neither in this or any other method of treatment.\\nFrom the foregoing you can readily see that Dr.\\nBraid proved Hypnotism to contain great virtue, mainly\\nto be used as a curative power. Since his discovery, the\\nmedical world has from time to time made researches,\\nwhich always prove the same but, a science so simple,\\nyet, so hard to explain to the ordinary mind, gains\\nfirm ground slowly, thus, year after year has passed\\nby, without Hypnotism becoming popular among doctors\\nand patients. In fact, not until the year i860, did any\\nphysician dream of applying hypnotism for diseases the\\nsame as he applied medicine. Then, Dr. Li^bault took\\nup the study where Dr. Braid had left off. So great has\\nbeen his achievements, that to-day all the scientific world\\nwonders. To him, too much credit cannot be given, as", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0051.jp2"}, "52": {"fulltext": "50 HYPNOTISM.\\nit is through his patient efforts that the medical world,\\nat last, acknowledges the power of this great science\\nHypnotism, as you will see further on.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0052.jp2"}, "53": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 51\\nCHAPTER III.\\nHYPNOTISM.\\nThe School of Nancy The Nine Degrees of Hypnotism The\\nTheory of Hypnotism as advanced by Dr. Li^bault, the founder\\nof the Nancy School The discovery of Suggestion, showing\\nhow it has helped the Science of Hypnotism to advance in the\\nMedical World.\\nMonsieur Li6bault was born September 17th, 1823, at\\nFavieres, a village about thirty miles from Nancy, in the\\ndepartment of Meurthe, France. In 1866 Dr. Liebault\\nfounded the School of Nancy. At the outset, the opinions\\nhe held were received with incredulity. His practice\\nappeared so strange that the doctors dismissed it without\\ninquiry, and Dr. Liebault kept entirely aloof from the\\nmedical profession, absorbed in his studies and devoting\\nhimself to his patients, mostly recruited from among the\\npoor class. Bernheim.\\nSince then, time has progressed and hypnotism has\\nadvanced. Dr. Liebault is now well known. France\\nclaims him as one of her celebrities, and all he says and\\nwrites is accepted. Success has not changed him, his\\ninnate modesty will not, unfortunately, permit our offering\\nhis likeness to the reader, for he refuses to be photo-\\ngraphed, saying that photographs of cHnics or doctors\\ndo not add to the value and reputation of a school.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0053.jp2"}, "54": {"fulltext": "52 HYPNOTISM.\\nDr. Liebault s pupils have revealed him to the world of\\nscience; it is they who have quoted him, and by their\\nown authority have enforced him on the public attention.\\nAmong the most distinguished are Professor Liegeois\\nof the Faculty of Law, who loudly expresses his regret\\nthat his master s book is too dear, and therefore not\\nsufficiently popularized and Professors Bernheim and\\nBeaunis, both eminent physiologists of the Faculty of\\nMedicine.\\nThe theory of the Nancy school is, that the different\\nphysiological conditions characterizing the hypnotic state\\nare determined by mental action alone; that the phenomena\\ncan best be produced in persons of sound physical health\\nand perfect mental balance; and that this mental action\\nand the consequent physical and psychological phenomena\\nare the result, in all cases, of some form of suggestion.\\nThe Nancy school of hypnotism is entitled to the\\ncredit of having made the most important discovery in\\npsychological science. The fact that the subjective mind\\nis constantly amenable to control by the power of sugges-\\ntion, constitutes the grand principle in psychological\\nscience which, when properly appreciated and applied,\\nwill solve every problem and illuminate every obscurity\\nin the labyrinthian science of the human soul, so far as it\\nwill ever be possible for finite intelligence to penetrate it.\\nIt is safe to say, that in all the broad realm of psycho-\\nlogical science, there is not a phenomenon upon which it\\nwill not shed light. It is no discredit to say that its leaders\\nand teachers do not yet seem to comprehend the profound\\nsignificance of their discovery as yet, this vast find is\\nonly understood in its rudimentary forms.\\nThe Nancy school produces all its phenomena by oral", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0054.jp2"}, "55": {"fulltext": "HYPNO TISM. 53\\nsuggestio7i, and ignores the fact that the sleep can be\\nproduced in the absence of any form of suggestion. It\\nrepudiates Braid s method of inducing it as 2innecessary\\nand also as injurious, in that the physical disturbance of\\nthe nerve centres unduly excites the patient.\\nThe Nancy school attributes all the phenomena, includ-\\ning the induction of the state, to the power of suggestion^\\nand that it is to the psychic powers and attributes of man\\nalone that we must look for an explanation. Thus the\\nNancy school, true to its theory, employs suggestion alone\\nto induce the condition. Passes are sometimes made over\\nits subjects after the manner of the mesmerists, but only\\nwith a view of giving an air of mystery to the proceedings,\\nand thus adding potency to the suggestion.\\nAs for the therapeutic suggestions and their efficacy,\\nthey by no means imply the abolition of will; the subject\\nwishes to be cured, lends himself to the idea, and aided by\\nhis own imagination is oftentimes successfully cured.\\nWe have often heard it said, that hypnotism is\\ndangerous to the patient; we wish to state here, that\\nsuch is not the case. All the faults that can be found\\nwith hypnotism can be found with drugs, and itiany more.\\nDr. Liebault, who has used hypnotism therapeutically in\\nFrance for about thirty-three, years, has watched cases\\nfor a long time without finding bad consequences.\\nAmong the many objections raised to suggestive\\ntherapeutics is the assertion that the patients do not\\nretain any lasting improvement, and few real cures are\\nproved. Doctor Moll, answers the above as follows\\nThe results are by no means transitory; on the\\ncontrary, a large number of lasting cures have been observed\\nand published. I have seen many cases where there was", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0055.jp2"}, "56": {"fulltext": "54 HYPNOTISM.\\nno relapse for years. One cannot ask for more. I have\\nknown patients to be cured for years, and die from\\nanother disease. The objection that the improvement\\nmay be only temporary is thus not justified. But; even\\nwere this so, we must still rejoice to have found a way\\nof procuring even temporary relief. For instance, in\\ndifficulties of menstruation, it is a great thing if we can\\nsucceed in subduing pain for a time. If the pain returns\\na new hypnosis may be induced; it is always to be had,\\nand as it generally becomes deeper the more it is used,\\nit is less likely to lose its effect, (even in relapses) than\\ndrugs which often do so quickly. In any case, therapeutics\\nare not yet so far advanced, as to give us the right to reject\\na remedy merely because it only effects symptoms or has\\noften merely a temporary value. If, we doctors were to\\nreject remedies which suppress the phenomena of disease\\nfor a time only, we might abandon a large part of\\ntherapeutics, perhaps the whole. Besides, from some\\nmethods of treatment nothing but a temporary improve-\\nment is expected, and yet this temporary improvement\\nis considered to prove the value of the method. Remedies\\nshould nut be weighed and measured by different\\nstandards.\\nPerhaps it would be well for the reader at this stage\\nto become acquainted with the different degrees of\\nhypnotism, and as no better classifications can be found\\nthan those given by Dr. Bernheim in his book Sugges-\\ntive Therapeutics, which has been translated by Christian\\nA. Herter, M. D. If you want to own or read this book\\n(which perhaps is the best publication on Hypnotism to be\\nfound translated into English), we can send it to you by\\nregistered mail, price $3.75. It is a large, handsome book", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0056.jp2"}, "57": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 55\\nof some four hundred pages closely printed. It is a book\\nevery one interested in hypnotism should own.\\nDr. Bernheim was a professor of medicine in the faculty\\nat Nancy. This work has won for himi well deserved\\nrenov/n everywhere, and his honesty and truthfulness\\nwould not be questioned by any reliable medical authority\\nin the civilized world.\\nFirst Degree. The patient does not exhibit cat-\\nalepsy, anaesthesia, hallucination, nor sleep, properly\\nso-called. He says he has not slept, or that he has been\\nonly more or less drowsy. If sleep is suggested to him,\\nhe is content to remain with his eyes closed. He must\\n7iot be dared to open his eyes, however, because then he\\nopens them. The influence obtained may appear as naught\\nor as doubtful, yet it exists; because if neither sleep,\\ncatalepsy, nor any other manifestations may be provoked,\\nsuggestibility can nevertheless assert itself through other\\ninfluences. For example, a suggestion of heat on a deter-\\nmined part of the body may be induced, certain pains may\\nbe destroyed, and evident therapeutic effects may be\\nobtained.\\nI have succeeded in some cases, to all appearance\\nrefractory, in inducing all the regular manifestations of\\nhypnotism, by suggestions, causing pains of a muscular\\nor inveterate nervous character to disappear\u00e2\u0080\u0094 evident\\nproof that suggestibility exists for certain organic\\nactivities.\\nSecond Degree. The patient has the same appear-\\nance as in the preceding degree and presents the same\\nnegative symptoms. If sleep is suggested, he remains\\nwith his eyes closed without really sleeping, or is only\\ndrowsy; but he differs from the subject of the preceding", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0057.jp2"}, "58": {"fulltext": "56 HYPNOTISM.\\ndegree, in that he cannot open his eyes spontaneously\\nif he is dared to do so. Here the influence is evident.\\nThird Degree. The patient is susceptible to sug-\\ngestive catalepsy whether the eyes are open or shut, and\\nwhether he is drowsy or wakeful. As we have already\\nstated, this catalepsy varies in intensity. In the degree of\\nwhich we are speaking, the patient retains the position\\ninduced or suggested, unless challenged to alter it. If he\\nis challenged, he regains consciousness, so to speak, and\\nsucceeds in changing his position by an effort of the will.\\nTo a superficial observer, the influence may appear\\ndoubtful, but this is no longer the case, if upon repeating\\nthe experiment, it is shown that the patient keeps his\\npassive position from inertia, so long as his dormant will\\nis not roused.\\nFourth Degree. In this degree, the suggestive\\ncatalepsy is more pronounced and resists all efforts on\\nthe part of the subject to break it. The influence is\\nevident. The subject may be convinced that he is\\ninfluenced by showing him that he cannot alter the\\nposition induced.\\nBesides this, suggestive catalepsy and automatic\\nrotatory movement in the upper extremities may some-\\ntimes be induced, which may continue for a long time.\\nIn some cases this motion is obtained by simply commun-\\nicating the impulse. In others, catalepsy, some patients\\nsucceed in checking the motion by an effort of the will\\nif they are dared to do so; others do not succeed in spite\\nof all effort.\\nFifth Degree. In addition to the cataleptic form\\ncondition, accompanied or unaccompanied by automatic\\nmovements, contractures varying in degree may be", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0058.jp2"}, "59": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 57\\ninduced by suggestion. The patient is dared to bend his\\narm, to open his hand, to open or shut his mouth, and he\\ncannot do it.\\nSixth Degree. The patient exhibits, moreover, a\\nmore or less marked docihty, or automatic obedience.\\nThough inert and passive if left to himself, he rises at a\\nsuggestion, walks, stands still if ordered, and remains fixed\\nto a spot when told that he cannot advance.\\nAs in the preceding degrees, he is susceptible neither\\nto sensorial illusions nor to hallucination.\\nThe subject in these different categories remembers\\neverything upon waking. Some, however, are conscious\\nof having slept They remain inert, passive, without\\nspontaneity and without initiative. This is the case to\\nsuch a degree, that they cannot be roused from their\\ntorpid state until the intellectual initiative regains the\\nupper hand, and they come out of the condition spon-\\ntaneously. Some do not know whether they have really\\nslept, and others positively state that they have not been\\nasleep. But in cases included under the last three degrees,\\nthe patients can be convinced that, if they have not slept,\\nthey have been at least influenced.\\nBetween a perfectly conscious condition and deep\\nsleep all transitions exist. It is certain that in many\\nsubjects belonging to these different categories, intelligence\\nand sensibility remain active during hypnosis. Others\\nhave only certain symptoms of the sleep; the lack of\\ninitiative, inertia, sensation of drowsiness and the closed\\neyelids, or their minds reacting to the operator whom they\\nanswer and obey, seem uninfluenced by other people\\nwhom they do not appear to hear, and to whose questions\\nthey give no answer.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0059.jp2"}, "60": {"fulltext": "58 HYPNOTISM.\\nIt Is often difficult to penetrate the psychical con-\\ndition of the subject hypnotized. Observation requires\\nnicety, and analysis is subtle. Some cases are doubtful,\\nsimulation is possible and easy, and it is still easier to\\nbelieve in simulation where it does not exist. Certain\\nsubjects, for example, keep their eyes closed while the\\noperator is hypnotizing them. When he ceases -to look at\\nthem their eyes open, and close quickly when he again\\nfixes his gaze upon them. There is every appearance of\\ndeceit. The assistants believe it a fraud. They pity the\\noperator s naive credulity and think the subject is deceitful,\\nor that he is acting to oblige the operator.\\nThis occurs daily in the presence of my pupils. I\\nshow them, however, that the subject is not deceiving\\nme, and that I am not imposed upon, by hypnotizing\\nhim again, and inducing catalepsy or contracture out of\\nwhich I challenge him to come, requesting him at the\\nsame time, not to think of obliging anyone.\\nThis tendency which certain subjects have to open\\ntheir eyes again, and come out of their inertia as soon\\nas the operator ceases to influence and watch them, this\\napparent pretending which is especially frequent in children,\\nexists even in certain somnambulists, and one would swear\\nthat deception had been practised in these cases. Never-\\ntheless, the subject remembers nothing upon waking.\\nThe majority of patients, however, remain with eyes\\nclosed for some time, apparently or actually asleep. They\\nonly open their eyes after the influence has worn off or\\nwhen they are told to awake. Considering these facts,\\nI cannot repeat too often that the hypnotized subject is\\nnot a lifeless corpse or a body in a state of lethargy, for\\neven though he is inert he hears, is conscious, and shows", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0060.jp2"}, "61": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM, 59\\nsigns of life. We may see him laugh or try to smother\\na laugh. He may remark upon his condition. He some-\\ntimes pretends that he is cheating or that he is trying to\\nbe obliging. Behind the doctor s back, he boasts in\\ngood faith that he has not been sleeping, but has only\\npretended to sleep. He is not always aware that he is\\nunable to pretend, and that his disposition to oblige is\\nforced upon him, and is due to a weakening of his will\\nor of his power of resistance. The majority, however,\\nfinally become aware of this want of power. They feel\\nthat they are influenced. They are conscious of having\\nslept even when memory is preserved upon waking.\\nIn the degrees of which I shall now speak, there is\\nno longer any uncertainty as to the hypnotic influence,\\nfor there is amnesia upon waking, which is sometimes\\ncomplete, sometimes partial.\\nThe subject remembers imperfectly. He knows that\\nhe has heard voices, but does not know what has been\\nsaid. He recalls some things. Other incidents of his\\nhypnotic life are obliterated. These degrees of hypnotism\\nin which memory is destroyed upon waking, we call\\nsomnambulism. In certain cases, somnambuHsm last only\\nduring particular moments of the hypnosis. Here there\\nis sleep if by sleep we mean that condition of the mind\\nwhich leaves behind it forgetfulness of all that has occurred\\nduring its existence. It is in this somnambulistic condition\\nthat we find subjects susceptible to hallucination, analgesia,\\nand suggestions of acts. Suggestibility here reaches its\\nhighest development. There are many variations however\\nin this condition.\\nSeventh Degree. Cases in which there is amnesia\\nupon waking but in which hallucinations cannot be", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0061.jp2"}, "62": {"fulltext": "6o HYPNOTISM.\\ninduced, I consider as belonging to this degree. Almost\\nall somnambulistic subjects in this degree are susceptible to\\ncatalepsy, contractions, automatic movements and automatic\\nobedience. One or the other of these phenomena, however,\\nmay be wanting. Sometimes all are absent, but this is\\nexceptional, as we have said. Amnesia upon waking is\\nthe only symptom characteristic of somnambulism. The\\neyes may be open or shut in this as in the following\\ncondition.\\nEighth Degree. There is amnesia upon waking as\\nwell as a great number of the phenomena observed in the\\npreceding degrees. Susceptibility to hallucination during\\nsleep is increased, but post-hypnotic hallucinations cannot\\nbe induced.\\nNinth Degree. Amnesia upon waking, with the\\npossibility of inducing hypnotic and post-hypnotic\\nhallucinations.\\nThese hallucinations are more or less complete and\\ndistinct. They may succeed with certain senses, for\\nexample the olfactory and auditary, but not with others, as\\nthe visual. In many cases all the most complex hallucina-\\ntions are perfectly carried out. Many more phases could\\nbe mentioned according to the power of mental represen-\\ntation which in each subject calls forth images with greater\\nor less clearness and vividness.\\nMore or less complete suggestive anaesthesia or\\nanalgesia may be met with in all degrees of hypnotism.\\nIt is generally more frequent and more pronounced in\\ninstances of the degrees last mentioned those in which\\nthere is deep somnambulism and where there is great\\naptitude for hallucinations.\\nBy stating the fjcts in this way, I believe I came", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0062.jp2"}, "63": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 6 1\\nnearer the truth. Hypnotism manifests itself in different\\nsubjects in different ways. There may be simply drowsi-\\nness, or other induced sensations, as heat, prickling,\\ncold, etc. This is the lightest influe?ice. We have more\\nmarked effects when suggestion affects motility develops\\nthe cataleptic condition, the inability to move, contraction\\nand automatic movements. It is still more decided when\\nit affects the will and causes automatic obedience. All\\nthese manifestations of motion, will, and even sensibility can\\nbe affected by suggestion with or without sleep, and even\\nwhen it is powerless to induce sleep. In a more intense\\ndegree, suggestion produces sleep or an illusion of sleep.\\nThe subject convinced that he is sleeping, does not\\nremember anything upon waking. In general, the more\\nadvanced degrees of suggestion affect the sensorial and\\nsensory spheres\u00e2\u0080\u0094 memory and imagination. Illusions may\\nbe created and destroyed, and the imagination may call\\nforth the most varied memory pictures.\\nI insist upon the fact that all or some of these\\nsuggestions may be realized with or without sleep. Other\\nsuggestions may succeed where that of sleep itself remains\\nuseless, for the sleep is also nothing but a suggestion.\\nIt is not possible in all cases, and it is not necessary in\\ncases of good somnambulism in order to obtain the most\\ndiverse phenomena. They can be dissociated, so to speak,\\nfrom sleep. Catalepsy, paralysis, anaesthesia, and the\\nmost complex hallucination may be realized in many\\ncases without the necessity of preceding these phenomena\\nby sleep. Susceptibility to suggestion occurs in the\\nwaking state.\\nTo define hypnotism as induced sleep is to give a\\ntoo narrow meaning to the word to overlook the many", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0063.jp2"}, "64": {"fulltext": "62 HYPNOTISM.\\nphenomena which suggestion can bring about Independ-\\nently of sleep. I define hypnotism as the induction of a\\npeculiar psychical condition which increases the suscepti-\\nblHty to suggestion. Often, it is true, the sleep that may\\nbe induced facilitates suggestion, but it is not the necessary\\npreliminary. It is suggestion that rules hypnotism.\\nI have tried to show that suggested sleep differs in no\\nrespect from natural sleep. The same phenomena of\\nsuggestion can be obtained in natural sleep, if one succeeds\\nin putting one s self into relationship with the sleeping\\nperson without waking him.\\nThis new idea which I propose concerning the\\nhypnotic influence, this wider definition given to the word\\nhypnotism, permits us to include in the same class of\\nphenomena all the various methods which, acting upon\\nimagination, induce the psychical condition of exalted\\nsusceptibility to suggestion with or without sleep.\\nLater on, when speaking of the subject of hypnotic\\nfascination, you will see how the above can be appHed to\\nthe patient.\\nThe following table made from a considerable number\\nof cases and presented to M. Dumont by M. Liebault,\\ngives an idea of the proportion of patients of all ages, of\\nboth sexes, and of all temperaments, subdivided into the\\ndifferent categories of sleep.\\nYear 1880,\\n1012\\npersons\\nhypnotized\\nRefractory,\\n27\\nSomnolence, heaviness,\\n33\\nLight sleep.\\n100\\nDeep Sleep,\\n460\\nVery Deep Sleep,\\n230\\nLight Somnambulism,\\n31\\nDeep Somnambulism,\\n131", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0064.jp2"}, "65": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM, 63\\nIt is doubtless necessary to take account of the fact\\nthat M. Liebault operates chiefly upon the conunon people\\nwho come to him to be hypnotized to be cured of\\ndisease and who, convinced of his magnetic power show\\ngreater cerebral docility than more intelligent people.\\nPerhaps, the number of cases influenced would be less\\nwithout these favorable and predisposing conditions. I\\nhave been able to prove, however, that refractory subjects\\nconstitute a small minority, and I succeed in hypnotizing\\nsubjects at the first trial, daily, who come to my oflice\\nwith no idea what the hypnotic sleep is.\\nPersons who can be hypnotized, and who, when they\\nwake, have no recollection of what has happened during\\nsleep, we call somnambulists. It seems to us that this\\nproportion may be considerably increased if the sleeping\\nsubject is told, When you wake, you will remember\\nnothing. In a certain number of cases, amnesia is thus\\nproduced by suggestion.\\nSuccess in mental and physical healing depends upon\\nproper conditions. This is a self-evident proposition,\\nwhich the average healer is slow to understand and\\nappreciate.\\nThe success of the physician depends as largely upon\\nhis knowledge of the idiosyncrasies of his patient, his\\npersonal habits, his mode of living, his susceptibility to\\nthe influence of medicine, etc. as upon a correct diagnosis\\nand medicinal treatment of the disease. In like manner j.\\nthe success of the mental healer depends largely upon i\\nhis knowledge of his patient s habit? of thought, his beliefs, J\\nhis prejudices, and above all, his mental environment.\\nThese remarks apply to all methods of mental healing,\\nno matter by what name the science is called, whether by\\nmental suggestion as distinguished from oral suggestion.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0065.jp2"}, "66": {"fulltext": "64 HYPNOTISM.\\nHypnotism as practiced by the Nancy school may\\nstand as the representative of mental treatment of disease\\nby purely oral suggestion.\\nIt must be remembered that much harm is done to the\\ncause of mental healing, or in other words to hypnotism,\\nby claiming for it too wide a field of usefulness. Theor-\\netically, all the diseases which flesh is heir to are curable\\nby mental processes. Practically, the range of its useful-\\nness is comparatively limited. The lines of its field are\\nnot clearly defined, however, for the reason that so much\\ndepends on the idiosyncrasies of each individual patient.\\nA disease which can be entirely cured with hypnotism\\nin one case refuses to yield one jot in another, the mental\\nattitudes of the patients not being the same. Besides,\\nthe mental environment of the patient has much to do\\nwith his amenability to control by mental processes. In an\\natmosphere of incredulity, doubt and prejudice, a patient\\nstands little chance of being benefited by hypnotism\\nhowever strong may be his own faith in mental thera-\\npeutics. Every doubt existing in the minds of those\\nsurrounding him is inevitably conveyed telepathically to\\nhis subjective mind, and operates as an adverse sugges-\\ntion of irresistible potentiality. It requires a very strong\\nwill, perfect faith, and constant affirmative auto-suggestion\\non the part of the patient to overcome the adverse\\ninfluence of an environment of incredulity and doubt,\\neven though no word of that doubt is expressed in the\\npresence of the patient. It goes without saying that it\\nis next to impossible for a sick person to possess the\\nnecessary mental force to overcome such adverse condition.\\nTherefore, it is easily- seen, how necessary it is for both\\npatient and hypnotizer to be in perfect accord with one", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0066.jp2"}, "67": {"fulltext": "Hypnotism.\\n6;\\nanother, and also, that discording persons should not be\\npresent when a patient is to be hypnotized.\\nSuggestion is the sole method employed by the Nancy\\nschool of hypnotism. The hypnotic condition is induced\\nsolely by oral suggestion, and the disease is removed by\\nthe same means. There can be no doubt of the efficacy of\\nthe method, thousands of successful experiments have\\nbeen made by Dr. Liebault and his colleagues. These\\nexperiments have demonstrated the existence of a power in\\nman to control, by mental processes, the functions and\\nconditions of the human body. They have laid the foun-\\ndation of a system of mental therapeutics, which must\\neventually prove of great value to mankind, or as Thomson\\nJay Hudson, LL.D., says in his book, The Law of\\nPsychic Phenomena They have done more. They\\nhave demonstrated a principle which reaches out far\\nbeyond the realm of therapeutics, and covers all the vast\\nfield of psychological researches. They have demonstrated\\nthe constant amenability of the subjective mind to control\\nby the power of suggestion.\\nIt is not surprising that those who have discovered\\nthis great principle should insist upon its appHcability to\\nevery phenomenon within range of their investigation.\\nRemember that the Nancy school believes in the power\\nof suggestion, but confines its faith to Oral Suggestion\\nonly.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0067.jp2"}, "68": {"fulltext": "66 HYPNOTISM,\\nCHAPTER IV.\\nHYPNOTISM.\\nDr. Li^bault of Nancy Description of his treatment and the\\nmethod employed at the School at Nancy His system free\\nfrom Mysticism Curative Suggestion, as applied by Dr. Lie-\\nbault Absolute sleep or unconsciousness unnecessary for\\ncurative treatment Different stages of Hypnotism, as known\\nat the Nancy Schooh\\nThe compiler feels indebted for the following remarks\\nto C. Lloyd Tuckey, M. D., of England, writer of the\\nvery valuable book, Psycho Therapeutics. This book\\nis published in London, England, and we had great\\ndifficulty in obtaining a copy.\\nIf the visitor to Dr. Liebault s Dispensary be one\\nwho measures results by the impressiveness of the means\\nused, he will surely be disappointed to find how common\\nplace are operators, patients, and building. The rooms\\nare unpretentious, and even shabby; the patients are\\nordinary looking people enough, belonging mostly to the\\nartisan and laboring classes and the Doctor, himself,\\nthough he has goodness and kindliness written on every\\nfeature of his unimposing appearance, and chats on all\\nsorts of subjects with the persons around him.\\nThe patient paying his first visit is directed to sit\\ndown and watch the treatment being applied to others.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0068.jp2"}, "69": {"fulltext": "Fig. (I.) The Suggestive Method,\\nOrlgiaal Portraits. Copyright by M. Young, August, 1899.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0069.jp2"}, "70": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0070.jp2"}, "71": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 67\\nThis gives him confidence, and arouses that imitative\\nfaculty which is so active in childhood, and is never lost\\nthroughout adult Hfe. When his turn comes he is told to\\ntake his place in an arm chair, and to make his mind as\\nblank as possible\u00e2\u0080\u0094 to think of nothing nothing at all and\\nto fix his eyes and attention on some special object; almost\\nanything will do, from the operator s face or hand to a\\nmark on the ceihng or the pattern of the carpet.\\nThen the Phenomena, or in other words the hypnotic\\nsleep, which attend the on-coming of natural sleep are\\ngradually suggested to him.\\nYour sight is growing dim and indistinct; your eyelids\\nare becoming heavy a numbness is creeping over your limbs;\\nmy voice seems muffled to you; you are getting inore sleepy; you\\ncan 7iot keep your eyes open. Here the eyes close of them-\\nselves or are closed by the operator, and it is generally\\nfound that the patient is indeed asleep.\\nAbout two minutes of this Talk and Sleep will\\nusually produce the hypnotic effect on a new patient, and\\non subsequent visits even less time is required. The patient\\nbeing more or less influenced. Dr. I.iebault now proceeds\\nwith the treatment proper. This consists essentially in\\ndirecting the invalid s attention to the part affected, and\\nsuggesting an amelioration or disappearance of the morbid\\ncondition and symptoms.\\nTo take a very simple case \u00e2\u0080\u0094let us suppose that the\\nmalady is chronic nervous headache. The part of the\\nhead affected is generally rubbed, so that the patient s\\nattention shall be attracted to it, and he is told that the\\npain is to disappear that he will awake feeling his head\\ncool, clear and comfortable, and that there is to be no\\nreturn of the trouble. In ordinary cases, the whole process", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0071.jp2"}, "72": {"fulltext": "68 HYPNOTISM.\\nwill not have lasted more than five minutes, when Dr.\\nLiebault brings it to a close by arousing the patient, which\\nhe does by telling him to open his eyes and awake. This\\nis generally enough; he awakes as from ordinary sleep, and\\nis told to vacate the arm chair in favor of the next patient.\\nWhen asked how he feels, he will generally reply that\\nhe is better, and very often that the pain has entirely\\nvanished. He is quite his natural self, and can leave the\\nroom at once and go about his employment as usual.\\nLong acquaintance with the system prevents an\\ninhabitant of Nancy from regarding it as anything\\nremarkable, and a sick person consults Dr. Liebault\\njust as he would consult any other physician, with the\\nsimple idea that the treatment will do him good. He\\ndoes not trouble himself with metaphysical theories, but\\nis content to know that some acquaintance has been cured\\nof a complaint similar to his own, and that he himself\\nhopes to be relieveci in a few days. Dr. Liebault gen-\\nerally places his hand over the epigastrium, and applies\\ngentle friction, suggesting as he does so, a sensation of\\nwarmth. He regards a responsive glow as almost essential\\nto the success of subsequent treatment, and it is the first\\nlink in the chain which constitutes rapport between Physician\\nand Patiejit.\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2The fulfillment of the first suggestion tends to\\naugment the patient s confidence, and leads to the more\\nready reception of those which follow. This point is one\\nof great practical importance, and we generally feel we\\ncan do good when we can induce this responsive warmth,\\nno matter how slight the hypnotic influence may be.\\nThe feeling is quite different to that produced by simple\\nfriction, and requires to be felt to be appreciated. The", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0072.jp2"}, "73": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 69.\\nmagnetizers attributed it to the passage of magnetic fluid\\nfrom them to the patient, but as we regard all the\\nmanifestations of hypnotism as subjective, we must of\\ncourse seek another explanation. This is found by sup-\\nposing that the sensation is due to action on the vaso\\nmotor system through the solar plexus, allowing a sudden\\nafflux to the part. If the hypnotic sleep has been pro-\\nfound, it may be necessary twice or thrice to repeat the\\nordel to awake, and even to enforce it by fanning the\\npatient, or blowing gently upon his eyes, but the simple\\ncommand is nearly always sufficient.\\nThere certainly is nothing mysterious in all this, and\\nDr. Liebault seems to take pleasure in making his whole\\nmode of treatment clear to any serious inquirer, and in\\ngiving the rational explanation of everything that he\\ndoes. He directs the patient to fix his attention on a\\ncertain point, in order to strain the accommodation of\\nthe eyes, and to tire the sight. The effect of the strain\\nis to cause dilation of the pupils, and consequent dimness\\nof the vision. The feeling of heaviness in the eyelids\\nresults from the fatigue of keeping them open in a strained\\nposition, and the assertion that the eyes are becoming\\ntired, and the sight dim, is therefore founded on physio-\\nlogical data, and is not guess work. The eyes being tired,\\nthe natural impulse is to close them, and this act calls\\nup a previous association of ideas connected with fatigued\\nor confused sight. That association points to sleep,\\ntowards which the patient is rapidly led, aided by the\\nmonotonous tones of the operator suggesting it to him,\\nand by his mind being free from all disturbing thoughts,\\nand his nerves from all external stimuli. He falls asleep\\nin fact, much in the same manner as one does when", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0073.jp2"}, "74": {"fulltext": "70 HYPNOTISM.\\nreading a dull book, or listening to an uninteresting\\nlecture. The naturally restless sleeper will be restless,\\nand he who commonly goes off as soon as his head\\ntouches the pillow will quickly succumb to the hypnotic\\ninfluence. The extent to which a person is influenced\\nvaries according to his mental and physical condition.\\nBernheim defines Hypnotism as the production of a\\npsychical conditio)! in which the faculty of receiving impres-\\nsions by suggestion is greatly increased. But this is only half\\nthe truth; for not only is the receptivity increased, but\\nthe power to act upon and carry out the suggestion is\\nincreased likewise. Suggestions have all the force of\\ncommands^ and the patient will strain every nerve to obey\\nthem. They are received as true, and the idea tends to be\\nrealized, and to be carried into execution as action. If he\\nis told to move a paralized limb, or to speak after months\\nof loss of voice, any one can see what intense effort he puts\\ninto the attempt to comply. A stammerer making such\\neffort will speak fluently, and a deaf person will distinctly\\nhear a whisper.\\nThe suggestive method is especially applicable to\\nchronic complaints rheumatic and gouty pains often yield\\nto it. In derangement of the functions in women it acts\\nvery beneficially, both in checking excessive loss and in\\npromoting a proper flow also in relieving or curing\\nperiodic suffering of all kinds. In chronic constipation and\\ndiarrhoea it has excellent effects, and patients usually find\\nthat they are becoming regular through its use. Nervous\\naffections of the eyes, some forms of deafness, the sick,\\nand those reduced in strength, are exceptionally good\\nsubjects for hypnotic suggestion, and therefore offer a very\\nfavorable field for its employment.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0074.jp2"}, "75": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 71\\nDr. Liebault strongly recommends the treatment for\\nsprains and muscular strains. In such cases it may be com-\\nbined with gentle massage of the injured part. Insomnia\\nand hysteria are benefited by the treatment. That border\\nland of insanity occupied by the opium habit, and the\\nexcessive use of tobacco and other narcotics, offers an\\nextensive field of usefulness to suggestive treatment.\\nPersons whose nervous systems are broken down in this\\nway are very easily hypnotized, and Dr. Liebault puts\\nsuch a patient in profound sleep, and then tells him that he\\nwas to give up smoking and chewing, that a pipe was to be\\nto him an object of loathing, and a quid of tobacco even\\nmore offensive. Also if he did indulge in one or the other\\npain and severe sickness would be the result, so that he\\nmust not even feel a desire for the indulgence. The patients\\ncome daily for several mornings, and daily show an increas-\\ning improvement, till in a week they are completely cured\\nof the symptoms of nicotine poisoning.\\nCures worked by suggestion are of as permanent a\\ncharacter as cures effected by any other means. Relapses\\noccur in many diseases, no matter what treatment has\\nbeen employed.\\nAt first some patients will perhaps appear insuscep\\ntible. This must not cause discouragement, for in many\\ncases the hypnotic influence is not felt until after three\\nor more trials. Patients should always be thoroughly\\nawakened before leaving the person hypnotizing them.\\nThis should never be forgotteti.\\nThe practitioner who uses hypnotism should do so\\nwith the same precautions which he adopts in administering\\nan anaesthetic. Chief among these, are obtaining the\\nformal consent of the patient, and when expedient, of", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0075.jp2"}, "76": {"fulltext": "72 HYPNOTISM.\\nhis friends, and never operating save in the presence of at\\nleast one witness. Thus, he will guard himself and his\\npatient from all possible imputation of wrong doing or\\nabuse of power.\\nThe dangers of hypnotism, are, I believe, much\\nexaggerated. The stories told of persons obtaining undue\\ninfluence over others by its means are mostly fables,\\nwhich experience shows to be impossible. Professor\\nBernheim asserts, and is borne out by other observers,\\nthat 710 one can be hypnotized against his wish, and in\\nfact, it is his own will which sends him to sleep. Never-\\ntheless, there is no doubt that after a time the on-coming\\nof sleep is less under the patient s control, and when a\\nperson is continually being hypnotized by the same\\noperator, the hypnotic state can be reproduced with\\nsurprising readiness.\\nWith our present knowledge, it seems impossible\\nto explain certain phenomena connected with advanced\\nhypnotism. The subject, will, under the simulation\\nof suggestion, read figures or letters at an amazing\\ndistance, will distinguish persons by a sense of touch too\\ndelicate to exist when the other faculties are at work.\\nWhy should the hypnotized subject be deaf to all sounds\\nexcept the voice of the operator, and hear and obey that\\nvoice, though it be the faintest whisper, and the surround-\\ning sounds a perfect Babel?\\nThe Reality of Hypnotic Phenomena. Sceptics\\nwe find who entirely deny the existence of the hypnotic\\nstate, also others who acknowledge the reality of the\\npsychical condition, refuse to believe in its utility as a\\nremedial agent. The former are a diminishing quantity,\\nand must soon succumb under the accumulating evidence", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0076.jp2"}, "77": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 73\\nadduced by such scientists as Charcot, Richet, Hack\\nTuke, Moll, Heidenhain, Krafft-Ebing, Preyer, Beaunis,\\nLombroso, Myers and others.\\nThe work of such practical observers and clinicians\\nas Bernheim and Liebault of Nancy, Voisin, Berillon,\\nDumontpallier of Paris, Von Schrenk-Notzing of Munich,\\nVan Reuterghein and Van Eden of Amsterdam, Albert\\nMoll of Berlin, Wetterstrand of Stockholm, Cruise\\nof Dublin, etc., will soon supply the necessary therapeutic\\ntestimony, if indeed it has not already done so, and we\\nshall see Hypnotic Suggestion take its place in the armamen-\\ntarium of the medical practitioner.\\nThe method I usually adopt to produce the hypnotic\\nstate is that practiced by Liebault, and is undoubtedly the\\neasiest and most rapid. The treatment is psychical, and\\nthe attention to detail is absolutely necessary to success.\\nThe existence in the patient of any opposing idea, as of fear\\nor of a spirit of ridicule, or of decided hostility, or of con-\\nsciousness of bodily discomfort, will render futile all\\nattempts to hypnotize him, at least at the first trial. His\\nmind must be at rest, his position comfortable, and the\\nenvironment should be such as would favor the advent\\nof ordinary sleep.\\nIt is sometimes well to hypnotize one or two patients\\nin the presence of a new-comer, so as to arouse his\\ninvitative faculty and dissipate any nervous feeling he may\\nhave. And sofne friend should always be p7 esent during the\\nentire operation^\\nThe patient reclines on a couch or easy chair, and I\\nstand or sit beside him, and hold the first two fingers of one\\nhand at a distance of about twelve inches from his eyes, at\\nsuch an angle that his gaze shall be directed upwards in a", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0077.jp2"}, "78": {"fulltext": "74 HYPNOTISM.\\nstrained manner. I direct him to look steadily at the tips\\nof those fingers, and to make his mind as nearly blank as\\npossible. After he has stared fixedly for about half a\\nminute, his expression will undergo a change\u00e2\u0080\u0094 a far away\\nlook coming into his face. His pupils will contract and\\ndilate several times, and his eyelids will twitch spasmodi-\\ncally. These signs indicate a commencing in direction\\nof the desired psychical condition. If the eyelids do not\\nclose spontaneously, I shut them gently, and the progress\\nof sleep is generally helped by verbal suggestion such as\\nYour eyes are becoming very heavy; they are getting\\nmore and more heavy my fingers seem quite indistinct\\nto you (this v/hen the pupils are observed to dilate or\\ncontract); a numbness is stealing over your limbs; you will\\nbe fast asleep in a few minutes; now sleep.\\nIt is sometimes an assistance to lay one s hand\\ngently, but firmly, on the forehead. In ordinary cases,\\nthe operator will find that the hypnotic condition has by\\nthis method been induced in from one to three minutes,\\nand he may now ascertain what degree has been arrived at.\\nThis depends chiefly, if not entirely, on the temperment\\nof the subject, and I consider it impossible to foretell\\nwith any certainty what stage of hypnotism will be reached\\nby any person who has never been hypnotized. I do\\nnot, as a rule, make many suggestions at a first sitting,\\nbut I gently rub the epigastrium, and suggest a feeling\\nof warmth in that part of the body, a general sensation\\nof comfort and well being, and an agreeable awakening.\\nAfter a few minutes I tell the patient to awake, he has\\nrested long enough, and that he can open his eyes and\\narouse himself He generally obeys at once, and says he\\nfeels refreshed and comfortable. I ask him what he\\nI", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0078.jp2"}, "79": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 75\\nremembers of his few minutes rest, and he generally tells\\nme he has heard every word I said to him, and also any\\nother sound there may have been, but he adds he felt a\\ngreat disinclination to move or speak until he was told to\\nopen his eyes. He finds the feeling of warmth induced by\\nsuggestion, and by gentle friction of the abdomen, very\\nmarked, and the sensation will probably continue for several\\nhours. He is perfectly awake and quite himself before he\\nleaves the house.\\nThe feeling of warmth is an important symptom, and\\nDr. Liebault is invariably confident of doing good to the\\npatient in whom he can produce it if the malady is a\\ntractable one.\\nDr. Liebault also believes in the efficacy of magnetized\\nwater as a curative means, that is, water into which the\\npractitioner has dipped his fingers the water to be\\napplied to the diseased parts. When Dr. Liebault first\\nnoticed the influence this liquid had upon young children\\nof a few weeks or a few months old, he the adept and\\napostle of the theory of suggestion {^1 his convictions\\nshaken. He began to doubt whether suggestion was\\nindeed the final expression of hypnotism, and whether\\nthe fluid theory ought to be definitively set aside.\\nDr. Liebault also freely admits the fact that a specific\\ninfluence is sometimes exerted by the mesmerizers or\\nhypnotizer upon the subject, which does not arise from\\noral suggestion.\\nProfessor Beaunis has also expressed somewhat similar\\ndoubts.\\nProfessor Bernheim, however, clings to his own system,\\nwhich the whole scientific world acknowledges he does\\nwonders with.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0079.jp2"}, "80": {"fulltext": "76 HYPNOTISM.\\nHowever, suggestion has developed hypnotism, and no\\nmatter what the future adds to the science, suggestion will\\nalways hold an important place in the curative qualities\\nof hypnotism.\\nThere is nothing to differentiate hypnotic sleep from\\nnatural sleep. Startling as this proposition may appear\\nto the superficial observer, it is fully concurred in both by\\nDr. Liebault and Professor B ernheim.\\nThere is no fundamental difference, says the latter,\\nbetween spontaneous and induced sleep. M. Liebault\\nhas very wisely established this fact. The spontaneous\\nsleeper is in relationship with himself alone, the idea\\nwhich occupies his mind just before going to sleep, the\\nimpressions which the sensitive and sensorial nerves of the\\nperiphery* continue to transmit to the brain, and the stimuli\\ncoming from the viscera becomes the point of departure for\\nthe incoherent images and impressions which constitute\\ndreams.\\nHave those who deny the psychical phenomena of\\nhypnotism, or who only admit them in cases of diseased\\nnervous temperament, ever reflected upon what occurs\\nin normal sleep, in which the best balanced mind is\\ncarried by the current, in which the faculties are dissociated,\\nin which the most singular ideas and the most fantastic\\nconception obtrude? Poor human reason is carried away,\\nthe proudest mind yields to hallucinations, and during\\nthis sleep that is to say, during a quarter of its exist-\\nence becomes the plaything of the dreams which\\nimagination calls forth.\\nIn. induced sleep, the subject s mind retains the\\nmemory of the person who has put him to sleep, whence\\nthe hypnotizer s power of playing upon his imagination,", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0080.jp2"}, "81": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 77\\nof suggesting dreams, and of directing the acts which are\\nno longer controlled by the weakened or absent will.\\nIt is obvious therefore, that the subjective mind is\\namenable to control by suggestion during natural sleep,\\njust the same as it is during hypnotic, or induced sleep.\\nIt might not be unprofitable in this connection to enter\\ninto a general inquiry as to how far It would be possible\\nto control our dreams by auto-suggestion, and thus\\nobviate the discomforts incident to unpleasant nocturnal\\nhallucination. But we have not space for such an\\ninquiry.\\nDr. Liebault says: Hypnotism, like natural sleep,\\nexalts the imaginations, and the brain is more susceptible\\nto suggestions. The strongest minds cannot escape from\\nhallucinatory suggestions of their dreams. It is a physio-\\nlogical law that sleep puts the brain into such a psychical\\ncondition that the imagination accepts and recognizes\\nas real the impressions transmitted to it. To provoke\\nthis special psychical condition by means of hypnotism, and\\nto cultivate the suggestibility thus artificially increased,\\nwith the aim of cure or relief, this is the role of psycho-\\ntherapeutics as used at the Nancy School.\\nThis is a case that demonstrates the power of hypnotism\\nover muscular rheumatism, as quoted by Dr. Bernheim:\\nA child was brought in with a pain, which pain dated\\nback four days, muscular rheumatism in the right arm;\\nthe arm was painful to pressure. The child could not lift\\nIt to its head. I said to him, Shut your eyes and go to\\nsleep. I held his eyelids closed, and talked to him. You\\nare asleep, and you will keep on sleeping until I wake you\\nup. You are sleeping very well as if you were in bed. You\\nare perfectly well and comfortable. Your arms and legs", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0081.jp2"}, "82": {"fulltext": "78 HYPNOTISM.\\nand whole body are asleep, and you cannot move.* I took\\nmy fingers off his eyelids and they remained so. Then\\ntouching the painful arm I said: The pain has gone away.\\nYou will have no more pain; and when you wake up you\\nwill not feel any more pain. It will not come back any\\nmore. In order to increase the force of suggestion by\\nembodying it, so to speak, in a material sensation, I\\nsuggest a feeling of warmth Loco-dole nti. The heat took\\nthe place of the pain. I said to the child, You feel that\\nyour arm is very warm; the warmth increases, and you\\nhave no pain. I woke the child in a few minutes; he\\nremembered nothing. The sleep had been profound. The\\npain had almost completely disappeared. The child lifted\\nthe arm easily to his head. I saw the father on the days\\nfollowing and he told me that the pain had disappeared\\ncompletely, and there was no return of it.\\nIn such cases as the above sometimes, the pain\\npersists, or is simply diminished; it may gradually dis-\\nappear after two or more treatments. In other cases it\\nmay be diminished when the subject awakes, and may\\ncontinue growing less until it disappears without a new\\nhypnotlzation. If not, a new suggestion may succeed,\\nespecially if a deeper sleep can be Induced. {^For absolute\\nsleep or unconsciousness is much more successful in curing\\nthan a light hypnotic sleep). The pain taken away for\\nthe moment may return in several hours or even days,\\nand may only yield definitely after a variable number\\nof hypnotlzations.\\nFinally, only certain troubles or complaints maybe\\neffected. Others resist the attempt. We can understand\\nthat the effect obtained is subordinate both to the subject s\\nsuggestibiHty and to the psychical cause which determines", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0082.jp2"}, "83": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 79\\nthe symptoms. Muscular pains, the painful points i:i\\nphthisis certain dynamic contractures, even though bound\\nup with organic affections of the nervous centre, certain\\nmovements which remain after chorea, incontinence of\\nurine from which children suffer at night, etc., often\\ndisappear as if by enchantment, after a single suggestion\\nor after several.\\nThe mode of suggestion should be varied and adapted\\nto the special suggestibility of the subject. A simple\\nword does not always impress the idea upon the mind,\\nsays Dr. Liebault. It is sometimes necessary to reason,\\nto prove, to convince; in some cases to affirm decidedly;\\nin others to insinuate gently; for in the condition of sleep,\\njust as in the waking condition, the moral individuality\\nof each subject persists according to his character, his\\ninclinations, his special impressionability, etc.\\nHypnosis does not run ali subjects into a uniform\\nmould, and make pure and simple automatons out of\\nthem, moved solely by the will of the hypnotist it\\nincreases the cerebral docility it makes the automatic\\nactivity preponderate over the will. But the latter persists\\nto a certain degree, the subject thinks, reasons, discusses,\\naccepts more readily than in the waking condition, but\\ndoes not always accept, especially in the light degrees\\nof sleep. In these cases, we must know the patient s\\ncharacter, his particular psychical condition, in order to\\nmake an impression upon him.\\nTherapeutic suggestions is not infallible, though it\\ngives good results in a large number of cases. It may\\neven fail when it is intelligently and persistently managed.\\nThe cause of failure is inherent sometimes in the disease,\\nsometimes in the subject.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0083.jp2"}, "84": {"fulltext": "8o HYPNO TISM.\\nNo scientific hypnotist adheres rigidly to any one\\nmethod. He finds that where it is the brain that is\\nmost intimately concerned, the idiosyncrasies and character\\nof each subject must be studied and a method chosen which\\nseems most likely to take effect. In all the difference\\nof details, there is one main principle now recognized by\\nthe whole body of scientific hypnotists, and this is the\\nNancy method of Suggestion.\\nSuggestion influences common sensations in the same\\nway as the functions of the organs of sense. Nothing\\nworthy of remark takes place in hypnosis with regard to\\nthis, unless suggestion is called into play.\\nDr. Moll says, Suggestion plays a very important part\\nin hypnotism. We can influence common sensation very\\nmaterially by suggestion in hypnosis. This is not surpris-\\ning when we consider that it is exactly the common\\nsensations which are most under the influence of mental\\nprocesses. Just as looking down from a tower causes\\ngiddiness, as the thought of repugnant food produces\\ndisgust, so we can call up these, and related phenomena,\\nor cause them to disappear. It is in this direction that\\nsuggestion has to record its most striking successes, since\\nthe common sensations, oi which, pain is one, are the cause\\nof most of the complaints we hear. As pain, etc., can be\\ninduced by suggestion, so by suggestion it can often be\\nbanished. I say to a subject who complains of want\\nof appetite, The loss of appetite has disappeared, you are\\nhungry. I can cause another to feel thirst. Feelings\\nof pleasure can Hkewlse be excited.\\nDebove, on the other hand, has induced loss of\\nappetite by suggestion, to such an extent and for so long a\\ntime that the person concerned took no regular meal for", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0084.jp2"}, "85": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 8 1\\nfourteen days. Further, it is possible up to a certain point\\nto satisfy the hunger and thirst of subjects in deep hypnosis\\nby merely suggested food and drink, as Fillasier informs\\nus. It is a pity, however, that this result can only be\\nobtained with a few persons, and in a c^jrtain measure; for\\notherwise our politicians would no longer need to puzzle\\ntheir heads over social questions and the feeding of the\\nmasses.\\nTo define hypnotism as induced sleep, is to give a\\ntoo narrow meaning to the word to overlook the many\\nphenomena which suggestion can bring about independently\\nof sleep. I define hypnotism as the induction of a peculiar\\npsychical condition which increases the susceptibility to\\nsuggestion. Often, it is true, the sleep that may be\\ninduced facilitates suggestion, but it is not the necessary\\npreliminary. It is suggestion that rules hypnotism.\\nThe following study of hypnosis, we find in Professor\\nBernheim s book, Suggestive Therapeutics. It shows\\nthe phenomena and manifestations of hypnosis.\\nSometimes the eyes close suddenly before anything\\nhas been said, and the subject falls a lifeless mass.\\nSometimes sleep comes gradually. In some cases the\\neyelids remain motionless when closed. In others they\\nquiver as long as the hypnosis lasts. In light sleep, the\\neye-balls retain their normal position. When the sleep\\nis deep, they are often rolled up and the pupils are\\nhidden under the upper eyelid.\\nSometimes neryous subjects have muscular twitching\\nof the limbs and fibrillary contraction of the face while\\nasleep. The majority, however, are inert, or become so\\nafter suggestion. Some subjects make reflex movements,\\nscratch themselves, for example, rub their hands together", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0085.jp2"}, "86": {"fulltext": "82 HYPNOTISM.\\nand change their position. Others, on the contrary,\\nremain perfectly quiet.\\nSensibiHty in its different forms, is more or less\\nmodified. It is preserved in light sleep. Tickling, the\\nprick of a pin, or the touching of a painful spot, causes\\nreflex movements, and the subjects wake.\\nIn deep sleep, sensibility is diminished, or totally\\ndestroyed. According to M. Liebault, it first disappears\\nin the extremities, and the periphery of the body is\\nalways the most anaesthetic part. Further examinations\\nof the organ of sensation show that the senses of sight\\nand taste are the first to become dull. The sense of\\nsmell comes next, while hearing and touch are the last\\nto be lost. The visual sense loses its function last when\\nthe methods of the hypnotizers are employed, (fixation\\non some objects as, for instance, the operator s fingers\\nor eyes) because the forced attention of the eyes compels\\nthem to remain active the latest.\\nIf the anaesthesia or deep sleep is complete, a pin\\nmay be stuck into the skin, electricity may be applied,\\nobjects may be pushed up into the nostrils, ammonia\\nmay be held under the nose and the subject will not\\neven wince. This complete anaesthesia may be spontane-\\nously developed by simple hypnotization.\\nIn other subjects it is not spontaneous, but may be\\ninduced more or less perfectly by suggestion. Sometimes\\nin fact, in many cases anaesthesia occurs only through\\nsuggestion. And often only a certain degree of anaes-\\nthesia can be induced by suggestion.\\nIn a certain number of cases then the hypnotic insen-\\nsibility is complete enough to enable the most difficult\\nsurgical operations to be performed. But this is not true", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0086.jp2"}, "87": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 83\\nof the majority of cases. Hypnotism cannot be generally\\nused as an anaesthetic in surgery; it cannot take the place\\nof chloroform. Moreover, the hypnotic condition is often\\nhindered by the subject s anxiety at the time of an\\noperation.\\nChanges in mobility are more usually and more easily\\ninduced than changes in sensibility. All hypnotic subjects\\nexcepting those of the first degree, are susceptible to\\nsuggestive catalepsy.\\nWe have seen that this phenomenon is manifested in\\ndifferent ways, according to the manner and degree of the\\nsusceptibility to suggestion. The mind executes the\\nsuggestion with more or less contraction or contracture.\\nSometimes the catalepsy is flabby, and the upraised limb\\nfalls at the least pressure. Sometimes the catalepsy is\\nfirmer without being rigid wax-like rigidity. The Hmbs\\nyield to any motion communicated to them. Sometimes it\\nis true, rigid catalepsy, which I shall call tetanic catalepsy.\\nAs soon as the patient is asleep, I lift his arms and legs\\nwithout speaking. They remain fixed as if tetanized in the\\nattitude communicated. This rigidity is generally much\\ngreater in the upper than in the lower limbs. In some few\\ncases the whole body may be thus made immovable, and\\ntetanized to such an extent that the head may be put on\\none chair and the feet on the other, and the body pressed\\nagainst without the contracture being overcome.\\nSuggestion alone always succeeds in destroying this\\ntetanic condition. I say, I can lower your arm and\\nmove it as I wish. The rigidity then vanishes.\\nI repeat that in the majority of subjects hypnotized,\\nit is not necessary to formulate the suggestion in order-\\nto induce catalepsy in the limbs. The psychical condition-", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0087.jp2"}, "88": {"fulltext": "84 hypnotism:\\nis such that all ideas received by the brain are imprinted\\nthere, and any attitude communicated to a limb is main-\\ntained. The position given to the limb by the operator\\nis accepted by the patient s brain Hke an imagined\\nsuggestion. There is not enough cerebral initiative to\\nmodify the induced muscular condition spontaneously.\\nA deeper degree of hypnosis seems to be required\\nfor the production of automatic movements than for\\nsimple catalepsy. In many cases, however, these move-\\nments are induced either at first or at one of the following\\nhypnotizations. Both arms are lifted horizontally and\\nrotated one above the other. The patient keeps on moving\\nthem spontaneously or in obedience to commaad. Some\\nsubjects move them in a hesitating way, betraying a\\nuseless endeavor to stop them. Others, sleep more\\ndeeply, turn their arms quickly, regularly, and automatic-\\nally. I say, Do all you can to stop them. Some can\\nmake no effort, others try, but are unable to stop this\\nperpetual movement, which dominates what remains\\nof their will. If I stop one hand, the other keeps on\\nturning alone. An automatic movement of the legs may\\nalso be induced, but this is much less frequent.\\nIn some cases of very deep sleep, these automatic\\nmovements occur through imitation. I stand in front of the\\npatient and turn my arms one above the other. The\\nsubject imitates me. I make the movement in the opposite\\ndirection he does the same. I put my finger to my\\nnose; he imitates me. I stand on one leg; he stands on\\none leg also. I stamp my foot on the floor he does\\nlikev/ise. The movement I make suggests to his mind\\nthe idea of the same movement.\\nWe must add, a subject who has been hypnotized", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0088.jp2"}, "89": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 85\\nand subjected to these experiments several times, executes\\nthem more promptly and more perfectly. Sometimes it\\nis sufficient to lift both arms horizontally. He suspects\\nwhat is wanted, and turns them one about the other.\\nIt is enough to close his hand lightly, and he contracts\\nit with irresistible force. In some cases, the contracture\\nis so great that the hand can hardly be opened again\\nwhen the order is given to open it.\\nSuggestion induces paralysis as well as contracture.\\nI tell a patient that his arm is paralyzed. If I lift it, it falls\\nmotionless, while the other arm, which I have not\\nparalyzed by suggestion, remains up in a cataleptic\\ncondition. In some cases, the suggestion disappears\\nquickly, the subject forgets it in a few minutes, in others it\\nlasts a long time.\\nEach subject carries out a suggestion as he conceives\\nit, as he interprets it. In hypnotism the subject s condition\\nis such that the idea suggested imposes itself with greater\\nor less force upon the mind, and induces the corresponding\\naction by means of a kind of cerebral automatism. The\\nphenomena arise apart from the operator s will, if by\\ngesture or by touch, interpreted by the subject s mind, he\\nmanifests a desire which the subject cannot resist. The\\nsubject s movements, induced by a certain sensorial impres-\\nsion, are instinctive and automatic. The patient s brain\\ndirects the movement naturally indicated by this attitude.\\nThe subject more deeply influenced by hypnotism,\\npasses into a condition known as somnambulism. Then\\nnew phenomena appear. The automatism is complete.\\nThe human organism has become almost a machine,\\nobedient to the operators will. I say rise, and he rises.\\nOne subject gels up very quickly, another obeys slowly,", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0089.jp2"}, "90": {"fulltext": "86 HYPNOTISM.\\nthe machine is lazy, the command must be repeated in\\nan authoritative voice. I say walk he walks. Sit\\ndown, and he sits down.\\nSomnambulists can write, work, play the piano, and\\nconverse among themselves. Seeing them act thus, their\\neyes shut, or open as in waking condition, one would\\nswear they were not asleep. When left to themselves,\\nthey are generally passive and inert, but they become\\nactive and move about under the influence of suggestion.\\nI wish to call attention to one of the most interesting\\nphenomena of somnambulism. I wish to speak of the\\npossibility of inducing In somnambulists, by means of\\nsuggestions, acts, illusions of the senses, and hallucinations\\nwhich shall not be manifested during the sleeping condition,\\nbut upon waking. The patient hears what I tell him In\\nhis sleep but no memory of what I said remains. He\\nno longer knows that I spoke to him. The idea suggested\\narises in his mind when he wakes, but has forgotten Its\\norigin, and believes It is spontaneous. Facts of this kind\\nhave been observed by A. Bertrand, Gen. Noiset, Dr.\\nLiebault and Charles Richet.\\nThe effect of the suggestion of post-hypnotic acts is\\nnot absolutely Inevitable. Some patients resist them. The\\ndesire to carry out the act is no doubt more or less\\nimperative, but they resist It to a certain extent. It Is also\\nstrange that suggested actions may be carried out not only\\nduring the time Immediately following the sleep, but after a\\ngreater or less interval. If a somnambulist is made to\\npromise during his sleep that he will come back on such\\nand such a day, at such and such an hour, he will almost\\nsurely return on the day and at the hour, although he has\\nno remembrance of his promise when he wakes up.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0090.jp2"}, "91": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 87\\nThus, a suggestion given during sleep may lie\\ndormant in the brain, and not return to consciousness\\nuntil the time previously fixed upon for his appearance.\\nFurther research is necessary to explain this curious\\npsychological fact, and to determine how long a hypnotic\\nsuggestion may thus remain latent. It goes without\\nsaying, that all somnambulists are not susceptible to\\nsuggestions which take effect after a long interval of\\ntime.\\nI have spoken of suggestions which give rise to\\nacts. I proceed to consider sensitive sensorial sugges-\\ntions. Illusions of the senses and sensation may be\\nsuggested in the majority of somnambulistic cases. I\\nsay, When you wake, you will experience a numbness\\nin your foot, or a cramp in your leg, a short pain in\\nyour tooth, or an itching of the scalp. These different\\nsensations appear in all or almost all cases of deep\\nsleep.\\nIn certain cases, a negative hallucination may be\\nsuggested during sleep. This succeeds only in cases\\nof very deep somnambulism. Says Dr. Liebault, I have\\nmade a hypnotized subject see a person or a thing which\\nwas not before his eyes, by means of a suggestion given in\\nthe hypnotic or in the waking condition. I have created\\nan image called forth by his mind. I have caused a visual\\nhallucination.\\nHowever singular, however inexplicable may be the\\nsuggestive phenomena, which are realized to be true after,\\nlong study, one cannot but still wonder, and often ask,\\nwhere this science will lead to for all thoughtful men\\nacknowledge that it is yet in its infancy?", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0091.jp2"}, "92": {"fulltext": "88 HYPNOTISM.\\nCHAPTER V.\\nHYPNOTISM.\\nM. Charcot experiments at La Salpetriere Dr. Burq s discovery\\nThe method used at La Salpetriere Hysteria and Hypnotism\\nclosely combined, says M. Charcot Neurosis theory has many\\nfollowers.\\nIn 1878, Charcot began his experiments at the\\nSalpetriere. It was in a strange manner, that he became\\ninterested in the science, that he has added so much to.\\nIt came about in the following way\\nDoctor Dumontpallier, physician at the hospital of\\nthe Hotel-Dieu, and President of the first International\\nCongress on Hypnotism, held in 1889, gives the following\\naccount of the first researches which lent an impetus to\\nthe new science.\\nIn 1876, a man who thought himself dying, wrote\\nto the great physiologist, Claud Bernard, saying that he\\nwould like to ascertain before he died whether he had\\ndeceived himself about certain facts that had been under\\nhis observation for the last twenty-five years. Claud\\nBernard, who was President of the Biological Society,\\nconsidered that the request was suggested by a very\\ncreditable and justifiable sentiment, and at once acceded\\nto the demand. A commission was named, composed", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0092.jp2"}, "93": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 89\\nof Messieurs Charcot and Luys, with Dumontpallier as\\nreporter. After a series of experiments which extended\\nover more than a year, they confirmed the Metalo-\\nTherapeutic theory discovered by Dr. Burq.\\nThis discovery was made in the following way. While\\npractising as a young doctor, he had one day been obliged\\nto go out, and had deemed it advisable to lock up a patient\\nin his absence. Just as he was leaving the house he heard\\nthe sound as of a body suddenly falling. He hurried back\\ninto the room and found his patient in a state of catalepsy.\\nM. Burq was at that time studying magnetism, and he at\\nonce sought for the cause of this phenomenon. He noticed\\nthat the door-handle was of copper. The next day he\\nwrapped a glove around the handle, again shut the patient\\nin and this time nothing occurred. He interrogated the\\npatient, but she could give no explanation. He then tried\\nthe effect of copper on the subjects at La Salpetriere, and\\nfound that a number were affected by it.\\nHe Was thus able to restore sensitiveness to some who\\nhad been deprived of it for many months. At the Sal-\\npetriere the female patients were employed at needlework,\\nand Burq gave them copper thimbles. Then he heard by\\nchance that one of the patients who used a steel thimble\\nhad recovered her sensitivety. From that day metaloscopy\\nwas established, and Burq experimentalized with different\\nmetals, and found out their different action.\\nMagnetism had led to this important discovery, and\\nthe authentication of it recalled to mind the forgotten\\ntheories of Braid.\\nDr. Dumontpallier who recognizes in Burq a conscien-\\ntious and intelligent inquirer, cojQsiders him the promoter\\nperhaps unconsciously so\u00e2\u0080\u0094 of the revival of hypnotism.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0093.jp2"}, "94": {"fulltext": "go HYPNOTISM.\\nBurq, however, held his peace. The mere mention\\nof magnetism would have deprived him of his patients, and\\nprobably have doomed his discovery. He had already\\nlearned this to his cost, for at the outset he had been\\nscoffed at and derided, and had very nearly been turned\\nout of the hospitals.\\nThus the discovery was made quietly and partly by\\naccident.\\nThe experiments were renewed at La Salpetriere,\\nand Charcot was led to adopt Burq s theory by the\\nfollowing circumstance.\\nOne day as he was going his rounds at the hospital,\\nhe received the visit of several English doctors, who,\\nin the course of a discussion insisted on the great\\ndifference that existed in neurotic diseases in England\\nand France.\\nAnaesthesia, more especially, they urged, presented\\nthe greatest differences. The eminent doctor, in order to\\ndemonstrate his argument, suddenly pricked the arm\\nof an habitually insensible patient. But to his intense\\nsurprise the patient screamed with pain, at which the\\nEnglish medical men exchanged glances of undisguised\\nsatisfaction. Charcot, anxious to clear up the mystery,\\nif mystery there was, made a thorough examination,\\nand discovered that Buiq had played the harmless\\njoke of applying a gold plate to the patient s arm,\\nand thereby restored the sensibility which for some\\nyears past had disappeared. Charcot then seriously joined\\nin the labors of the commission on metalo-therapy, and\\nwas soon convinced like the others of its truth.\\nThus, in 1878, Professor Charcot and his pupils\\nbegan a series of experiments, and started a new scientific", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0094.jp2"}, "95": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 91\\nmovement which continues to the present day. The\\nenthusiasm evoked by Dr. Charcot for the new ideas has\\nnot diminished; the impulse came from too great an\\nauthority.\\nMonsieur Charcot was fortunate enough to rehabiH-\\ntate hypnotism. His lectures at the Salpetriere have\\nalso greatly contributed to rally physicians to the cause\\nof hypnotism.\\nSince 1882, the study of hypnotism has been closely\\nfollowed up in Paris, France, and numerous experiments\\nhave been made at La Salpetriere.\\nThe following are the principal doctors and writers on\\nthe subject, who are connected at the Salpetriere:\\nCharcot and his pupils, Binet and Fere, Gilles de la\\nTourette and Babinski.\\nPerhaps the predomirience of the School of the Sal-\\npetriere is due to the fact that its chief is a member of the\\nInstitute (Academy of Science section). This learned\\nbody is justly considered as the origi7i of knowledge^ the\\nvivifying artery from which it flows; it is not therefore very\\nsurprising that once hypnotism has been admitted in the\\nperson of its chief exponent within its precincts, its exist-\\nence and effects should have been acknowledged.\\nIt is also the Salpetriere School that first had the idea\\nof classifying the different phases of hypnotic sleep into the\\nlethargic, cataleptic and somnambulistic stages.\\nM. Charcot found that catalepsy with anaesthesia could\\nbe produced by fixing the gaze upon a bright light. He\\nalso produced somnambuHsm from lethargy by rubbing the\\ntop of the patient s head.\\nThe various theories have finally become sifted down\\nto the Neurosis theory of La Salpetriere school, which", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0095.jp2"}, "96": {"fulltext": "92\\nHYPNOTISM.\\nis the one supported by M. Charcot, and the theory\\nof the school of Nancy, which is suggesHo?i, and the\\ncontest between these two schools is still going on,\\nand probably will for some years to come, or until\\nall the world can agree upon Hypnotism.\\nWe find many physicians of great scientific attain-\\nment using it successfully for the cure of disease.\\nLeading psychologists and physiologists in every\\ncivilized country in the world are studying it. Only\\na very few persons deny its existence. Still the public\\nis ignorant of the real nature of hypnotism \u00e2\u0080\u0094as also\\nare many scientific men. It certainly, yet retains many\\nunsolved secrets which it invites the scholar to unravel.\\nThe La Salpetriere school, ignores suggestion as\\na necessary factor either in the induction of the hypnotic\\nstate, or in the production of subsequent phenomena,\\nand seeks an explanation of the subject-matter on the\\nbasis of physiology and cerebral anatomy.\\nThe La Salpetriere school employs physical means\\nto induce the state of hypnotism almost exclusively.\\nThey are practically the same as those employed by\\nBraid, namely, causing the subject to gaze steadily at\\na bright object, although many variations of the method\\nhave been introduced, such as flashing an electric light\\nin the eyes of the subject, striking a gong without\\nwarning close to the patient s ears, or by some periphecal\\nexcitation, such as rubbing the scalp.\\nThe La Salpetriere school holds that hypnotism is\\nthe result of an abnormal or diseased condition of the\\nnerves that a great number of the phenomena can be\\nproduced independently of suggestion in any form; that\\nthe true hypnotic condition can be produced only in", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0096.jp2"}, "97": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM, 93\\npersons whose nerves are diseased and that the whole\\nsubject is explicable on the basis of cerebral anatomy\\nof physiology.\\nThe experiments that Dr. Charcot made at the\\nSalpetriere were made almost exclusively upon hysterical\\nwomen, and that is very likely the reason why that\\nschool believes hypnotism to be a nervous disease, and\\nthat the disease is found in its most pronounced form\\nin hysterical subjects. That this proposition is unqualifiedly\\nwrong is positively known to every student of hypnotism\\noutside La Salpetriere school, and needs no further\\nrefutation than the bare statement that the experience\\nof all other schools goes to demonstrate the fact that\\nthe best hypnotic subjects are perfectly healthy persons.\\nHowever, it is well known that Dr. Charcot has by\\nhis cures done an immense amount of good, as the\\nnumber he treated run up into thousands, and many\\nwere entirely cured, while all were relieved by his\\nmethod of treatment, and no doctor can do more.\\nOf course the doctors at La Salpetriere are aware\\nof the potency of suggestion when purposely and\\nand intelligently employed but they hold that very\\nmany of the most important of the phenomena can be\\nproduced without its aid. These, however, are principally\\nphysical effects, such as causing any mue-:cle of the\\nbody to contract by pressing upon the corresponding\\nnerve, and then releasing the tension by exciting the\\nantagonistic muscle. The condition necessary for the\\nproduction of this phenomenon is called by Charcot,\\nneuro-muscular hyper-excitability. In the able and\\ninteresting work by Binet and Fere, pupils of Charcot,\\na chapter is devoted to this branch of the subject.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0097.jp2"}, "98": {"fulltext": "94 HYPNOTISM.\\nThey record, with a scientific exactitude that is very\\nedifying, many curious results in the way of causing\\ncontracture of various muscles by kneading, pressure,\\npercussion, etc., releasing the tension by exciting the\\nopposing muscles, and transferring the contractures from\\none muscle to another by the magnet. These contractures\\ncan be easily produced in many hysterical patients in\\ntheir waking state, either by kneading the muscles by\\npressure on the nerves, or by striking the tendons.\\nIn the book, Law of Psychic Phenomena, by\\nThomson Jay Hudson, LL.D., a long and interesting\\ntreatise is given on the methods and their differences\\nof the two schools. La Salpetriere and Nancy. We have\\nnot the space to give it here. Price of this book is\\n$2.50 by mail.\\nThe phenomena which can be produced independ-\\nently of suggestion are purely physical, and depend\\nupon the physical condition of neuro-muscula hyper-\\nexcitability. That this is true is shown by the fact\\nthat the physical phenomena produced by Charcot upon\\nhis hysterical patients cannot be produced on healthy\\nsubjects without the aid of suggestion. But such\\nexperiments do not properly belong to the domain of\\npsychic science proper, but rather to the Braidian system\\nof physical manipulation. This is as much as professed\\nby Binet and Fere, when they divulge the fact that\\nthe physical phenomena in question can be produced\\non hysterical patients in their waking condition.\\nThe methods of the Charcot school are esssentially\\nBraidian, and hence its results are limited largely to\\nphysical phenomena, and its conclusions necessarily\\npertain to psychical science. You will see that the method", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0098.jp2"}, "99": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM, 95\\nemployed by Charcot to induce the state is almost exclu-\\nsively physical means. They are practically the same as\\nthose employed by Braid.\\nDr. Charcot begins his experiments with a young\\nwoman about twenty. He requests her to seat herself on a\\nchair near the window through which the clear light of day\\nis shining. He hands her a large brass or copper button\\nto hold, telling her to look at it fixedly. After two or three\\nminutes her eyelids fall she tries in vain to open her eyes\\nwhich are fast closed her hand which until now has\\ngrasped the button drops upon her knee. All the while\\nDr. Charcot stands near the window looking steadily at the\\npatient, now he moves forward, saying in a low, quiet\\nvoice, You cannot open your eyes, do not try; you are to,\\nrest you are to get quiet and well do not try to speak,\\nonly rest. At first she tries to open her eyes, then\\nbecomes quiet. He lifts her arm, it falls back. He opens\\nher eyes, they close again. After a few minutes he either\\norders her to wake, or blows upon her eyes. Either wakr\\nher instantly.\\nWhen she awakes she Is rested and better, if not well,\\nand remembers nothing of what has taken place.\\nCharcot believed in fixed attention, and claimed it to be\\nthe only effective way to bring about Hypnotism, because\\nit causes fatigue of the nerves of sight, and consequently\\nproduces insensibility to stimulation.\\nCharcot distinguishes a grand hyp7ioHsme and a petit\\nhypnotisme. The last he does not describe in detail; in the\\nfirst, which is found in hystero-epileptic, he distinguishes\\nthree stages:\\nFirst. The cataleptic stage, which Is produced by a\\nsudden loud noise, or results from the opening of the", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0099.jp2"}, "100": {"fulltext": "96 HYPNOTISM,\\nsubject s eyes while he is in the lethargic stage; in this\\nstage the position of the Hmbs is easily changed while the\\nhypnotic s eyes are open. Every position which is given\\nto the limbs is maintained for some time, but is also easily\\nchanged by the experimenter without resistance on the\\npart of the subject; there is also no wax like flexibility\\n(^fiexibilitas cerea). No tender reflex, no increase of mus-\\ncular irritability. There is analgesia, but it is possible to\\nexercise a certain influence over the subject through sight,\\nhearing and muscular sense.\\nSecond. The lethargic stage. It can be induced\\nprimarily by fixed attention, or secondarily out of the\\ncataleptic stage by closing the eyes. The subject is\\nunconscious and not accessible to external influences,\\nand there is analgesia. The limbs are relaxed and\\nfall by their own weight the eyes are closed, the\\ntendon reflexes increased. There is increased excitability\\nof the muscles, the so-called neuro-muscular hyper-\\nexcitability. These increases are demonstrated by\\nmechanical stimulation of the muscles, nerves, or tendons.\\nFor example, if the ulnar nerve is pressed, a contraction\\nof all the muscles which it supplies follows, so that a\\ncharacteristic posture of the fingers results if a muscle\\nis stimulated, it alone contracts. The same thing is\\nattained by this as by local faradization in normal states,\\nwhich was shown by Duchenne. While at the extremities,\\nthe contraction passes into contracture that is, becomes\\npermanent a stimulation of the facial nerve only causes\\na simple contraction in the face, which soon ceases.\\nThe resolution of the resulting contracture is produced\\nby exciting the antagonistic muscles thus, for example,\\na contracture of the wrist is put to an end by excita-", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0100.jp2"}, "101": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 97\\ntlon of the extensors, and the contracture of one\\nsternomastoid by stimulation of the other. It is striking,\\nsays Moll, that, according to Charcot, the motor\\nparts of the cerebral contex, can be stimulated through\\nthe cranium by means of the galvanic current, so that\\nthe muscles in connection with them contract.\\nThird. Wi^ somnambulic stage. In some persons\\nit arises primarily by means of fixed attention; it can\\nbe i?iduced in all by friction on the crown of the head, during\\nthe lethargic or cataleptic stages. The eyes are closed or\\nhalf-closed. By means of gentle stimulation of the skin,\\nthe underlying muscles can be put into rigid contraction,\\nbut not, however, by stimulation of the muscles, nerves,\\nor tendons, as in the lethargic stage. Also, contracture\\ndoes not appear on stimulation of the antagonistic\\nmuscles as in that stage. The posture of the limbs produced\\nby contracture in somnambulism cannot also be so easily\\naltered as in catalepsy; a certain resistance appears, as in\\nflexibilitas cerea.\\nCharcot calls it the cataleptoid state. The same stim-\\nulation of the skin which induced the contractures also\\nresolves them. In somnambulism many external influ-\\nences are possible by means of suggestion, says Bernheim\\nand Moll.\\nPerhaps it would be well to say a word about hysteria\\nand its effects; as Charcot believed that hysteria and\\nhypnotism were very closely connected.\\nThe complexus of morbid phenomena designated by.\\nhysteria would require volumes to adequately describe.\\nThe state exists in the intellectual and the ignorant alike.\\nIt occurs in all gradations and varieties. It may be, and\\nis said frequently to be hereditary. Sometimes in different", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0101.jp2"}, "102": {"fulltext": "98 HYPNOTISM.\\ngenerations it alternates with epilepsy, insanity, alcohol and\\nconsumption.\\nThe only thing in common between the widely different\\ncondition termed hysteria is the fact that in these cases\\nafter death we have no means of discovering definite\\norganic diseases of the nervous system.\\nMinor degrees of this condition are evinced by an\\ninstability of the emotional system. It occurs more\\nfrequently in women than in men.\\nThe attack of laughing and crying which may come\\nupon them as the result of mental excitement, grief, etc., is\\nwell known to all. It is probably not so well understood by\\nthe public that, in the graver forms of this disease, persons\\nmay be temporarily paralyzed in one limb, or in one side\\nof the body, in the lower or upper extremities, or in all\\nat the same time. There are attacks of blindness, deafness,\\nperversion of the senses of taste and smell, or again all\\nof these senses may be wonderfully acute. Sometimes,\\nbut not always, there exists intense vanity, a great desire for\\nnotoriety, and this desire may lead the patient to simulate\\nmany organic diseases, or to pretend in various ways that\\nshe is afflicted with conditions which are only imaginary.\\nHence to say that a patient is hysterical may imply perhaps\\nmore than would be desired.\\nThe profoundly hysterical persons sometimes have what\\nCharcot terms hysteria epileptic fits.\\nThese persons also take very strong likes and dislikes\\nwithout reason. Again, they are very intuitive. There is\\nnot an organ or a system of the body exempt from\\nthese symptoms. There may be areas of numbness\\n(anaesthesia), or hyperaesthesia (great sensitiveness) may\\nbe present. There may be zones of the body so", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0102.jp2"}, "103": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 99\\nsensitive that they cannot bear even the weight of the\\nsHghtest clothing. Tlie skin may become pale or the\\nreverse. Bloody sweats have been described; in fact,\\nit would be impossible to imagine a symptom which\\ndoes not exist in some of these cases. Hence it follows,\\nthat a layman should never make diagnosis of hysteria\\nin himself or in any one else, for. Indeed, it will\\npuzzle at times the skill of the most expert neurologists.\\nThe point which should be understood clearly by all is this,\\nthat the disease is susceptible of relief through widely\\ndifferent agencies.\\nThe following are Dr. James R. Cocke s words,\\nverbatim^ from this very interesting book Hypnotism,\\nHow it is done; its uses and Dangers. This book we\\ncan furnish, sent by registered mail, $2.50.\\nCases of hysterical paralysis may yield to the\\napplication of magnets, metals, prayer, drugs, electricity,\\naye, anything in which the patient can be made to believe.\\nAgain, these same patients may prove refractory for years,\\nand be cured by some trifling circumstance, or never\\ncured.\\nMany of the miracles and wonders worked by\\ncharlatans are upon this class of patients. I have no\\nobjection to the patient being cured, no matter how\\nit is done, if the cure is not more injurious than the\\ndisease. The thing which is objectionable is, that this\\nis sometimes the case.\\nPersons afflicted with any form Oi nysteria are entitled\\nto the utmost consideration. In these cases, particularly,\\nthe physician should use the greatest amount of care, for\\nhe may overlook some existing organic disease.\\nSome types of the hysteria are made better and some", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0103.jp2"}, "104": {"fulltext": "loo HYPNOTISM,\\nworse by hypnotism. All are benefited if some form\\nof suggestion, with or without hypnosis, is skilfully used.\\nMental therapeutics promises more in this held\\nthan in any other. Whenever the imagination is strong,\\nwhen the patient shows fanatical tendencies whenever\\nthe disposition is essentially contradictory, as is often\\nthe case whenever the patient pretends a great many\\nconditions that do not exist, and when, accompanying\\nall these, the intellect is enfeebled, hypnotism, should\\nbe used with the greatest care, if at all, and only\\nwhen all other methods fail.\\nOn the contrary, when there is anaesthesia, (numb-\\nness), or when one faculty is alone affected by the\\nhysterical symptoms, and when the mental equipoise\\nof the patient is fairly good, hypnotism promises a great\\ndeal, as the following case will show.\\nA girl, sixteen years of age, attended a clinic,\\nat which I was a post-graduate student. Her arm was\\nparalyzed and had been so for three years. The sense\\nof touch, temperature, and pain were gone. The nutrition,\\nhowever, was good, and the electrical reaction normal.\\nThe arm, hung limp by her side. The physician in\\ncharge of the clinic hypnotized her. He then commanded\\nher to raise her paralyzed arm. She did so, to the\\nastonishment of her mother, who was present, and to\\nthe amazement of the students as well. The physician\\ntold her that she would be able to use her arm for\\none week, and that at the end of that time she must\\nreturn to the chnic. At the appointed time she came\\nback, and the arm became paralyzed only as she entered\\nthe room, so she said. Again, she was hypnotized,\\nand was told that she would use her arm for a period", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0104.jp2"}, "105": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. loi\\nof two weeks, and the interval of each hypnosis was\\nlengthened.\\nThis patient presented not the highly -wrought\\nemotional disposition, but simply an hysterical paralysis.\\nThis symptom, like all other symptoms of hysteria,\\ncannot be accounted for upon any hypothesis at present\\ncurrent. It is not purely imaginary in the ordinary sense\\nof the word, but it certainly is connected with the mind\\nin some way.\\nMedical literature is filled with such cases, and so-called\\nmiraculous cures of similar conditions abound on every\\nhand. Here, too, the temperament is equally important, and\\nthe suggestion must be tactfully suited to each patient.\\nFrom the foregoing it can readily be understood why\\nDr. Charcot was so successful with hysterical cases. In an\\nattack of majer hysteria there are sensory and moter\\ndisturbances, general or local. Now, in a person who is\\nhypnotized, these same phenomena can be produced\\nexactly, and are apparently from the same source, the\\ninhid. They vanish with the hypnotic state, but may be\\nleft by suggestion in the mind of the patient after the\\nhypnotic .state has gone. Can we then, by suggestion,\\nwrite almost anything we choose upon the mind as upon\\na tablet with an indelible ink Does this state, termed\\nhypnosis, so change the condition of the psychic life as\\nto make it susceptible to such profound alteration? It\\ncertainly seems in many cases to be so.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0105.jp2"}, "106": {"fulltext": "I02 HYPNOTISM.\\nCHAPTER VI.\\nHYPNOTISM.\\nThe School of the Hospital de la Charite\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Dr. J. Luys method, and\\nhis many finds, which have helped Hypnotism The hypnotic\\nmirror Its uses and successes The effects of colored balls on\\nhypnotized patients The use of animal magnetism as united,\\nwith hypnotism The uses of drugs, and their influence on\\nhypnotized persons The uses of magnets in hypnotism.\\nThe school of the Hospital de la Charite acts as a kind\\nof connecting link between that of Nancy and La\\nSalpetriere, accepting as it does both methods and all\\nthe theories. Dr. J. Luys, Member of the Academy\\nof Medicine of Paris, France, is at the head of La Charite,\\nwhere he has performed many curious experiments. Both\\nprofessor and experiments have, however, shared the\\nusual fate of investigators and new ideas, and have been\\nviewed with great suspicion. Emotions produced by\\nphysical agents, and the action of medicine not immediately\\napplied, are by no means facts recognized by the scientific\\nworld. After examining the different phases of hypnotic\\nsleep, as used by Dr. Luys, we will relate them as they\\nhave been discovered by the now noted Professor.\\nDr. Luys, when physician at La Salpetriere, was\\nnamed a member of the Commission appointed by the\\nBiological Society, with Dr. Charcot, to examine Burq s", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0106.jp2"}, "107": {"fulltext": "Fig, (II.) M. Young s Method.\\nOriginal Portraits. Copyright by M. Young, August, 1899.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0107.jp2"}, "108": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0108.jp2"}, "109": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 103\\ndiscovery. He was thus enabled to follow up and test on\\nhis own patients Charcot s assertions, to form an opinion,\\nand by pushing forward his experiments, to revolu-\\ntionize the scientific world by his discoveries and their\\nconsequences. The action of physical agents even at a\\ndistance and of suggestion are both admitted at la\\nCharite. Forces acting outside of these cannot be included\\namong these factors if we suppose them to be localized in\\ntheir action.\\nThe best description of the method and working\\nof the hypnotic treatment used at La Charite, we find in\\nDr. Foveau de Courmelles book. He has been connected\\nwith Dr. Luys, and therefore can be quoted as authority.\\nThe following is what he says\\nThe hypnotic state, generally produced by the\\ncontemplation of a bright spot, a lamp, or the human\\neye, is in Dr. Luys method induced by a peculiar\\nkind of mirror. The mirror is Dr. Luys own discovery\\nand made of pieces of wood cut prismatically in which\\nfragments of mirror are incrusted, they are generally\\ndouble, and placed crosswise, and by means of clock-work,\\nrevolve automatically. They are the same as sportsmen\\nuse to attract larks, the rays of the sun being caught and\\nreflected on every side and from all points of the horizon.\\nIf the little mirror in each branch are placed in parallel\\nlines in front of a patient, and the rotation is rapid,\\nthe optic organ soon becomes fatigued, and a calming,\\nsoothing somnolence ensues. At first it is not a deep sleep,\\nthe eyelids are scarcely heavy, drowsiness, slight and\\nrestorative. By degrees, by a species of training, the\\nhypnotic sleep differs more and more from natural sleep,\\nthe individual abandons himself more and more completely,", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0109.jp2"}, "110": {"fulltext": "I04 HYPNOTISM.\\nand falls into one of the regular phases of hypnotic sleep.\\nWithout a word, without a suggestion or any other action,\\nDr. Luys has made wonderful cures.\\nThis particular and ingenious means of inducing sleep\\nis not Dr. Luys only find. He has also several methods\\nof exciting emotion in hypnotized subjects, either by\\nplacing them in particular positions or by touching certain\\nmuscles of the face. He also obtained these results by\\nplacing on the neck of the patient tubes filled with various\\nmedicinal substances.\\nIf an hermetically sealed tube containing a medicine\\nunknown to the subject is placed in contact with the neck,\\nan effect varying according to each substance is produced.\\nThus alcohol produces merry or furious drunkenness\\naccording as it is distilled from corn or from wine; water\\nproduces hydrophobia; ipecac, vomiting; oil of cherry-laurel,\\necstasy and piety; nitro-benzole, convulsive shocks through\\nthe whole body; valerian, feline movements and crawling\\non all fours, etc.\\nThere have even been cases that have acted as invol-\\nuntary tests; as for instance, some tubes were brought in\\nhaphazard, and the operator thinking he had one kind\\nof medicine was astonished to see it produce the effects\\nof another substance. On examination it was found that\\nthe experimentalist had made a mistake, and that the\\nsubject was right. The idea of suggestion must therefore\\nin this case be set aside.\\nOn the other hand, I heard in June, 1887, Dr. Jules\\nVoisin, physician at the Salpetriere, relate that he had\\nproduced the same effects on the subjects by saying out\\nloud what substance he was using, while in reality he only\\nmade use of the empty tubes. And a fortnight later.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0110.jp2"}, "111": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 105\\nrepeating his experiment without saying anything, he\\nobtained the same series of phenomena exactly in the same\\norder. He therefore concluded that the action was solely\\ndue to suggestion, and also to the sharpness of memory in\\nneurotic patients.\\nDr. Luys also induces emotions by colored balls.\\nHe has often exhibited these phenomena in the course\\nof his lectures. For this purpose he uses hollow glass\\nballs, either blue, yellow, red or green. The subject\\nhaving been sent to sleep, (the lethargic stage), a shade is\\nplaced over the subject s eyes, and suddenly, under the\\naction of one of these balls, he is seen to open his eyes and\\nmanifest a distinct emotion. If a blue ball is presented\\nto him, terror and horror are depicted in his gaze, if\\na yellow ball, joy and mirth. According as the colored\\nsurface is larger or smaller the emotion is more or less\\nviolent. The same thing takes place with magnets\\naccording to the nature of the pole used, the countenance\\nassumes different expressions. It is interesting psychic\\naction. Thus, the north pole placed in the hand causes joy\\nand mirth, the south pole, repulsion. The reunion of the\\ntwo forces that is to say, a pole placed in each hand give\\nexperimental indifference.\\nTaking for basis the transfer of insensibility, emotions\\nor contractions from one point of the organism to another,\\nby the action of magnets, and the analogy that exists\\nbetween these latter and the human body. Dr. Luys in\\nthis following Babinski, who conceived the idea of passing\\nthe disease of one subject to another adopted the idea of\\nputting his patients in communication one with another.\\nThis is termed transfer. Some individuals are easily\\ndisposed to take, for the time being, at least, the disease of", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0111.jp2"}, "112": {"fulltext": "io6 HYPNOTISM.\\nothers and, when brought into contact with the sick,\\ncan for a few minutes cure them.\\n**The trained subject, easily hypnotizable, and the\\nsufferer are seated opposite each other. The first is sent\\nto sleep, while holding the hands of the patient; a powerful\\nmagnet is moved round, first describing a closed circle,\\nand then turning the north pole to the diseased part\\nor organ. A peculiar kind of contagion takes place,\\na transfusion of vitality, a propagation of nerve influx.\\nThe hypnotized subject suffers but little, still he does suffer;\\nwhile the sick person, his partner in this struggle against\\ndisease, is relieved.\\nIf the experiment is renewed several times the patient s\\norganism is rested, and b)^ degrees throws off the disease.\\nMagnetizers have always asserted that while making their\\ncurative passes they catch the disease. This would be a\\ndemonstration of transfer^ but would require to undergo a\\nthorough investigation.\\nWith regard to the action of the magnet during\\nhypnosis, the phenomena of transference must first be\\nmentioned. According to the school of Charcot trans-\\nference means that certain phenomena, influenced by some\\nsesthesio-genetic expedient, particularly the magnet, change\\nthe place of their appearance. Charcot says that such\\nphenomena are seen in hysterical patients. Thus, contract-\\nures on the right side can be transferred to the left by the\\nmagnet. Charcot, as well as a number of other experi-\\nmenters, among them Preyer, thinks these phenomena\\nquite proved, while in Germany a mental factor has been\\ncalled in to account for them.\\nDr. Moll says: Another method of influencing with\\nthe magnet is called polarization. It is a reversal of a", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0112.jp2"}, "113": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 107\\nfunctional state. For example, the magnet Is supposed to\\nresolve a contracture induced by suggestion (motor polar-\\nization). It can banish a suggested hallucination, and can\\nchange the mental pictures of colors into their complemen-\\ntaries. If a subject believes he sees blue, he thinks he sees\\nyellow when the magnet is brought close to him (sensory\\npolarization). The magnet is said to change happiness\\ninto sadness (mental polarization). When a reversal of the\\nstate takes place, e. g., when **blue is turned into\\nyellow, i. e., into its complementary color, then this is\\ncalled polarization in a narrower sense, and an arbitrary\\nchange of state, i. e. the changing of yellow into\\nred is called dispolarlzation. Binet and Fer^ are\\nthe authors of these experiments, which are confirmed by\\nBianchi and Sommer.\\nVenturini and Ventra, make a therapeutical experiment\\nin connection with these phenomena. They say they\\nconquered a fixed idea, an auto-suggestion in the waking\\nstate, by means of the magnet. Some experiments of Riggi\\nbelong to this class he says that the approach of a\\nmagnet in hypnosis often causes subjective discomfort.\\nIn other cases the magnet is said to have put an end to the\\nhypnosis.\\nA third possible way of influencing the hypnotic\\nsubject by the magnet is given by Tamburini and Seppilli.\\nThey think that when the magnet is brought close to the\\npit of the stomach it influences the respiratory movements.\\nLater on, Tamburini and Righi found that other metallic\\nbodies produced the same effect the strength of the effect\\ndepended, however, on the size of the metal. The electro-\\nmagnet is said to have the same effect whether the stream\\nis open or closed Tamburini, supposes later that it is only", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0113.jp2"}, "114": {"fulltext": "io8 HYPNOTISM.\\nthe temperature of the magnet which has the effect, and\\nthat the magnetic force may have no influence.\\nLastly, there are Babinski s and Luys experiments,\\nfounded on a union of true magnetism and animal magnetism.\\nIf a hypnotized subject and a sick person are set back to\\nback, a magnet put between them will cause the sick\\nperson s symptoms to pass over to the hypnotized\\nsubject. Hysterical dumbness and contractures have\\nbeen thus transferred. But symptoms of organic disease,\\ne. g., of disseminated sclerosis have also been transferred\\nin this way. As a matter of course, the phenomena\\nmust be caused by suggestion. The hypnotic subject\\nmust not know what the sick person s symptoms are.\\nDr. Luys goes still further. He places a magnet on the\\npatient s head; after a time, he places the same magnet on a\\nhypnotized person s head; now, the morbid symptoms of\\nthe first person should appear in the hypnotized person.\\nThe whole arrangement of the experiments is so uncritical\\nthat there can be no doubt about Luys experiment.\\nDr. Moll says: All these actions of the magnet\\nappear to rest on erroneous observation. But it is certainly\\nsingular that the action of the magnet should have been\\nasserted by so many authors at so many different times.\\nLittle has been said in explanation of this supposed\\neffect. Obersteiner supposed that there may be a magnetic\\nsense, which may come into activity during hypnosis, and\\nwhich is perhaps localized in certain terminal organs\\nof perception whose functions are still unknown.\\nDr. R. H. Vincent, in his book entided The Ele-\\nments of Hypnotism, gives the following description\\nof Dr. Luys method, which he has seen used many times\\nLuys Mirror Rotatif. This is an ingenious instru-", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0114.jp2"}, "115": {"fulltext": "Fig. 3. The Fascination Method.\\nOriginal Portraits. Copyriglit by M. Young, August, 1899.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0115.jp2"}, "116": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0116.jp2"}, "117": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM, 109\\nment invented by Dr. Luys, of the Chanty Hospital, Paris.\\nIt consists of two mirrors rapidly revolving in opposite\\ndirections, and by gazing at this for a short time the sight\\nbecomes tired and dazzled and hypnosis is easily produced.\\nMany advantages are claimed for this method that it\\nsaves the operator time and trouble, and is impersonal;\\nthat a number of people can be hypnotized at the same\\ntime by its means, and that it never fails.\\n**The saving of time is not really so great as might\\nbe imagined, for each subject must need the hypnotist s\\npersonal attention, while there are many other methods\\nequally impersonal. Only fairly susceptible persons, and\\nthose who had been previously hypnotized would, generally\\nspeaking, be influenced en masse, and these could be\\nhypnotized as quickly by almost any other means. It is,\\nhowever, of some service in certain cases.\\nDr. Luys has been very successful in curing many\\npatients suffering with the following diseases Sleeplessness,\\nDepression, Inattention, Irritability, or in other words,\\nwhich we understand much better, Nervous Prostration,\\ntechnically termed Neurasthenia. This disease is more\\namenable to hypnotism than is any other form of nervous\\ndisease.\\nDr. Cocke, says: Many pains, as neuralgia, etc.,\\ncan be relieved or cured by the use of hypnotism. Many\\nfunctional disturbances of different parts of the body,\\nlikewise, may find relief through its agency. Many painful\\nconditions often attending destructive organic disease can\\nbe ameliorated in the same way. Hypnotism never\\ndid and never can restore organs whose active tissues\\nhave been totally destroyed. A man whose brain has\\nbeen injured, either from external causes or from an", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0117.jp2"}, "118": {"fulltext": "no HYPNOTISM.\\nextensive hemorrhage within its substance, can never\\nagain have the paralyzed side of the body restored to\\nits normal condition by hypnotism, but if enough brain\\ntissue is left, suggestion made in the hypnotic state\\nmay prove a more powerful stimulant to him than\\nordinary incentives, and he may regain, in a degree\\nthe use of his body.\\nI do not know a greater crime than holding out\\nfalse hopes to such a one, when these hopes must be\\nblighted. Therefore, too much should not be claimed\\nfor any medicine or any method of cure, for fear that\\nthe disappointment will be too great. It indeed requires\\nnice discrimination upon the part of any one practising\\nhypnotism, to know how much either to hope for themselves,\\nor to promise to their patients.\\nHypnotism is a Remedial Agent, so mystefious and\\noverwhelming in its effect that it is likely to impress too\\nprofoundly the invalid who is seeking relief It is more\\nwonderful than surgery, more subtle in its influence than\\ndrugs, and permeates every part of the psychic life of the\\npatient.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0118.jp2"}, "119": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. Ill\\nCHAPTER VII.\\nHYPNOTISM.\\nThe Classifications of Hypnotism The Inductive Stages of Hyp-\\nnosis Classified as used in the different Methods Gurney,\\nSpeculative Stages of Hypnosis Lloyd Tuckey s Classifica-\\ntions of Hypnosis Dr. Liebault Stages of Hypnotism, numbers\\nsix Bernheim s Divisions of Hypnotism The Method used by\\nRalph H. Vincent, of London, England Very Important to\\na Student in Hypnotism.\\nWe are indebted to the following pages from the very\\nv^aluable work by Ralph H. Vincent, entitled The\\nElements of Hypnotism, published in London, England,\\nin the year 1897.\\nBraid, in 1840, we have seen by his insistence on the\\nnecessity of concentration and fixed attention, made great\\nadvances but to Liebault, of Nancy, belongs the honor\\nof giving to the world, a scientific exposition of the\\nrationale of Hypnotism. We have it from Liebault s own\\nlips that he was first attracted to the subject by reading\\nBraid s works, and he has constantly admitted that\\nthe Nancy system is indebted to Braid for its Genesis.\\nIn connection with Nancy must be mentioned Bernheim,\\nwho has greatly developed and systematized the study\\nof Hypnotism.\\nThe method in common use at Nancy is as follows\\nThe patient is comfortably seated in an easy chair with", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0119.jp2"}, "120": {"fulltext": "112 HYPNOTISM.\\nhis back to the light, and the operator stands by his side,\\nholding up two fingers of his own hand, some few inches\\n(i2 to 15), from the patient s eyes. The patient is told to\\nlook intently at these two fingers, and as far as possible to\\nkeep his mind a blank. As soon as the eyes begin to\\nshow symptoms of weariness, the hypnotist begins in a\\nsomewhat muffled and monotonous tone of voice to suggest\\nsleep. Sometimes the operator, without waiting for the\\nsymptoms to appear, will start at once telling the patient,\\nYou are beginning to feel drowsy Your sight is\\ngetting dim, etc., etc. While in other cases he will wait\\nuntil the eyes begin to blink somewhat, and then seek to\\nincrease the sleepiness by suggestions, which are made as\\nthe symptoms begin to develop themselves.\\nIt is not to be supposed that in all cases precisely the\\nsame formula or details of treatment are to be followed\\nbut the principle is the same. Thus this method of Nancy\\ntakes Braid s system of physically wearying the eyes, and\\ncombines with it a system of verbal suggestion, and this\\nmethod is the one followed with variations in detail by the\\nleading hypnotists of every country.\\nAs a matter of fact, there is no one plan which will\\nsucceed in all cases; some patients will be quite uninfluenced\\nby one method of treatment, while they will be readily\\nsusceptible to another. Dr. Moll says he has succeeded in\\nhypnotizing by means of passes where fixed attention\\nand simple suggestion both failed, and vice versa.\\nThe method generally adopted by the writer, does not\\ndiffer materially from the Nancy method above described,\\nbut we shall here incorporate into our description details\\nof practical importance. The first essential for the successful\\ninduction of hypnosis in a person who has not been", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0120.jp2"}, "121": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM 113\\npreviously hypnotized is to ensure that the person is in\\na position that is quite comfortable, and which he will be\\nable to maintain during the period of induction without\\ndiscomfort every little detail in this respect is an important\\nfeature in determining the degree of success or failure on\\nthe part of the hypnotist in a large number of cases; the\\nkind of chair in which the patient sits, its relation to the\\nlighting of the room; the position of his legs, and feet,\\narms and hands; the head, while being supported, must\\nnot be allowed to fall backward, and the subject must sit\\nas squarely as his comfort will allow. The surroundings\\nmust be free from any disturbing influences, and noises\\nwhich we should not generally notice cause more difficulty\\nthan the larger volumes of sound thus, the ticking of a\\nclock, the quiet opening or shutting of a door, the whis-\\npering of persons inside the room all these things serve\\nto distract the attention of the subject at a critical time.\\nThe subject should be asked to keep his mind a blank\\nas far as possible he should be told not to trouble\\nhimself about any methods used by the hypnotist not to\\npay attention to what he may say, and especially not to\\ntry and help him by trying to go off; and every\\ntrouble should be taken to see that the patient is quite\\ncalm and free from any undue nervousness. Having placed\\nthe subject comfortably in the chair, the next point is to\\nfix his attention. For this purpose, it is not theoretically\\nnecessary that we should resort to any physical assistance,\\nbut the attention is fixed much more easily when some\\nsuch assistance is employed. To gain attention the fixation\\nof the sight is the best and readiest means, and we therefore\\ntell the subject to look steadily and without blinking more\\nthan can be helped at some given object. The exact", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0121.jp2"}, "122": {"fulltext": "114 HYPNOTISM.\\nobject matters little; it may be the operator s fingers, or\\na small article held in the patient s hand, but it should not\\nbe more than about one foot from the eyes of the subject.\\nIt should be placed in such a position that when looking at\\nit the eyes are fairly wide open. The light should fall clearly\\non the object, and the subject should have his back towards\\nthe source of the light. The hours after daylight, are, on\\nthe whole, to be preferred, for in the morning, the nervous\\nirritability is generally greater than in the evening the\\nsubject is consequently rendered passive with greater\\nease, and his general condition is more favorable.\\nAfter an evening meal, most people are wiUing to\\nremain quietly in a chair for a short period, whereas\\nearlier in the day the enforced restraint might be more or\\nless troublesome for the purpose of concentration of light\\non the object to be looked at, artificial light is better than\\ndaylight. It must not be assumed that these detailed\\nobservances are in all cases necessary, for it greatly depends\\non the susceptibility of the subject, but if one is to gain\\nan average of anything over 80 per cent, it will only be by\\nattention to these details. The first hypnosis is always the\\nmost difficult, and after the subject has been hypnotized a\\nfew times, we can generally dispense with a great many\\nof these precautions. Let us now watch the subject. Pas-\\nsive, and with his gaze fixed on the given object, he at first\\nappears to be in the normal condition; after an interval\\nof varying duration, a change conies over the subject.\\nThe writer confesses that to describe the change in so\\nmany words, he finds it impossible, but the experienced\\nhypnotist easily recognizes it the pupils have somewhat\\ndilated the eyelids may be quivering the subject is\\nmore absorbed in the object than he was at first, the", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0122.jp2"}, "123": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 115\\nface has lost its usual expression, the respiratory rhythm\\nis slightly altered. At this point the skill of the Hypnotist\\nhas its greatest scope for everything depe^ids oyi the rapid\\nand accurate perception of the changes which the subject is\\nundergoing Hypnosis is beginning. The characteristic\\nreaction of the subject to suggestion is also begimiing,\\nbut it is far from complete, and we have to judge when\\nthe subject can take the first siiggestion^ and how much\\nhe can take. If we begin too early we shall disturb\\nhim; if we wait too long, he may, and often does,\\nreturn, more or less, to his normal condition, and we have\\nmissed our opportunity. This return is followed by a\\ngradual resumption of the hypnosis, and before the final\\nhypnosis is induced, this alteration may take place several\\ntimes. The early suggestions must not be of a character\\nrepellant or objectionable to the subject s consciousness.\\nThus, fact and suggestion are mingled with suggestion\\nand fact. The eyelids are quivering; the eyes are\\ntired; the sleep is coming until gradually the state\\ndiverges more and more from the normal the final\\nHypnosis generally comes suddenly. The eyes close,\\nand one symptom is nearly always present a peculiar,\\ndeep, catching inspiration. The inductive stages may\\ntherefore be classified as\\n1. Passivity.\\n2. Passi\\\\ity with attention.\\n3. Acute passivity with acute attention.\\n4. Hypnosis.\\nThe hypnosis thus obtained varies with each individual\\nbut there are certain classifications which are important\\nsome pass into a light stage others into a deep stage\\nas a rule, the hypnotic state deepens with every hypnosis", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0123.jp2"}, "124": {"fulltext": "ii6 HYPNOTISM.\\ntill about the fourth or at most the sixth hypnosis by\\nthis time the subject will have reached his deepest stage\\nin the hypnosis subsequent to this, he presents the\\nphenomena of this stage. This is a curious but constant\\nphenomenon, and enables us to classify each subject\\naccording to his stage of hypnosis, a point which, in\\nexperimental work, is exceedingly useful. These stages\\nvary from a condition which only an expert can recognize\\nas an hypnosis to a condition in which the strikingly\\nabnormal phenomena are present. The variety of these\\nstages is so great that many observers have made attempts\\nat classification, and these are useful in giving the reader an\\nidea of the great differences between the hypnosis of the\\ndifferent subjects.\\nGurney, whose researches are valuable though specula-\\ntive, divided Hypnosis into two stages\\n1 The alert stage.\\n2. The deep stage.\\nForel names three stages as follows.\\n1. Drowsiness.\\n2. Inability to open the eyes. Obedience to suggestion.\\n3. Somnambulism. Loss of memory.\\nLloyd Tuckey gives a very similar classification to\\nFord s\\n1. Light sleep.\\n2. Profound sleep.\\n3. Somnambulism.\\nLiebault has described six different stages:\\n1. Drowsiness.\\n2. Drowsiness. Suggested catalepsy possible.\\n3. Light sleep. Automatic movements possible.\\n4. Deep sleep. The subject ceases to be in relation\\nwith the outer world.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0124.jp2"}, "125": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 117\\n5. Light somnambulism. Memory on waking indistinct\\nand hazy.\\n6. Deep somnambulism. Entire loss of memory on\\nwaking. All the phenomena of post-hypnotic suggestion\\npossible.\\nBernheim suggests no less than nine divisions:\\n1. Drowsiness. Suggestions of local warmth are\\neffective.\\n2. Drowsiness with inability to open the eyes.\\n3. Suggestive catalepsy slightly present.\\n4. Suggestive catalepsy more pronounced.\\n5. Suggestive contractures may be induced.\\n6. Automatic obedience.\\n7. Loss of memory on waking. Hallucinations not\\npossible.\\n8. Loss of memory slight possibility of producing\\nhallucinations, but not post-hypnotically.\\n9. Loss of memory hypnotic and post-hypnotic\\nhallucinations possible.\\nThe extent to which suggestion affects the subject\\ndepends on the extent to which he is divorced from\\nconsciousness of the external, and on the degree to which\\nthe psychical action of the neuronic groups is inhibited.\\nMany post-hypnotic suggestions obtain their reactions\\nalmost as well in the lightest stages as in the deepest,\\nprovided the suggestions be of a character to suit the\\ncondition.\\nThe dehypnotization, or waking from hypnosis, is\\neffected by suggestion, on the same principle as that on\\nwhich the state is induced. Physical means, such as blow-\\ning on the eyes, may be used but in any case they can\\nonly be regarded as aids to the suggestion, and their value\\ndepends entirely on the mental impression they produce.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0125.jp2"}, "126": {"fulltext": "ii8 HYPNOTISM.\\nMany means are recommended by various writers for\\nwaking the patient fanning, sprinkling with water, loud\\ncalls and noises, etc. Just as the downward pass may\\nhypnotize, so the upward pass, (by reason of the mental\\nsuggestion it conveys) will serve to awaken.\\nThere is no difficulty or delay in ending the hypnosis.\\nIn all cases the subject is brought back to the normal\\nstate instantaneously. In the hands of an unskillful or\\nignorant operator, however, the subject may pass from the\\nwaking state into a condition of apparent lethargy; and out\\nof the hands of the experimenter, who is able to neither\\nawaken nor to influence his subject. These misfortunes can\\nnever occur to the practised hypnotist; but many such\\ncases are known, and the danger of these rash experiments\\nin hypnotism cannot be too strongly insisted on.\\n**When once it is found that the patient does not\\nawaken in obedience to the operator, no further atteinpts\\nshould be made, but an experienced hypnotist should be\\nimmediately sent for, or if one cannot be found the subject\\nshould be allowed to sleep it off. In the one or two cases\\nof the kind which have come under the writer s notice, the\\nharm done was almost entirely due to the ignorant and\\nfutile attempts made to arouse the patient.\\nThe duration of the hypnotic sleep of the subject, if not\\nawakened, is very variable. Some subjects will awaken at\\nthe precise moment when the operator leaves them, the\\nfact of his absence acting as a suggestion that they are no\\nlonger under his control. Others will be awakened by an\\nunexpected or loud noise. Some will be aroused from the\\nstate by the efforts they have made in it thus, for instance,\\na subject has been awakened by laughing loudly in\\nobedience to a hypnotic suggestion. If the sleep be light,", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0126.jp2"}, "127": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 119\\nsubjects will often return to the no.tural state in a very-\\nshort period but if it be deep, the sleep may continue for\\nthree to four hours. Bernheim mentions a case in which\\nthe sleep lasted eighteen hours.\\nThe condition after Hypnosis is found to be perfectly\\nnormal. In the hands of an experienced hypnotist the\\nsubject never finds that he is suffering from any such thing\\nas drowsiness or giddiness. Any ill effects are due\\nentirely to the fault of the operator.\\nVarious opinions have been expressed; some well,\\nmany ill informed, with reference to the persons who are\\nhypnotizable. It would be idle to affirm of any particular\\ntemperament that it lends itself to hypnosis when we find\\nthat over eighty per ceyit. of all persons tried is the\\nminimum average of any one who properly understands the\\nsubject in its practical application. Speaking from his own\\nexperience the writer has found that the class presenting\\nthe least difficulty, and generally giving very satisfactory\\nexperimental results is to be found in young men of average\\neducation and of fairly all-round qualities.\\nExcessive self-consciousness presents some difficulty,\\nand consequently the more or less brilliant neurotic, and\\nthe very stupid and conceited resemble one another in\\nbeing difficult subjects. Idiots are not hypnotizable, and\\nthe insane are excessively difficult to hypnotize. Sex does\\nnot appear to materially affect the question. There is\\na somewhat commoner misconception prevalent which\\nregards hysterical conditions as likely to indicate easy\\nhypnotizability. Hysteria, however, is nearly always the\\nsource of much difficulty and never makes the induction\\neasy. Nationality has very little to do with the matter.\\nIn France, Liebault hypnotized 985 out of 1,012 in", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0127.jp2"}, "128": {"fulltext": "I20 HYPNOTISM.\\nSweden, Wellenstrand hypnotized 701 out of 718 and\\nin Holland, Van Reutezhen hypnotized 169 out of 178.\\nBernheim and Forel agree, with reference to the medical\\napplication of hypnosis, that the opinion of physicians who\\ncannot hypnotize at least eighty per cent, of their patients\\nis of no value. The present writer s percentage in all his\\ncases between January, 1892, and December, 1896, was 915.\\nAmong members of the University of Oxford, his per-\\ncentage was 95.84. And judging from his observation\\nof a large number of cases, he is on the whole inclined\\nto regard susceptibility to hypnosis as generally belonging\\nto men with brains of good quality; unquestionably the\\nprocess of hypnotizing well educated people is easier,\\nand as a rule, takes less time.\\nWho is hypnotizable In order to settle this question\\nwithout hypnotic experiments, Ochorowicz has invented a\\nspecial instrument the hypnoscope it is an iron magnet,\\nin the form of a ring, which the person to be tested\\nputs on his finger. Hypnotizable persons are supposed\\nto experience certain sensations in the skin and twitching\\nof the muscles, while with the insusceptible nothing of the\\nkind takes place. The researches of other investigators\\nhave not altogether confirmed this.\\nDr. Moll says All other signs which are supposed\\nto indicate susceptibility to hypnotism, I consider un-\\ntrustworthy.\\nNeither neurasthenia nor pallor, neither hysteria nor\\ngeneral feebleness of health, produce a disposition of\\nhypnosis. As far as hysteria is concerned, it is not in my\\nexperience pecuHarly suited to hypnotism. Our ordinary\\nhysteria with its variable characteristics of headache, and\\nthe feeling of a lump in the throat (globus) combined", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0128.jp2"}, "129": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 121\\nwith the general hysterical desire to be interesting and\\nto exaggerate the sufferings endured, produces, according\\nto my experience, very little disposition to hypnosis. The\\nspirit of contradiction, very strongly developed in such\\npatients, contributes not a little to this. The mistaken\\nnotion that hysterical or nervous patients are particularly\\nsusceptible to hypnotism results from the fact that most\\nphysicians have experimented with them only besides\\nwhich It is very easy to discover in all persons something\\nwhich may be explained as a hysterical symptom, if only\\nwe try to do so. If, however, we consider every one who\\nsubmits himself to a hypnotic experiment to be nervous\\n(Morand), then naturally, only nervous persons can be put\\ninto the hypnotic state but this view cannot be taken\\nseriously. In reality, if we are to take a pathological\\ncondition of the organism as a necessary condition for\\nhypnosis, we shall be obliged to conclude that nearly\\neverybody is not quite right in the head. For the rest,\\nthe old mesmerists in part (Wirth and others), maintained\\nthat hysteria only produced a disposition to the magnetic\\nsleep.\\nFurther, if general weakness is to be put forward as a\\npredisposing factor, I, for my part, must emphasize the fact\\nthat I have hypnotized many very muscular persons. It is\\nwell known that Hansen, whose practical experience is\\nof some value, always preferred muscular people for his\\nexperiments. The susceptibility of tuberculous patients is\\nstriking. Bernheim.\\nWith regard to Intelligence, intelligent persons are\\nmore easily hypnotizable than the dull and stupid. Among\\nthe lower classes the mentally superior are undoubtedly\\neasier to hypnotize than others. Mental excitement easily", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0129.jp2"}, "130": {"fulltext": "122 HYPNOTISM.\\nprevents hypnosis. The numerous observations made by\\nWetterstrand, Ringler, and others, that certain individuals\\nare occasionally refractory to hypnosis may be connected\\nwith this fact. I could confirm this occasional disinclination\\nto hypnosis by a whole series of cases. I consider it a\\ncomplete mistake to say that the disposition to hypnosis is\\na sign of weakness of will. Without doubt the ability to\\nmaintain a passive state has a predisposing effect. This is\\nwhy soldiers are in general easy to hypnotize. The ability\\nto direct one s thoughts in any particular direction is also\\nvery favorable. As we habitually consider this power to\\nbe a sign of strength of will, the disposition to hypnosis\\nwould rather be a sign of strength than of weakness of will.\\nThis ability to give the thoughts a certain prescribed\\ndirection is partly natural capacity, partly a matter of habit,\\nand often an affair of will. Those, on the contrary, who\\ncan by no possibility fix their attention, who suffer from\\ncontinual absence of mind, can hardly be hypnotized at all.\\nIt is specially among the nervous that a strikingly large\\nnumber of this last class are to be found, who cannot hold\\nfast to a thought, and in whom a perpetual wandering\\nof the mind predominates. The disposition to hypnosis is\\nalso not specially common among those persons who are\\notherwise very impressible. It is well known that there are\\nsome who can be easily influenced in life, who believe all\\nthat they are told, upon whom the most unimportant\\ntrifles make an impression. Nevertheless, when an effort\\nis made to hypnotize them, they offer a lively resistance,\\nand the typical symptoms of hypnosis cannot be induced in\\nthem.\\nWith regard to age, children under three years\\ncannot be hypnotized at all, and even up to about", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0130.jp2"}, "131": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 123\\neight years of age they can only be hypnotized with\\ndifficulty. Although children are otherwise easily\\ninfluenced, their thoughts are so easily distracted that\\nthey cannot fix their minds on a prescribed picture, such\\nas that of hypnosis. Old age is by no means refractory\\nto hypnosis. According to the experience of the school\\nof Nancy, with which mine agree, older persons more\\noften remember, after hypnosis, all that has happened\\nthan do younger ones. Sex has no particular influence\\nit is a mistake to suppose that women are better adapted\\nthan men.\\nThe frequency with which an attempt should be\\nrepeated on the same person is of more importance.\\nWhile according to Hanhule, only one person in ten\\nproves susceptible on a first attempt the proportion\\nincreases enormously with the frequency of the sittings.\\nThis is not to be wondered at, from the mental excitement\\nshown by many people in the beginning. And as it is most\\nimportant to hypnosis that the attention should be distracted,\\nmany people are first of all obliged to learn to concentrate\\ntheir thoughts. There are even experimenters who main-\\ntain that everybody is hypnotizable, if only the attempt\\nis continued long enough. Without declaring this view\\nto be false, says Dr. Moll I may remark that I have\\nmade forty attempts with some persons without obtaining\\nhypnosis. Perhaps, by even longer continued efforts a\\nresult would have been attained, as indeed has happened\\nto me many times after forty vain attempts. In other\\ncases the exact opposite happens, and the oftener the\\nattempt is made, the less successful is it by a process\\nof auto-suggestion, the subject persuades himself that he\\nis not hypnotizable.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0131.jp2"}, "132": {"fulltext": "124 HYPNOTISM.\\nBesides these subjective conditions are some other\\nobjective ones. Thus, for example, disturbing noises at\\nthe first experiment have power to prevent the hypnosis;\\nthey draw off the attention, and thus interfere with the\\nmental state necessary for hypnosis. Later, when the\\nsubject has learned to concentrate his thoughts, noises\\nare less disturbing. But in hypnotic experiments, the\\nmost absolute avoidance by those present of any sign\\nof mistrust is necessary. The least word, a gesture, may\\nthwart the attempt to hypnotize. As the mood of a large\\ncompany is often distrustful, as a whole generation also is\\nsometimes sceptical, the great variations in susceptibility\\nto hypnosis which have shown themselves at different\\ntimes and places, are explicable. It is not surprising\\nthat on one occasion ten persons, one after the other,\\nare hypnotized, while on another occasion ten other\\npersons all prove refractory.\\nExperience and a knowledge of the mental condition\\nof mankind are indispensable for the hypnotizer. The\\nfirst is absolutely necessary; it is more important than a\\nknowledge of anatomy and physiology. By experience\\none learns to discriminate and enter into the particular\\ncharacter of the subject. Practice and a gift for observation\\nenable the right stress to be laid at the right moment either\\non fixed attention or on the closing of the eyes. The\\nexperienced experimenter knows how to judge whether it\\nbe best in any particular case to attain his aim by speaking\\nor whether, as sometimes happens, speech would be a\\nhindrance, and the chief stress would be best laid on fixed\\nattention, c. A person who is easily hypnotized can be\\nhypnotized by any one but one who is hypnotized with\\ngreat difiiculty can only be thrown into hypnosis by a", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0132.jp2"}, "133": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 125\\ngood and experienced experimenter. It is by no means a\\ncontradiction of this that the personal impression made by\\nthe experimenter may be very important and have great\\ninfluence. In consequence of this it happens that a certain\\nperson (A), can be hypnotized by (B), while he remains\\nrefractory to the efforts of (C). On the other hand, it may\\nhappen that (D) can be hypnotized by (C), but not by\\n(B). This shows that the influence of one person over\\nanother is dependent on the individuality of both. We\\nfind the same in life, in the relation of teacher to pupil, and\\nof pupil to teacher, in the reciprocal relations of friends, or\\nlovers. The influence of one person on another always\\ndepends on the individuality of both.\\nThat there exists an individual aptitude for hyp-\\nnotization, and for making the suggestions to which I\\nlay no claim is certain. It is true that we must not\\nthink of this ability as did the older mesmerists, who\\nsupposed that certain persons exercised a peculiar physical\\nforce upon others we must represent this natural ability to\\nourselves as we do many others, when we have to do with\\nparticular mental aptitudes. Calm, presence of mind, and\\npatience are essential, and not every one can exercise these\\nqualities. To busy one s self with hypnotizing a subject\\ndaily for hours at a time demands a perseverance which\\neverybody does not possess. Very much more patience is\\nnecessary for this than for writing prescriptions, for example,\\nseveral hundreds of which could be produced in the same\\nlength of time.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0133.jp2"}, "134": {"fulltext": "126 HYPNOTISM.\\nCHAPTER VIII.\\nHYPNOTISM.\\nThe Induction of Hypnosis, by the Fascination method\u00e2\u0080\u0094 The\\nmethod as first used by Donato Dr. Bremaud s method of\\nFascination as it differs from other methods Abbot Faria s\\nmethod The power of the magnet to induce Hypnosis Carl\\nSaxtus, method The candle method Professor Bernheim s\\nmethod of Suggestion^ as used by himself on his patients.\\nThe Fascination method, introducing as it does a large\\namount of the personal element, is a favorite one of the\\nmesmeric professors. The subject is told to gaze\\nsteadily into the operator s eyes. It frequently happens\\nthat in a short space of time, the subject will imitate\\nevery movement of the operator, all the while keeping\\nhis eyes firmly fixed on those of the operator. This\\nmethod is somewhat risky, since, if the subject be\\nrefractory, the operator himself may involuntarily become\\nhypnotized. Lloyd Tuckey records an instance, where,\\nin using this method on one occasion, he found himself\\ndeveloping the first symptoms of hypnosis.\\nDoctor Bremaud, a naval doctor, obtained in men sup-\\nposed to be perfectly healthy, a condition which he calls\\nfascination. The doctor considered it hypnotism in its\\nmildest form, which after repeated experiments becomes\\ncatalepsy.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0134.jp2"}, "135": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 127\\nMonsieur Bremaud Induced fascination by the contem-\\nplation of a bright spot, the subject falls Into a state\\nof stupor. He follows the operator and servilely Imitates\\nhis movements, gestures and words; he obeys suggestions,\\nand a stimulation of the nerves Induces contraction, but the\\ncataleptic pliability does not exist.\\nMessieurs Bernhelm, Liegeols and Beaunis consider\\nthis state entirely due to suggestion.\\nLong before Monsieur Bremaud a platform magne-\\ntizer, as the scientific world called him thought he had\\ndiscovered \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\s fascinaiion and even named it after himself\\nHe operated in the following manner. After having at the\\nbeginning of one of his entertainments \u00e2\u0080\u0094which at that\\ntime attracted not only all Paris, but people of every part\\nof the world operated on his own subjects, and thereby\\nimpressed the imagination of his audience, he would Inquire\\nif any of the spectators were willing to submit themselves to\\nan experiment. Several would come forward. He would\\nchoose one, and make him lean on his hands so as to\\nweaken the muscular power. Both hypnotlzer and patient\\nremained standing on the platform in front of the audience,\\nnow thoroughly interested in the struggle between one who\\nstrove to master and one who would not submit. The\\npatient s evervatlon under the influence of the numberless\\neyes fixed on him soon reached Its climax. The fascinator\\nwould then suddenly call out, Look at me! upon which\\nthe candidate-subject would draw himself up and gaze\\nIntently into the operator s eyes. The latter would then\\nlook down at the hapless victim with round, glaring eyes,\\nand in the majority of cases succeed In fascinating the\\nsubject. No doubt some individuals would feign to\\nsuccumb, thereby deceiving the operator, and when they", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0135.jp2"}, "136": {"fulltext": "128 HYPNOTISM.\\nquitted the seance would not fail to declare he was a\\ncharlatan. But the whole exhibition was well managed,\\nand it would be unjust to refer a general rule from some\\nparticular exceptions.\\nFascination thus made its way. By the constant sight\\nof gigantic advertisement, the attention of scientific men\\nwas aroused, they went to see the performance, were\\nat first incredulous, then doubted, and finally took up the\\nsubject and studied it striving to make it scientific and\\nuseful as a curative means. It no longer remains the\\nobject of morbid curiosity, but becomes a therapeutic\\nprocess that doctors avail themselves of to alleviate\\nsuffering.\\nVincent says of all the different methods employed,\\nperhaps none have the followers that the simple method\\nof fascination can boast of\\nThe professional operators have been very fond of\\nfascination and in this particular method, which is called,\\namongst other names, Imitation, Fascination, and\\nDonatism. this last from Donato, who made great\\nuse of it. In this system, the operator fixes his eyes\\non the eyes of the subject, and after a short time the\\nsubject follows every movement made by the magnetist.\\nIf he hfts an arm, the subject does the same if he kneels,\\nthe subject kneels; and so on ad infinitum. Here fascination\\nwas the form of hypnosis induced. The same state can be\\nobtained by opening the eyes of a hypnotized person wheit\\nthe hypnotist, by gazing fixedly hito his snbjecf s eyes, will\\nbe able to obtain these imitative movements. If the finger,\\nor the mounted top of a walking stick, be placed before\\nthe subject s eyes, he will follow the finger, or the stick, as\\nthe case may be in all this it is clearly stiggestion, which", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0136.jp2"}, "137": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 129\\nis the basis of ^he phenomena. The subject will not\\nperform any of these imitative actions, nor will he be\\nfascinated by the stick, unless he fully understands that\\nit is expected of him. In very many ways, by a look or\\na movement, the hypnotist is often able to convey a\\nsuggestion to his subject which will be quite as potent as\\nif made by means of speech. This extreme susceptibility\\nto suggestion is either not known or is overlooked by\\nthe ordinary public, and the professional hypnotizers often\\navail themselves of this common ignorance to entertain\\nthose who attend their exhibitions.\\nThe latter form of fascination was used for the first time\\nby Donato, has since been described by Bremaud, also has\\nbeen applied by Hansen. Donato, who operates especially\\nupon young people proceeds in the following manner:\\nHe asks the subject to lay the palms of his hands upon\\nhis own, stretched out horizontally, and to press downward\\nwith all his might. The subject s whole attention and all\\nhis physical force is absorbed in this manoeuvre. All his\\ninnervation, so to speak, is concentrated in this muscular\\neffort, and so the distraction of his thoughts is prevented.\\nThe magnetizer, says Bremaud, according to Donato,\\nlooks at him sharply, quickly, and closely, directing him\\nby gesture (and by word if need be), to look at him as\\nfixedly as he is able. Then the operator recedes or walks\\naround the patient, keeping his eyes upon him and attract-\\ning his gaze, while the subject follows him as if fascinated,\\nwith his eyes wide open, and unable to take them from the\\noperator s face. If once carried away by the first experi-\\nment, the simple fixation of the gaze suffices to make the\\nsubject follow. It is no longer necessary to make him first\\nplace his hand on the operator s,", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0137.jp2"}, "138": {"fulltext": "I30 HYPNOTISM,\\nProfessor Bernheim says, When we have to do with\\nsimple suggestion by gesture, when the magnetizer fixes\\nhis eyes upon the subject s, the latter understands that he\\nmust keep his eyes fixed and must follow the operator\\neverywhere. He believes that he is drawn toward him.\\nIt is a suggestive psychical fascination and not physical\\nin the least. I have seen the experiment successful with\\nthe best somnambulists when they did not understand\\nthe meaning of the operator s gesture. In such cases,\\nthe experiment may be made to succeed by imitation,\\nif the subject has seen it performed successfully in his\\npresence upon some one else. This then is suggestion\\nby imitation.\\nAmong subjects thus fascinated, some submit to\\nthe influence without hypnotic sleep, just as do those who\\nare hypnotized by another method. They are susceptible\\nto suggestion in the working condition. They remember\\nafterward what they have done they do not know why\\nthey were unable to keep from following and gazing at\\nthe operator. Others remember nothing at all after they\\nare waked by blowing upon the eyes or by a simple\\nword. They do not know what has happened they have\\nbeen in a somnambulistic condition with their eyes open.\\nIn this somnambulistic fascination, catalepsy and hallucina-\\ntion may be induced. In these same subjects, catalepsy\\nor hallucination may often be induced by a simple word,\\na gesture, or a position communicated to them without any\\nprevious fascination.\\nThe awaking may be spontaneous. Subjects who\\nsleep lightly at the first hypnotization, sometimes have\\na tendency to awake quickly. It is necessary to hold\\ntheir eyelids closed, or to say from time to time, sleep,", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0138.jp2"}, "139": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 131\\nin order to keep them under the influence. The habit\\nof sleep is very soon acquired by the organism. The\\nsubject no longer wakes while the operator remains at\\nhis side he may awake as soon as the operator s\\ninfluence is withdrawn. The majority of subjects left to\\nthemselves sleep on for several minutes, for half an hour,\\nor even for one or more hours. I allowed one of my\\nsubjects to sleep fifteen hours, another eighteen.\\nThe Abbe Faria, in about 18 14, began to study hyp-\\nnotism, and it must be admitted that this development is\\nvery interesting and contains more than the germs to the\\nwhole of Braid s theory, and of all the theories concerning\\nthe power of imagination or suggestion in consequence\\nof the same.\\nThe phenomena observed by Faria in his subjects do\\nnot differ in the main points from that of Puysegur and the\\nother operators or their somnambulistic subjects, and this\\nis the case especially in regard to the complete loss\\nof memory about everything on awakening.\\nFaria said, During the somnambulistic sleep the eyes\\nare as a rule closed. There are, nevertheless, somnambu-\\nlists who sleep with open eyes, and my experience has\\nproved to me that these latter are somnambulists by\\nnature. Their open eyes remain fixed and immovable,\\nand they seem to be perfectly sightless. There are a few\\nwho move their eyes and see what occurs in their sur-\\nroundings, still without being able to have any recollection\\nwhatever when they are awakened.\\nThe Abbe Faria method was very simple. After placing\\nhis subject in a comfortable position, in not too bright a\\nlight, he concentrated the attention of his subject as much\\nas possible, by having him look at some object on the", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0139.jp2"}, "140": {"fulltext": "132 HYPNOTISM,\\nwall way up above his head. After several minutes of the\\nmost perfect silence, he would suddenly shout in a loud\\ncommanding voice the word Sleep. In very many\\ncases this was sufficient to attain the desired result.\\nAs an advocate of the identity of somnambulism and\\nnormal sleep, Faria made a study of lethargy and he was\\none of the first who in a few lines described this interesting\\ncondition, which Azam also investigated. This is the state\\nin which we nearly always find a certain double individ-\\nuality of the person. It must be remembered that Faria\\nclaimed positively that there were no dangers attached\\nwhen using his methods, and that subjects thus caused to\\nsleep and brought under influence will by no means suffer\\nany unpleasant effects.\\nSeveral authorities claim that the magnet has in some\\ncases the power of hypnotizing. This may be true but\\nmany of the best known hypnotizers have been unable\\nto find any trace of such influence. However, it may be\\nthat in a certain few abnormal cases the magnet has\\nthis virtue but it seems a more natural hypothesis to\\nattribute these few hypnosis to suggestion, an element\\nwhich enters into every method, and which is so subtle\\nin its action that it is almost impossible in these cases\\nfor an operator to state positively that it has been\\nentirely avoided.\\nBraid has left on record an experiment of his, which\\nbears on the supposed influence of the magnet. A lady\\ntold him that she could not endure a magnet brought\\nnear her, and that it always had the most profound\\ninfluence on her, and so it had when she knew of its\\nproximity. But Braid, in order to test the nature of\\nthis influence, sat near to her on one occasion for half", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0140.jp2"}, "141": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM 133\\nan hour, with a powerful magnet concealed in his\\npocket, and as he expected, found that no effect was\\nproduced. However, many hypnotists still believe in\\nthe power of the magnet.\\nIn fact the belief of the action of the magnet on\\nhuman beings is very old. The Magi of the East used\\nit for curing diseases, and the Chinese and Hindoos\\nused it long ago. Albertus Magnus, in the thirteenth\\ncentury, and later, Paracelsus Von Helmart and Kercher\\nalso used it, as well as the astronomer and ex-Jesuit\\nHell, of Vienna, at the end of the eighteenth century.\\nWe have seen that Mesmer also used it at first. Even\\nthen, many doctors also used it. Reil, the well-known\\nphysician, used the magnet therapeutically; in 1845,\\nReichenbach asserted that some sensitive person had\\npeculiar sensations when they were touched by ii magnet.\\nHe also said that many saw light the so-called Odd\\nlight.\\nCarl Saxtus gives the following as his method and as it\\nis one of the easiest methods, we give it. Mr. Saxtus has\\nbeen wonderfully successful in hypnotism, as is shown in\\nhis book called Hypnotism. Price of this book by\\nregistered mail is $2.50.\\nIf I wish to hypnotize a class, or to try a large\\nnumber, I use a zinc button, with a copper wire through\\nthe centre, which I request the individual to hold in his\\nclosed right hand, resting the hand on the right knee. In\\nthe left hand, which he holds open, I place a small crystal,\\nset in horn, that is polished to a shining black, the left arm\\nand hand resting partly on the chest. The subject is then\\nrequested to gaze continually and intently on the crystal\\nprism, and not to undertake any motions whatever, keeping", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0141.jp2"}, "142": {"fulltext": "134 HYPNOTISM.\\nthe same position in which I place him, and to fix his\\nwhole attention on sleep. After a lapse of seven or eight\\nminutes I commence to make passes over the subject; at\\nthe end of three or four manipulations I command him to\\nclose his eyes I perform one or two passes more, from the\\nhead downward to the knee placing my left^ hand on his\\nforehead, then press a certain place with my thumb, at the\\nsame time pressing with my right hand the subject s\\nthumb.\\nAnother very simple, yet effective method, when\\nonly hypnotizing one person, is to let the subject gaze\\nfixedly at a lighted candle for about eight or ten minutes,\\nhold the candle at such a height that it requires consider-\\nable effort on the part of the subject to look up to it. The\\nsubject must not wink the eyelids any more than is abso-\\nlutely necessary, and must draw the breath deep and in\\na measured time. The subject is told before commencing\\nto hold the mouth open about one inch, with the tongue\\ncurved, the tip resting parallel with the lower teeth. At\\nthe end of about three minutes I raise my left hand over\\nthe back part of the subject s head, and with my fingers\\nspread far apart, make two or three passes downward along\\nthe spinal nerves, after which I command the subject to\\nclose the eyes. I then perform one or two more manipula-\\ntions until full sleep is secured.\\nProfessor Bernheim s method is the following, as\\ngiven in his own book, Suggestive Therapeutics.\\nI begin by saying to the patient that I beheve\\nbenefit is to be derived from the use of suggestive\\ntherapeutics, that it is possible to cure or at least to\\nrelieve him by hypnotism that there is nothing either\\nhurtful or strange about it that it is an ordi?iajy", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0142.jp2"}, "143": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM, 135\\nor torpor which can be induced in everyone, and that\\nthis quiet, beneficial condition restores the equiUbrium\\nof the nervous system. If necessary, I hypnotize one\\nor two subjects in his presence, in order to show him\\nthat there is nothing painful in this condition, and that\\nit is not accompanied with any unusual sensation.\\nWhen I have thus banished from his mind the idea\\nof magnetism and the somewhat mysterious fear that\\nattaches to that unknown condition, above all when he\\nhas seen patients cured or benefited by the means in\\nquestion he is no longer suspicious, but gives himself up,\\nthen I say, Look at me, and think of nothing but sleep\\nyour eyelids begin to feel heavy your eyes are tired\\nthey begin to wink they are getting moist you cannot\\nsee distinctly they are closed. Some patients close their\\neyes and are asleep immediately. With others, I have to\\nrepeat again and yet again, and lay more stress on what I\\nsay, and even make gestures. It makes little difference\\nwhat sort of gesture is made. I generally hold two fingers\\nof my right hand before the patient s eyes and ask him to\\nlook at them, or I sometimes pass both hands several\\ntimes before his eyes, or persuade him to fix his eyes upon\\nmine, endeavoring at the same time to concentrate his\\nattention upon the idea of sleep. I keep saying, Your\\nlids are closing, you cannot open them again your arms\\nleel heavy, so do your legs you cannot feel anything\\nyour hands are motionless you see nothing, you are\\ngoing to sleep. And I then add in a commanding tone to\\nSleep. This word often turns the balance. The eyes\\nclose and the patient sleeps or is at least influenced.\\nI use the word sleep in order to obtain as far as\\npossible over the patient a suggestive influence which shall", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0143.jp2"}, "144": {"fulltext": "136 HYPNOTISM.\\nbring about sleep or a state closely approaching it, for\\nsleep properly so called does not always occur. If the\\npatient has no inclination to sleep and shows no drow-\\nsiness, I take care to say that sleep is not essential that\\nthe hypnotic influence, whence comes the benefit, may\\nexist without sleep that many patients are hypnotized\\nalthough they do not know it.\\nIf the patient does not shut his eyes or keep them\\nshut I do not require them to be fixed on mine, or on my\\nfingers, for any length of time, for it sometimes happens\\nthat they remain wide open indefinitely, and instead of the\\nidea of sleep being conceived, only a rigid fixation of the\\neyes results. In this case, closure of the eyes by the\\noperator succeeds better. After keeping them fixed one\\nor two minutes, I push the eyelids down, or stretch them\\nslowly over the eyes, gradually closing them more and\\nmore and so imitating the process of natural sleep. Finally\\nI keep them closed, repeating the suggestion, Your lids\\nare stuck together; you cannot open them. The need\\nof sleep becomes greater and greater you can no longer\\nresist. I lower my voice gradually, repeating the command,\\nSleep, and it is very seldom that more than three minutes\\npass before sleep or some degree of hypnotic influence is\\nobtained. It is sleep by suggestion a type of sleep which\\nI insinuate into the brain.\\nPasses or gazing at the eyes or fingers of the operator\\nare only useful in concentrating the attention. They are\\nnot absolutely essential.\\nWith some patients success is mor^ readily obtained\\nby acting quietly with others quiet suggestion has no\\neffect. With these it is better to be abrupt, to restrain\\nwith an authoritative voice the inclination to laugh, or the", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0144.jp2"}, "145": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 137\\nweak and involuntary resistance which this manoeuvre may\\nprovoke.\\nMany persons are influenced at the first sitting, others\\nnot until the second or third. After being hypnotized\\nonce or twice, they are speedily influenced. It often is\\nenough to look at such a patient, to spread the fingers\\nbefore the eyes, to say, Sleep, and in a second or two,\\nsometimes instantly, the eyes close and all the phenomena\\nof sleep are present. It is only after a certain number\\nof hypnotizations, generally a small number, that the\\npatients acquire the .iptitude for going to sleep quickly.\\nIt occasionally happens that I influence seven or\\neight persons successively, and almost instantly. Then\\nthere are others who are refractory or more difficult to\\ninfluence. I only try for a few minutes. A second or\\nthird trial often brings the hypnosis which is not obtained\\nat first.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0145.jp2"}, "146": {"fulltext": "38 HYPNOTISM.\\nCHAPTER IX.\\nHYPNOTISM.\\nTelepathic suggestion Hallucination Auto-suggestion Post-\\nhypnotic suggestion.\\nThe first proposition is, that there is inherent in mankind\\nthe power to communicate thoughts to others independently\\nof objective means of communication. The truth of this\\ngeneral proposition has been so thoroughly demonstrated\\nby the experiments of members of the London (England)\\nSociety for Psychical Research, that time and space will\\nnot be wasted in its further elucidation. For a full treat-\\nment of the subject the reader is referred to Phantasms\\nof the Living, in which the results of the researches of that\\nsociety are ably set forth by Messrs. Edmund Gurney,\\nF. W. H. Meyers, and Frank Podmore. It is hardly\\nnecessary to remind the reader that the methods of\\ninvestigation employed by these able and indefatigable\\nlaborers in the field of psychical research are purely scien-\\ntific, and their works are singularly free from manifestations\\nof prejudice or of unreasoning scepticism on the one hand,\\nand of credulity on the other. It is confidently assumed,\\ntherefore, that the power of telepathic communication is\\nas thoroughly established as is any fact in nature.\\nHudson says: Telepathy is primarily the communion", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0146.jp2"}, "147": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 139\\nof su1)jective mind, or rather it is the normal means\\nof communication between subjective minds. The reason\\nof the apparent rarity of its manifestations is, that it requires\\nexceptional conditions to bring its results above the thresh-\\nhold of consciousness. There is every reason to believe\\nthat the souls, or subjective minds of men can, and do\\nhabitually hold communion with one another when not\\nthe remotest perception of the fact is communicated to\\nthe objective intelligence. It may be that such communion\\nis not general among men but it is certain that it is\\nheld between those who, from any cause, are en rapport.\\nThe facts recorded by the Society for Psychical Research\\ndemonstrate that proposition. Thus, near relatives are\\noftenest found to be in communion, as is shown by the\\ncomparative frequency of telepathic communication between\\nrelatives, giving warning of sickness or of death. Next in\\nfrequency, are communications between intimate friends.\\nCommunications of this character between comparative\\nstrangers are apparently rare. Of course, the only means\\nwe have of judging of these things is by the record of those\\ncases in which the communications have been brought to\\nthe objective consciousness of the percipients. From these\\ncases it seems fair to infer that the subjective minds\\nof those who are deeply interested in one another are in\\nhabitual communion, especially when the personal interest\\nor welfare of either agent or percipient is at stake. Be\\nthis as it may, it is certain that telepathic communication\\ncan be established at will by the conscious eifbrt of one\\nor both of the parties, even between strangers. The\\nexperiments of the Society above-named, have demon-\\nstrated this fact. It will be assumed, therefore, for the\\npurpose of this argument, that telepathic communion can", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0147.jp2"}, "148": {"fulltext": "I40 HYPNOTISM.\\nbe established between two subjective minds at the will\\nof either. The fact may not be perceived by the subject,\\nfor it may not rise above the threshold of his subjective\\nconsciousness. But for therapeutic purposes, it is not\\nnecessary that the patient should know, objectively, that\\nanything is being done for him. Indeed, it is often\\nbetter he should not know it\\nIn ordinary practice two methods are used: First,\\nthis method is by passivity on the part of the patient\\nand mental suggestion by the healer. Second, is by pas-\\nsivity on the part of the patient and oral suggestion by the\\nhealer. That is to say, the oral suggestionist often\\nunconsciously telepaths a mental suggestion to the subjec-\\ntive mind of the patient. If he thoroughly believes the\\ntruth of his own suggestion, the telepathic effect is sure\\nto follow, and always to the manifest advantage of the\\npatient. This is why it is that in all works on hyp-\\nnotism and mesmerism the value and importance of self\\nconfidence on the part of the healer, or, in other words,\\nbelief in his own suggestion, is so strenuously insisted\\nupon. Practice and experience have demonstrated the\\nfact, but no writer on the subject attempts to give a\\nscientific explanation of it. But when it is known that\\nthe telepathy is the normal method of communication\\nbetween subjective minds, and that in healing by mental\\nprocesses it is constantly employed, consciously or uncon-\\nsciously, to the persons, the explanation is obvious.\\nYou can scarcely talk with a family, in which some\\nmember of it has not had some such experience as will be\\nrelated.\\nThese telepathic impressions, may occur in the waking\\nstate at all times of day. They may occur as dreams in", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0148.jp2"}, "149": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 141\\nsleep. They frequently occur just as, or after one has\\nretired, before falling asleep.\\nWe will cite one case, which James R. Cocke, M. D.,\\nspeaks of in his book, Hypnotism.\\nIt occurred in the winter of 1877, to Mrs. E., a\\nProtestant Irish woman, sixty years of age. Her reputation\\nwas good, and she was known to be a truthful woman.\\nShe was well educated and unusually intelligent.\\nOne morning, at breakfast, she told us, that her aunt,\\na Mrs. B, had died the night before in the City of Cork,\\nIreland. She stated that she saw her aunt, described her\\ndeath-scene, and heard her call her, Mrs. E., by name.\\nShe saw an old-fashioned clock in her aunt s room,\\nand the hands pointed to i 15 A M. At three o clock that\\nafternoon, the lady received a cablegram informing her\\nof the death of her aunt, confirming the hour of death as\\nseen by Mrs. E.\\nSubsequendy, a letter received by Mrs. E., stated that\\nthe dying words of the aunt were repeated calls for her.\\nThis same lady, so she told me, had, on previous\\noccasions, experienced similar telepathic phenomena.\\nTelepathy^ is comparatively a new word at least in\\nthe sense in which it is now frequently used. By telepathy\\nI mean the influence which one person, by his will or\\nmental suggestions and without any material media of\\ncommunication, may exert over another at a distance.\\nWhen a person has once put another into what is called\\nhypnotic sleep, he need not always have recourse to\\npasses or personal contact to hypnotize the subject again.\\nThe look of the operator, his will even, without the look,\\nmay exert the same influence upon the subject. This\\ninfluence is also at times effective when the subject is", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0149.jp2"}, "150": {"fulltext": "142 HYPNOTISM.\\nentirely ignorant of the will of the operator, and even\\nwhen they are at a considerable distance apart, in different\\nrooms, with closed doors between them.\\nThe absolute truth of this statement has been abund-\\nantly verified time and again, by scores of the most careful\\nand reliable operators. It is enough here to say, that no\\none who has fairly examined the subject has any doubt\\nabout the truth of the above statement, made more than\\nsixty years ago to the French Academy of Medicine.\\nNow, operators are not all equally effective, and are not\\nalways equally so. The same is true of subjects. The\\nsimple fact, however, is that some operators can and do\\ninfluence some subjects at a distance and this is not\\nexplained on any known sensual basis. As soon as this is\\nadmitted, then the question of distance a yard or a rod,\\na furlong or a mile, a mile or a thousand miles, is not a\\nquestion of theory, but oi fact.\\nAnd the facts are that persons who are not operator\\nand subject in any such sense as those names are used\\nin hypnotic connection, can and do, at will, communicate\\nintelligently with each other telepathically. This is not\\nsaying that they can at any time, and under all circum-\\nstances, communicate nor that their communications are\\nfull and entirely satisfactory. They do, however, at\\npre-arranged times, convey and receive consciously well-\\ndefined, intelligent, and useful communications. There\\nare, too, certain persons not a great many, however\\nwho can, whenever it is desired, call certain other per-\\nsons attention, telepathically. This is frequently done.\\nThe subject of telepathy, which properly embraces all\\nmethods of thought transference which does not mainly\\nemploy the usual mechanical means and the usual appeal", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0150.jp2"}, "151": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 143\\nto the senses, is comparatively a new study which promises\\ngreat rewards to the patient and successful student.\\nSense delusion is the definition to Hallucination\\nwhen used in connection with hypnotism. It is the per-\\nception of an object where in reality there is nothing.\\nWe observe numerous hallucinations in hypnosis.\\nHallucinations of sight are more easily caused when the\\neyes are closed the subjects then see objects and per-\\nsons with their eyes shut, as in dreams. They think, at\\nthe same time, that their eyes are open, just as we are\\naware in dreams that our eyes are shut. Dr. Moll, says\\nIf we wish to cause a delusion of the sense of sight at\\nthe moment of opening the eyes, it is necessary to make\\nthe suggestion quickly, lest the act of opening the eyes\\nshould awake the subject. I advise the use of fixed\\nattention while the suggestion is being made, so that\\nthe subject may not awaken himself by looking about.\\nThe other organs of sense may also be deluded. I knock\\non the table and give the idea that cannon are being\\nfired. I blow with the bellows and make the suggestion\\nthat an engine is steaming up. A hallucination of hearing\\nsomething, e. g. the piano, is produced without the aid\\nof any external stimulus. In the same way smell, taste,\\nand touch may be the senses deceived. It is well known\\nthat hypnotics will drink water, or even ink, for wine, will\\neat onions for pears, will smell ammonia for eau de\\nCologne. In these cases, the expression of face induced\\nby the suggested perception corresponds so perfectly to it\\nthat a better effect would scarcely be produced if the real\\narticle were used. Tell the subject he has taken snuff, he\\nsneezes. All varieties of the sense of touch, of pressure,\\nof temperature, of pain, can be influenced. I tell a person", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0151.jp2"}, "152": {"fulltext": "144 HYPNOTISM.\\nthat he is standing on ice. He feels cold at once. He\\ntrembles, his teeth chatter, and he wraps himself in his coat.\\nIt appears to me that the senses of touch and taste are\\nthe most easily and frequently influenced. For example,\\nthe suggestion of a bitter taste takes effect much sooner\\nthan the suggestion of a delusion of sight or hearing. It\\nis true that the subjects often account to themselves for\\nthe delusion they taste the bitterness, but say at the same\\ntime that it must be a subjective sensation, since they have\\nnothing bitter in their mouths.\\nSense delusions can be suggested in anyway. We\\ncan tell the subject that he sees a bird. We can suggest\\nthe same thing by gesture, for example, by pretending to\\nhold a bird in the hand particularly after the subject has\\nreceived some hypnotic training. The chief point is that\\nthe subject should understand what is intended by the\\ngesture.\\nNaturally, several organs of sense can be influenced\\nby suggestion at the same time. I tell some one, here\\nis a rose he not only sees, but smells and feels the rose.\\nI pretend to give another subject a dozen oysters he\\neats them at once, without further suggestion. The sug-\\ngestion here affects the sight, feeling, and taste at the same\\ntime. In many cases, the muscular sense is influenced\\nin a striking manner by such suggestion. I give a sub-\\nject a glass of wine to drink he lifts the pretended glass\\nto his lips, and leaves a space between hand and mouth\\nas he would if he held a real glass. I am not obliged to\\ndefine the delusion for each separate sense the subject\\ndoes this spontaneously for himself The subject in this\\nway completes most suggestions by a process resembling\\nthe indirect suggestion.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0152.jp2"}, "153": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 145\\nAll sorts of hallucinatory Impressions may be produced\\nupon the sense of hearing as well as upon the sense of\\nsight, and taste. The subject s hearing may be made\\nabnormally acute, or he may be made to hear things\\nwhich do not exist. This peculiar sub-conscious condition,\\nwhen not interfered with by suggestion, renders the sense\\nof hearing peculiarly, nay, pathologically acute.\\nA hypnotized subject is much more sensitive to music.\\nIt has for him a deeper meaning than for the normal mind.\\nThere is, indeed, yet unexplored a vast field for experi-\\nmentation in this direction. The peculiar effect of music\\non hypnotized subjects is yet unexplained.\\nThe fact that music can produce remarkable effects on\\nhypnotized subjects gives to the subjective consciousness\\na psychological importance which it has never occupied\\nbefore, and undoubtedly the future will prove that this field\\nis rich with yet undiscovered treasures.\\nMany sensations, many vague memories of some forgot-\\nten day, will be brought up from the depths and recesses\\nof this wonderful land of dreams and will be studied, and\\nwill enrich colder thought with radiant poetic gems.\\nHallucinations and delusions of taste and smell in a\\nhypnotized subject can also be produced by suggestion,\\nbut they possess no especial interest. The power of speech\\nmay be wholly abolished or partially inhibited, and certain\\nwords will be forgotten at command while the hypnotic\\nstate lasts. Also the memory of a printed page or the\\nmemory of certain letters may be forgotten.\\nI have shown that hallucination may act upon the five\\nsenses of the body as well as upon the emotions when a\\npatient is hypnotized.\\nAuTO-SuGGESTiON. Perhaps the best definition of", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0153.jp2"}, "154": {"fulltext": "146 HYPNOTISM.\\nAuto-Suggestion or Auto-Hypnosis Is that self predomin-\\nates over all else. No suggestion can quite rid the body\\nof the predominate self or drive the ideas away from the\\nbrain, that are persisted in, when not under the influence\\nof hypnosis. Therefore much harm is done\u00e2\u0080\u0094 and nearly\\nevery case where hypnosis fails to give at least relief is\\ncaused by auto-suggestions as will readily be seen from the\\nfollowing cases which are cited by the best known authority\\nin the world.\\nAuto-suggestion is now recognized as a factor in hyp-\\nnotism by all followers of the Nancy school. Professor\\nBernheim mentions it as an obstacle in the way of the cure\\nof some of his patients. One case that he mentions was\\nthat of a young girl suffering from a tibio-torsal sprain.\\nI tried to hypnotize her, says Bernheim, she gave her-\\nself up to it with bad grace, saying that it would do no\\ngood. I succeeded, however, in putting her into a deep\\nenough sleep two or three times. But the painful con-\\ntracture persisted she seemed to take a malicious delight\\nin proving to the other patients in the service that it did\\nno good, that she always felt worse.\\nThe inrooted idea, the Mncoiiscious auto-suggestion, is such\\nthat nothing could call It up again. When the treatment\\nwas begun, she seemed to be convinced that hypnotism\\ncould not cure her. It is this Idea, so deeply rooted in\\nher brain, which neutralizes our efforts and her own wish to\\nbe cured.\\nAnother one of Professor Bernheim s cases is the\\nfollowing\\nI recently had to treat a young woman who was hypo-\\nchondriacal. Among other troubles she had a violent pain\\nin the epigastrium, which she believed to be connected with", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0154.jp2"}, "155": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 147\\nuterine cancer, although she had repeatedly been told that\\nthere was no lesion there. I succeeded in hypnotizing her\\noften enough, and sometimes even in obtaining a profound\\nsleep. I hypnotized her for ten days by energetic sug-\\ngestion, I succeeded in quieting the pain. Upon waking,\\nshe was obliged to confess she had no more, or scarcely any\\npain. But she hastened to add that the pain would cer-\\ntainly return, and in fact, it did come back, involuntarily\\nevoked by her diseased imagination.\\nWith these sort of patients, auto-suggestion is stronger\\nthan a suggestion from some one else. They listen to their\\ninner feelings, they call them up they are in relationship\\nonly with themselves they are auto-suggestionists.\\nDr. Moll, says: Auto-suggestions are not uncommon\\nas pathological incidents. Dread of open spaces is nothing\\nbut an auto-suggestion. The patient in this case is pos-\\nsessed by the idea that he cannot step across some open\\nspace no reasoning is of avail here. The patient acknow-\\nledges its justice without permitting it to influence him,\\nbecause his anto-suggestion is too pow^erful. As a rule,\\nlogic is for the most part powerless over these auto-\\nsuggestions. Many hysterical paralyses are likewise auto-\\nsuggestions thus, a patient cannot move his legs because\\nhe is convinced that movement is impossible. If this con-\\nviction can be shaken, movement is at once practicable.\\nAuto-suggestion may be called up by some external\\ncause this may affect the person from outside, and thus\\ninduce auto-suggestion. Charcot referred some isolated\\ntransmatic paralysis to some such originating mechanism.\\nAccording to this view a violent blow on the arm, following\\non certain disturbances of sensibility, may produce in the\\nperson concerned a conviction that he cannot move his arm.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0155.jp2"}, "156": {"fulltext": "148 HYPNOTISM.\\nAs the conviction was called up by a blow, this case stands\\nsomewhere between external suggestion and auto-suggestion.\\nWe will call all cases in which the auto-suggestion did not\\narise spontaneonsly, but was the secondary result of some-\\nthing else, such as a blow, indirect suggestion as opposed\\nto direct suggestion, which arouses a certain idea immedi-\\nately, of which I have given an example. It is, besides,\\nnot always necessary that there should be a conscious\\nmental act in suggestion individuality and habit sometimes\\nreplace this, and play a great part in the training of the\\nsubject, of which we have shown above. For another\\nexample, if some external sign, such as a blow on the arm,\\nhas several times, by means of a conscious mental act, pro-\\nduced the auto-suggestion that the arm is paralyzed, then\\nthe auto-suggestion may repeat itself later mechanically at\\nevery blow without any conscious thought about the effect\\nof the blow.\\nOne can induce the hypnotic state upon himself by the\\nexercise of the same faculties which produce it when it is\\nbrought about by the suggestion of another.\\nDr. Cocke, says: A number of my subjects will pass\\ninto a deep trance and remain so for a period of time rang-\\ning from five minutes to two hours, if they look at a bright\\nobject, a bed of coals, or at smooth running water. They\\nhave the ability to resist this state or to bring it at will.\\nThat this power of auto-hypnotism is exercised by nearly\\nevery one I am quite sure. Who does not look at a tiny\\npicture, and in the minute face see again reflected the\\nbeaming countenance, life-size of some dear one. In matter\\nof fact. Dr. Moll, says: It is possible that some states\\nof sleep, which are generally considered pathological, belong\\nto auto-hypnosis. Post-hypnotic suggestion, means that", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0156.jp2"}, "157": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 149\\na patient will carry out any Instructions given him when In\\na hypnotic sleep, (by the doctor) after he awakens he will\\ndo the act apparently unconscious of having received any\\nsuggestion from the operator. Perhaps, the best way to\\nexplain this, will be by citing cases where the operator and\\npatient are both used to the post-hypnotic suggestions.\\nDr. Moll, says For this purpose, I will choose some\\naction Induced by post-hypnotic suggestion, and will sup-\\npose It to be a case of hypnosis without subsequent loss\\nof memory.\\n**Here Is an analogous case In waking life. I give a\\nletter to X, who called on me, and ask him to post it on\\nhis way home. If he passes a letter-box. This he does.\\nI now give exactly the same commission to Y, who Is\\nIn a hypnotic state, without subsequent loss of memory.\\nIn both cases my commission is executed. Now, the\\nquestion Is, what Is the difference between the two cases In\\nthe case of Y, one circumstance may strike us, i. e., that he\\ndid the act without or perhaps against his will.\\nThe fact that Y posted the letter without being willing\\nto do so, does not distinguish his case from X s. X walked\\nhome with Z, and talked all the way. He passed a letter-\\nbox, and though he continued to talk, and apparently did\\nnot notice the box, he mechanically put the letter into it.\\nLater, It occurred to him that he had a letter to post he\\nhad a faint recollection of having done It. He could, how-\\never, convince himself of the fact by feeling in his pocket\\nfor the letter. We see, then, that he executed the commis-\\nsion without conscious will.\\nIt would be more striking if X should do some such\\naction against his will. In the action described, this was\\nnot the case. He would not have executed the commission", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0157.jp2"}, "158": {"fulltext": "I50 HYPNOTISM.\\nif his will had not consented. Also, he would have\\nremembered the action if his will had opposed it. There\\nmust always be consciousness when the will is exerted to\\nprevent something. There must be an idea of the action\\nto be performed. What is striking in post-hypnotic sug-\\ngestion is exactly the fact that it is carried out against the\\nwill, in which case the subject -of course knows what is to\\nbe done, and has an idea of it. It is this idea which causes\\na post-hypnotic action to be carried out in spite of the will.\\nThe question now is whether we can find an analogy\\nto this in waking life whether an idea can in this case\\ncause a motor or other effect in spite of the will. The\\nanswer must be, Very commonly.\\nWe saw, when talking of suggestion in the waking\\nstate, that an idea is sometimes enough to cause an action\\nor a particular state in spite of the will. This is a common\\noccurrence. We will suppose that A, has lost a dear friend\\nor relative. A is, in consequence, sad and depressed, and\\ncannot refrain from tears. Months pass, and he grows calm,\\nbut when the anniversary of the death arrives, he falls again\\ninto the same state of mental excitement and tears, which\\nhe cannot conquer. The vivid idea has been enough to\\nthrow him, against his will, into a certain state.\\nA person who stammers is in the same case. Alone\\nat home he can speak quite well, but a stranger comes in\\nand he begins to stammer. He stammers because he\\nthought he should stammer, and his will is powerless both\\nover the thought and the stammering. We see the same\\nsort of thing constantly, and certain states of illness are\\ninduced merely by a vivid expectation of them they then\\ncome on in spite of the will. Accordingly, it is not astonish-\\ning that a post-hypnotic suggestion should succeed against\\nthe subject s will.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0158.jp2"}, "159": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 151\\nThe post-hypnotic movements and actions carried out\\nin spite of the will or, to speak more exactly, in spite\\nof the wish have a great likeness to the instinctive move-\\nments well known in psychology, which are often made to\\nsatisfy a pleasure which follows from the act. Such instinc-\\ntive movements are entirely independent of the will\\nthey take place in spite of the wish.\\nAll post-hypnotic suggestions are merely apparently\\nforgotten between waking and fulfillment, as will be seen in\\nthe following cases cited by Professor Bernheim.\\nI suggest to D during hypnotic sleep that upon\\nwaking he should rub his sore thigh and leg, that he should\\nthen get out of bed, walk to the window and return to bed.\\nHe performed all these acts without suspecting that a\\ncommand had been given to him while he was sleeping.\\nI suggested to S on one occasion, that on waking\\nhe should put on his hat, bring it to me in the next room,\\ntake it off his head and put it on to mine. This he did\\nwithout knowing why.\\n**On another occasion when my colleague, M. Char-\\npentier, was present, I suggested to him, when he first\\nfell asleep, that as soon as he waked, he should take my\\ncolleague s umbrella, which was lying on the bed, open\\nit, and walk twice up and down the piazza on which\\nthe room opened. It was some time afterward when I\\nwaked him. Before his eyes were open, we went quickly\\nout of the room, so that the suggestion might not be\\nrecalled by our presence. We soon saw him coming\\nwith the umbrella in his hand, but not open (in spite\\nof the suggestion). He walked twice up and down the\\ncorridor. I said to him, What are you doing? He\\nanswered, I am taking the air. Why, are you warm", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0159.jp2"}, "160": {"fulltext": "152 HYPNOTISM.\\n*No, it is only my idea I occasionally walk up and down\\nout here. What is the umbrella for It belongs to\\nM. Charpentier. What I thought it was mine it looks\\nsomething like mine I shall take it back to the place I\\ntook it from.\\nOne morning, at eleven o clock, I suggested to\\nC that an hour after midday he would be seized by an\\nidea he could not resist, namely, to walk along Stanislaus\\nStreet and return, twice. At one o clock, I saw him go\\nout into the street, walk along from one end to the other,\\nreturn, and stop, Hke a lounger, under the windows. But\\nhe did not do it twice, perhaps because he did not\\nunderstand the second part of the suggested command,\\nperhaps because he resisted it.\\nOn one occasion, during X s hypnotic sleep, I\\nsuggested the following act When you awake, you will\\ngo to my office, and you will write on a sheet of paper, I\\nhave slept very well you will place a cross after your\\nname.\\nI waked him in a quarter of an hour. He went to the\\noffice, wrote the phrase I had put into his mind, signed it,\\nand made a cross after his name. What does this cross\\nmean, I asked. Why he replied, upon my word I do\\nnot know I made it without thinking. The next day, I\\nmade him write another sentence with two crosses after his\\nname the day after, his name with a star after it. On the\\nfollowing day, I suggested to him while he was asleep,\\nWhen you wake up, you will write, I will go to M. Lie-\\nbault while you are away, and you will sign it, but you will\\nmake a mistake. Instead of signing your name X you\\nwill sign mine, Bernheim, then you will see you have made\\na mistake, and you will rub out mine and put yours", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0160.jp2"}, "161": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 153\\ninstead. This he did when he woke up, and seemed very\\nmuch puzzled by his error. He made excuses to me, but\\ndid not suspect that the responsibihty of the mistake did\\nnot rest with him, and that I had suggested it.\\nThe effect of the suggestion of post-hypnotic acts is not\\nabsolutely inevitable. Some patients resist them. The\\ndesire to carry out the act no doubt is more or less\\nimperative, but they resist it to a certain extent.\\nThe following case shows the struggle and hesitation\\nbefore obeying the idea which- were manifested in the\\npatient until the suggestion finally got the upper hand.\\nA young hysterical girl was brought to the Medical\\nSociety, at Nancy, by M. Dumont. She was hypnotized\\nand was ordered, when she woke, to take the glass cylinder\\noff the gas-burner, over the table, and put it in her pocket\\nand take it away when she went. After she was waked,\\nshe turned timidly toward the table, and seemed confused\\nto find everyone looking at her. Then, after some hesita-\\ntion, she cHmbed upon her knees on the table. She kneeled\\nthere about two minutes, apparently ashamed of her posi-\\ntion, looked alternately at the people around her and at the\\nobject which she had to carry away, put out her hand, and\\nthen, drew it back. Then, suddenly taking off the cylinder,\\nshe put it in her pocket and hurried away. She would not\\nconsent to give it up until she had left the room.\\nIt is strange that suggested actions may be carried out\\nnot only during the time immediately following the sleep,\\nbut after a greater or less interval. If a somnambulist is\\nmade to promise during his sleep that he will come back\\non such and such a day, at such and such an hour, he will\\nalmost surely return on the day and at the hour, although\\nhe has no remembrance of his promise when he wakes up.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0161.jp2"}, "162": {"fulltext": "154 HYPNOTISM.\\nProfessor Bernheim cites a case where he made his\\nsubject say he would come back to him in thirteen days, at\\nten o clock in the morning. The subject remembered\\nnothing when he waked. On the thirteenth day at ten\\no clock in the morning, he appeared, having come three\\nkilometres from his house to the hospital. He had been\\nworking at the foundries all night, went to bed at six in the\\nmorning, and woke up at nine with the idea that he had to\\ncome to the hospital to see me. He told me that he had\\nno such idea on the preceding days, and did not know that\\nhe had to come to see me. It came into his head just at\\nthe time when he ought to carry it out.\\nThus, a suggestion given during sleep may be dormant\\nin the brain, and may not come to consciousness until the\\ntime previously fixed upon for its appearance. Further\\nresearch is necessary to explain this curious psychological\\nfact, and to determine how long a hypnotic suggestion\\nmay thus remain latent. It goes without saying that all\\nsomnambulists are not susceptible to suggestions which\\ntake eftect after a long interval of time.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0162.jp2"}, "163": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM, 155\\nCHAPTER X.\\nHYPNOTISM.\\nSomnambulism Arousing Latent Memories, after Waking from a\\nSomnambulistic Sleep The use of Tobacco Cured Curing\\nDrunkenness The Curing of the Morphia Mania The dangers\\nof Hypnotism and Drugs compared.\\nLong ages ago, the word somnambulists was given to\\nthe people who walked in their sleep. The resemblance\\nbetween hypnotism and somnambulism is so great that\\nthe name somnabulism is used for both, or at least that\\nis the definition given by Richet. Hypnotism is called\\nartificial somnambulism, according to Poincelot. Professor\\nBernheim calls somnambulism the seventh degree of hyp-\\nnotism. Dr. Moll, says: There are three stages generally\\ndistinguished in somnambulism.\\nFirst. That In which the sleeper speaks.\\nSecond. That in which he makes all sorts of move-\\nments, but does not leave his chair or bed.\\nThird. That In which he gets up, walks about and\\nperforms the most complicated actions.\\nIn my experience, Dr. Moll adds: the first two\\nstages are found In persons of sanguine temperament who\\nare decidedly not In a pathological condition. It is not yet\\nfinally decided whether the third state appears under", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0163.jp2"}, "164": {"fulltext": "156 HYPNOTISM.\\npathological conditions only. From my own experience I\\nam inclined to think that it is occasionally observed when\\nthere is no constitutional weakness, especially in children.\\nIf we want to show these states we can do it with the\\nhealthiest subjects.\\nDr. Bernheim says That the functions of relationship,\\nwhich are unconscious or at least but slightly conscious,\\ngrow more active. The tactile, acoustic and muscular\\nsenses are gradually aroused. This is known as passive\\nsomnamhilistic automatism. The subject continues any\\nmovement communicated to his limbs {motor inertia),\\ncarries out any acts in relation with the sensory or sensorial\\nimpression {motor suggestion), reproduces articulate sounds,\\nthe movements which he sees or hears {automatic imitation),\\nand executes orders {automatic obedience).^\\nMemory and the faculties of the imagination are\\naroused in their turn. This is known as active somnambu-\\nlistic automatism. The brain is deprived of spontaneity,\\nand is accessible to dreams, which differ from ordinary\\ndreams, in that the psycho-motor and psycho-sensorial\\nphenomena are of an unconscious character. In this state\\nthere are dreams in which the subject walks about, profes-\\nsional, instinctive, and passionate dreams, dreams in which\\nmemory is revived, intelligent dreams (during which the\\nsubject performs intelligent acts, writes and plays upon\\nthe piano, etc.,) and suggested dreams.\\nThe faculties of co-ordination are imperfectly aroused\\nthe imaginative and instinctive faculties still rule the scene,\\nand have the advantage over the first or reasoning faculties.\\nThis is known as the somnambulistic life. The subject\\nappears to be awake, performs his everyday acts, but his\\nweakened will and exalted imagination leave him suscepti-\\nble to suggestions and obedient to acts commanded.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0164.jp2"}, "165": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 157\\nChambord says: That from all observation, and\\nfrom descriptions of the phenomena, we may deduce the\\nfact, that active somnambulism, implies the most profound\\ninfluence, the most adranced degree of hypnotism, and the\\nmost widely separated from the waking condition. All\\nthe other phenomena, moreover, motor-automatism, motor-\\nsuggestion, automatic imitation and obedience, are found\\nin active somnambulists. The same subject whom we\\nhypnotize daily, often reaches only the stage of motor-\\nautomatism in the first hypnotization it is only through\\nrepeated hypnotizations that he gradually acquires the\\naptitude for carrying out the hallucinations and dreams\\nof suggestion. It is then only that amnesia upon waking\\nexists a proof of more intense psychical modification than\\nthat of the preceding degrees, in which the subject was\\nfully aware of the cause of his catalepsy and retained an\\nexact recollection of it. Moreover, the subjects who only\\nmanifest motor-automatism are not pure automatons they\\nhear and remember what they have heard when they wake\\nthey often reply to questions they try to resist suggestions,\\nand struggle against the attitudes or movements which are\\ncommanded consciousness is not destroyed the will is\\nstill alive, but is powerless against the exaggerated auto-\\nmatic action.\\nEven in active somnambulism, the physical faculties\\nare not destroyed the somnambulistic subject also resists\\ncertain suggestions, and refuses to perform certain acts he\\nreflects before answering certain questions, and carries on\\nactive intellectual work. Moreover, acts, illusions, and\\npost-hypnotic hallucinations commanded during hypnosis,\\nare carried out when the subject wakes, when consciousness\\nand the faculties of co-ordination have certainly resumed", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0165.jp2"}, "166": {"fulltext": "158 HYPNOTISM.\\ntheir control. Finally, the manifestations of these same\\nphenomena in waking condition in a subject who is compos\\nsui, and astonished that he cannot struggle against the\\nautomatism which dominates him, shows clearly that con-\\nsciousness and will may survive all degrees of hypnotism.\\nProfessor Bernheim says again A somnambulist is\\nhypnotized I speak to him I make him speak I make\\nhim work I give him hallucinations J wake him in half an\\nhour or an hour at the most he remembers absolutely\\nnothing of what has passed he will remember nothing\\nspontaneously. Now, nothing is easier than to recall to\\nany somnambulist the memory of all the impressions he has\\nreceived in his sleep, and this experiment succeeds in all\\ncases of somnambulism. In order to do this I have only to\\nsay, You will remember everything that has happened,\\neverything that you have done during your sleep. If neces-\\nsary, I lay my hand on his forehead to concentrate his\\nattention he thinks deeply for an instant, without falling\\nasleep^ and all the latent memories arise with great pre-\\ncision he repeats my words as well as his own, relates his\\nacts, gestures and hallucinations successively nothing is\\nforgotten. I have aroused the latent memories by a simple\\naffirmation.\\nWe see a somnambulist; she goes and comes, obeys\\norders, converses, works, and is entirely conscious. We\\nwould swear that she is awake. After half an hour s\\nactive conversation, I suddenly say, Wake up. She goes\\non talking after she Avakes. She remembers nothing, abso-\\nlutely nothing. It is a singular phenomenon. Everything\\nis faded from the memory. The nervous force which was\\nconcentrated, in certain parts of the brain is now diffused\\nthroughout the light being distributed elsewhere, no longer", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0166.jp2"}, "167": {"fulltext": "Fis:. (4.) Arousing Latent Memories. See Pag^e 158,\\nOriginal Portraltis, Copyrls^ht by M. Young, August, 1899.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0167.jp2"}, "168": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0168.jp2"}, "169": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 159\\nillumines the preceding impressions a new state of con-\\nsciousness exists. I put the somnambulist to sleep again\\nthe old state of nervous concentration re-appears and with\\nit the old state of consciousness, the faded impressions\\nreturn the latent memories revive.\\nIn somnambulism The most remarkable of these\\nacts, says Despine, are those which manifest facial\\nexpression, gestures, and bodily attitudes, imitative acts,\\nwhich are habitually associated with various and indistinct\\nfeelings, and which are carried out by everyone, although\\nthey have never been learned. To these acts also belong\\nthe different inflections which the voice takes under different\\ncircumstances, and the movements of the head which are\\nmade by some musicians when they are playing, as well as\\nby some of their hearers.\\nHate, anger, pride, cunning, admiration, etc., bring\\nabout in all persons who experience them, the same\\nmuscular contractions, and consequently, a similar expres-\\nsion. And this is true, not only of man, but of animals.\\nTheir various acts, accompHshed by the automatic mechan-\\nism of the nervous centres, are so pre-established by law,\\nthat they are found to be always identical in all individuals\\nsubmitted to the same exciting causes.\\nAnother effect of this automatic arrangement is seen\\nin affectation. It is thought that the phenomena which\\nconstitute it are voluntary and studied. This is a mistake.\\nA person is affected in manner in consequence of an exag-\\ngerated facility for following what happens in thought, which\\nthe automatic nervous organs possess. The voice takes the\\nmost varied inflection, according to the slightest changes in\\nthe feelings. The muscles of the face produce the greatest\\nvariety of contractions. The Hmbs and the body move in a", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0169.jp2"}, "170": {"fulltext": "i6o HYPNOTISM:\\nthousand ways. This disposition is observed especially in\\nwomen.\\nSometimes when a patient is in the somnambulistic\\nstate treatment can best be obtained by pursuing a slightly\\nroundabout way.\\nLaurent mentions cases in which persons have been\\nweaned from tobacco, not by direct command, but by\\nsuggesting that the smell of tobacco is very unpleasant,\\nand by suggesting that it was slowly and surely poisoning\\nthem, and that if the patient did not quit using it he would\\ndie. The effect is generally successful.\\nDr. Moll says: In treating patients when in the som-\\nnambulist state for the weaning from the tobacco habits,\\nI have found it an excellent plan to place the hypnotic\\nsubject back into the earlier periods of his life back into\\nthe early stage when the habit of using tobacco was\\nunknown to him, and to tell him that he must never touch\\nthe tobacco again that he must not smoke or chew^ .or\\ndo any of those things that he did not do when a boy.\\nI would suggest to him that tobacco was harmful to a\\ngreat degree; that he could never be well and use it.\\nIf you can get the patient to promise that he will not\\nuse it again, he will not. Promises made when in the\\nhypnotized state are seldom broken. It is often difficult to\\nget the subject to promise anything, but when successful,\\nthe cure is assured.\\nAgain, in many cases It is necessary to hypnotize a\\npatient many times before he is really cured of the tobacco\\nhabit. The success, often depends on the patient s own\\ndesire. If the subject be determined to smoke when he\\nis in his normal condition, it is almost impossible to cure\\nhim by hypnotic treatment. On the other hand, if he", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0170.jp2"}, "171": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM, i6i\\nwishes to be cured, and has faith In the operation, the cure\\nis sure.\\nImagination Is a potent factor In both the formation and\\ncure of many vile practises. I have seen a few cases of\\nvery severe suffering in consequence of the sudden aban-\\ndonment of tobacco, but, if the sufferer, will again be\\nhypnotized, the pain by suggestion can be, and Is nearly\\nalways relieved If not cured. The operator wants to be firm,\\nwhen the patient is in the somnambulistic state, and repeat\\ntwo or three times You surely will be out of pain when\\nyou waken. You will not want to smoke the smell\\nof tobacco will make you sick again you do not Hke\\ntobacco it Is very nasty you will be well, when you\\nwaken, and will not be sick again for the want of tobacco\\nonly sick If you take it. It is well to look steadily at the\\nsubject while speaking, and either hold his hand in yours,\\nor place your hand on his head. It is seldom necessary to\\nhave to hypnotize a patient more than two or three times\\nto cure him of the tobacco habit.\\nIt seems that hypnotism promises a great deal to those\\nwho suffer from terrible habits. Oedmann says, that he has\\nhad good effects with suggestion, in curing alcoholism.\\nSuggestive somnambulism has cured when every other\\nknown remedy has failed.\\nIn cases of drunkenness, much depends on the length\\nof time of each spree, and the number of years the\\nhabit has been inbedded In the mind or brain of the\\npatient, also the physical condition of the patient, at the\\ntime the experiment of hypnotic sleep is tried. The better\\nthe health, the speedier the cure In most cases.\\nHypnotism does not necessarily succeed at once. If the\\nhypnosis is deep and the somnambulistic state is the result,", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0171.jp2"}, "172": {"fulltext": "1 62 HYPNOTISM,\\ngood effects may be very quickly obtained in other cases,\\npatience and method are wanted, and all the difficulties\\ntaken into consideration. The more the idea of drink\\nhas taken root, the more difficult it is to overcome.\\nDr. Liebault and Dr. Liegeoir were only able to cure one\\npatient, after sixty treatments of hypnotism, of which each\\nlasted over half an hour. Dr. Moll, in speaking of the\\nabove case, says Why hypnotism should be measured by\\na different standard than other methods of treatment is\\ninexplicable to me. A doctor is often satisfied to obtain a\\nresult after weeks or months of electro-therapeutic treat-\\nment, and how often, after months of perseverance, it fails\\nto appear. Why, then, should we expect suggestive\\ntherapeutics to succeed in one day? Patience on the\\nside of both doctor and patient is often required in all\\ntreatments.\\nMany authors, and especially Kroepelin, have of late\\nyears advocated the use of hypnosis in alcoholism. Corval\\npoints out that in alcoholism any injurious effect of abstin-\\nence can thus be avoided, by simply suggesting that all\\ndesire and taste for liquor shall disappear. The operator\\nwhen addressing the subject must be sure to speak firmly\\nand to say something like this Pay close attention to\\nme. Remember, when you waken, you will not drink or\\ntaste any wine or liquor. Remember, not for three days\\nand three nights, and then come back to me. The post-\\nhypnotic suggestion is a wonderful help in such cases, and\\nafter two or three hypnosis the subject can be told not to\\ncome back for three weeks, then three months, and finally\\nnot to come any more.\\nBerillon and Tanzistrand and others are in favor of this\\ngradual method of curing. Berillon and Jennings hold that", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0172.jp2"}, "173": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 163\\nauto-suggestion Is a great factor in producing the difficulty\\nof treating both alcoholism and morphinism, the auto-\\nsuggestion that he cannot do without drink or morphia\\nleading the patient to desist from treatment. The following\\ncase is one given by Dr. Cocke, and we consider it very\\ninteresting.\\nThe patient was a mechanic, well-developed physi-\\ncally, forty-three years old, married, and had three healthy\\nchildren. No organic disease could be detected about him.\\nEvery three months, regularly, he would have a spree\\nlasting two weeks. He explained to me that he had no\\nphysical desire for liquor, but had a mental impulse to\\ndrink which became a fixed idea, and was impossible for\\nhim to resist. This idea usually possessed him about four\\ndays before he yielded to it. I told him to come to me as\\nsoon as the idea came upon him. This he did. He was put\\ninto a somnambulistic state, and in a firm manner told that\\nthe idea would vanish. It did not. He told me honestly\\nthe evening after he had been hypnotized that the impulse\\nwas growing upon him, and he feared that he must yield.\\nAgain he v/as hypnotized, and the sleep was very profound.\\nIn a stern, firm manner he was told to remember that he\\nwas a man, with a firm will, and that he must resist the\\ndesire. That he must not drink. That whiskey would\\nmake him sick, and that when he awoke the first thing for\\nhim to do was to walk six times up and down before a\\nliquor store and not to go in. And that the thought\\nof whiskey would make him ill. As soon as he was aroused\\nfrom the hypnotic sleep he did as he was told. He was\\nwatched by his brother, who did not drink. He wrote me\\nnext day that the desire for drink was entirely gone. At\\nthe end of the following three months he again consulted", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0173.jp2"}, "174": {"fulltext": "1 64 HYPNOTISM.\\nme, stating that the idea was haunting him but not quite to\\nsuch an extent as previously. One hypnotic treatment was\\nsufficient to dispel it. At the end of the following nine\\nmonths he again returned, stating he had drank a glass\\nof whiskey with a friend, and that the old idea liad\\nreturned. He was hypnotized, and since then, a period\\nof three years, he has had no desire for drink.\\nIt is always well when making suggestions to som-\\nnambulistic subjects, on so important a matter as drinking,\\nsmoking, etc., to place your hand on the back of theirs,\\nand to look steadily at them when making the command\\nor suggestion. Professor Bernheim says It is always\\nnecessary to ha\\\\ e deep sleep for manifestation of a rapid\\naction; simple dullness is sufficient in some cases; but\\nrarely can disease or habit be relieved or cured unless th^\\npatient becomes somnambulistic with no remembrance\\nof anything upon waking but what you tell him to remem-\\nber. He will be eminently suggestible. For example, a\\nman comes to me to be cured of the morphio-mania. The\\npatient is put to sleep by means of suggestion^ that is, by\\nmaking the idea of sleep penetrate his mind. He is treated\\nby means of suggestion^ that is, by making the idea of cure\\npenetrate his brain, and remain there. I affirm in a low\\nfirm voice, You are asleep, and you must sleep deep yo\\\\i\\nmust think well of what I say. When you wake, you must\\nremember all I say. Will you? Repeat over and over,\\nWill you? At last the patient mdiy promise. If he does,\\nyou have gained much toward curing him. If he will not\\nspeak, I put my hand on his forehead, and continue\\nWhen you wake, you will not want any morphine you\\nwill not like it it will make you sick. I then hold his\\neyelids closed, in silence, a moment or two, then hardly", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0174.jp2"}, "175": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 165\\nabove a whisper, I continue, Remember all I say when\\nyou wake. You will not want any opium, in any way\\nyou will have no pain. The desire will not come back any\\nmore. In order to increase the force of the suggestion by\\nembodying it, so to speak, in a material sense, following\\nM. Liebault s example, I suggest a feeling of warmth, loco\\ndolenti. In about twenty minutes, I wake the patient. In\\nsome cases, the patient is hypnotized twice in others,\\nmany many times before the desire entirely disappears.\\nIt is in somna7nbulisni that suggestion reaches its max-\\nimum efficiency, and that cures are often instantaneous and\\nseem miraculous. Certain subjects resist for many treat-\\nments they only fall into somnolence the effect obtained\\nis slight or doubtful. By persevering for a longer or shorter\\ntime, several days or even several weeks, with hypnotiza-\\ntions which give but little result, some subjects can at last,\\nbe put into a deeper sleep, and then the therapeutic action\\nof suggestion may be rapid and lasting.\\nThe mode of suggestion should also be varied and\\nadapted to the special suggestibility of the subject. A\\nsimple word does not always suffice in impressing the idea\\nupon the mind. It is sometimes necessary to reason, to\\nprove, to convince, in some cases to affirm decidedly in\\nothers to insinuate gently for in the condition of hypnosis,\\njust as in the waking condition, the moral indlvIduaHty\\nof each subject persists according to his character, his\\ninclination, his special impressionability, etc. Hypnosis\\ndoes not run all Its subjects into a uniform mould, and\\nmake pure and simple automatons out of them moved\\nsolely by the will of the operator; it increases the cerebral\\ndocility it makes the automatic activity preponderate over\\nthe will. But the latter persists to a certain degree, the", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0175.jp2"}, "176": {"fulltext": "166 HYPNOTISM.\\nsubject thinks, reasons, discusses, accepts more readily than\\nin the waking condition, but does not always accept,\\nespecially in the light degrees of sleep. In these cases we\\nmust know the patient s character, his particular psychical\\ncondition, in order to make an impression on him.\\nMany people are afraid of hypnotism, but without\\ncause. While hypnosis may not be absolutely safe, still\\nit is not absolutely dangerous. The dangers of hypnotizing\\nis somewhat exaggerated. In the hands of a thorough\\noperator, whether a doctor or not, there is no harm in fact,\\none could not do the harm to a patient with hypnotism,\\nthat he could with drugs. Much more knowledge is neces-\\nsary in handling medicine than in handling hypnotism.\\nDr. Moll, says It is never asked if a remedy might\\nnot be dangerous we only ask if we cannot avoid the\\ndanger by careful and scientific use of it. Rust asserts, in\\nspeaking of artificial somnambulism The best assertion\\nthat can be made about a remedy or method of cure, is\\nthat it might also do damage for what can never do posi-\\ntive harni can never do positive good. This assertion is\\nto a great degree justifiable, though perhaps exaggerated\\nfor I think I may say that there are few remedies in medi-\\ncine which would not injure if carelessly and ignorantly\\nused. There are even medicines which may injure, how-\\never carefully used, because we do not know exactly under\\nwhat conditions they become hurtful. I need not speak of\\nmorphia, strychnine, and bella-donna, which have some-\\ntimes done injury even when the maximum dose was not\\nsurpassed, nor of the deaths from chloroform, the reason\\nof which has not been explained. Thiem and P. Fischer,\\nwith praiseworthy scientific frankness, have quite recently\\npublished a case of the fatal after-effects of chloroform;", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0176.jp2"}, "177": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 167\\ndeath followed on the fourth day. These authors say that\\nthere is at least one death for every thousand administra-\\ntions of chloroform. Neither will I speak of the dangers\\nof surgical operations. I need only point out that an appar-\\nently harmless medicine may have, very likely, already done\\nmore mischief than hypnotism. Many deaths have resulted\\nfrom the use of potassium chloride, and unfortunately this\\ndrug can still be bought in retail without a medical pre-\\nscription. Severe collapse has been observed after the use\\nof antipyrine sulfonal \u00e2\u0080\u0094which is supposed to be a perfectly\\nharmless hypnotic drug. A friend and colleague has told\\nme that he has seen sad consequences follow from its use,\\nand that there were some patients to whom he never gave\\nit, for fear this harmless drug would work great mischief\\nAnd again, as to Mendel s treatment by suspension, which\\na few years ago became almost a fashion, and from which\\ncertain enthusiasts really expected the cure of locomotor\\nataxia. It is now certain that it may cause great injury, or\\neven death. Many published reports show that even the\\npresence of a doctor does not prevent evil consequences.\\nBillroth has pointed out great dangers from carbolic acid,\\nwhich is constantly used. \\\\i we give up the use of these\\nremedies, we might give up medicine altogether, as every-\\nthing employed may do harm.\\nThe above is in favor of hypnotism. The future will\\ndecide the fate of hypnotism, but nearly all the men who\\npaint the harm of or dangers of hypnotism (Gilles de\\nla Tourette, Ewald, Mendel, Rieger, Binswagor), and are\\nin general against it, by no means refrain from using hyp-\\nnotizing sleep. By this they allow that it is not hypnotism\\nitself, but its misuse, which is mischievous,", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0177.jp2"}, "178": {"fulltext": "1 68 HYPNOTISM,\\nCHAPTER XI.\\nHYPNOTISM.\\nThe Phenomena of Hypnotism Why Hypnosis is different in\\ndifferent subjects Proof that such a Science as Hypnotism\\nexists Rapport Double Consciousness Max Dessoir Theory\\nH. Bernheim Theory.\\nTruth is never dangerous; ignorance alone is dis-\\narmed, says Professor Bernheim.\\nCharles Richet, relating analogous examples has de-\\nscribed this singular psychical state. Many imagine that\\nthey have not been influenced, because they have heard\\neverything They believe in good faith that they have\\nbeen pretending. It is sometimes difficult to show them\\nthat they were not able to pretend.\\nInduced somnambulism is manifested in extreme\\ncases those in which the act suggested forces itself with an\\nirresistible sway. But nothing happens in the profound\\nsleep which has not its analogy, its diminutive, if I may so\\nexpress it, in the waking condition. Sleep exaggerates\\nphysiological automatism, it does not create it. Between\\nthe fatal suggestion and the absolutely voluntary determina-\\ntion, all degrees may exist. And who can analyze all the\\nsuggested elements which, unknown to us, come into the\\nactions we believe to be of our own initiative.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0178.jp2"}, "179": {"fulltext": "METHOD USED IN CURING THE MORPHINE HABIT.\\nSee Page 164.\\nQriginal Portraits. Copyright by M. Toung, Aug. 1 899.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0179.jp2"}, "180": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0180.jp2"}, "181": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 169\\nYou speak of universal hallucination. It existed, when\\nit was not known, when no one suspected the singular\\nfacility with which artificial hallucination could be realized.\\nIt existed when a naive faith in sorcery blinded the best\\nminds, as if implanted in the human brain by suggestion\\nwhen meetings of witches, sorcery, nightmares, malicious\\nspirits, and all phantoms evoked by the imagination were\\nconsidered as realities, when trembling science did not dare\\nin face of the funeral pile, to beard all-powerful religious\\nsuperstition. What crimes, what catastrophes, what judicial\\nerrors might have been spared poor humanity if scientific\\ntruth had been able to show itself! The history of the devil,\\nof witchcraft, of evil possessions, the history of demoniacal\\nepidemics, these collective suggested hallucinations weigh\\nlike a frightful nightmare upon the centuries which precede\\nour own, and in our day still, what superstitions suggested\\nby the binding of a coarse faith will disappear like shadows\\nunder the torch of scientific truth\\nOne can do well, by meditating upon these words\\nof Bacon s, The human mind does not sincerely receive\\nthe light thrown upon things, but mixes therewith its own\\nwill and passions thus, it makes a science to its taste\\nfor the truth that man most willingly receives, is the one he\\ndesires.\\nThe following remarks were made by Ralph H. Vin-\\ncent, and we consider them the best that we can find,\\npertaining to the subject now under discussion\\nThe characteristic features of hypnosis is the pres-\\nence of a condition in which a suggestion causes a reaction\\nof the central nervous system definitely corresponding with\\nthe nature of the suggestion.\\nThe alterations of the ordinary functions of the body", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0181.jp2"}, "182": {"fulltext": "I70 HYPNOTISM.\\nduring hypnosis vary in their degree and number, in\\naccordance with the method of hypnotization. Some sub-\\njects are able to move with perfect ease and freedom thus,\\nthey will brush a fly off the face with the hand, or change\\ntheir position when one posture becomes wearying. Others\\npresent all the appearances of being in a heavy sleep. The\\nbreathing is slower and deeper than in the normal condition,\\nthe inspirations being full and prolonged the pulse is\\nsomewhat slower, but increased in fullness and strength.\\nAt the moment when the subject passes into hypnosis,\\nthere is always more or less marked, a deep inspiration\\nof peculiar quality.\\nThe general condition of the subject when hypnosis has\\nbeen induced is one of acute passivity. The position which\\nthe patient has taken up may remain the same down to the\\nsmallest detail for the space of half an hour or more the\\nfingers, clasped or open, will so remain. The subject can\\nhear perfectly well but the most amusing story may be\\ntold to others in the room without provoking the slightest\\nreaction in him. The normal irritability of the nervous\\nsystem has disappeared in a striking manner.\\nThe eyes and the mouth often show striking symp-\\ntoms of the onset of hypnosis. The closing of the eyes is\\ngenerally preceded by a marked quivering of the eyelids,\\nand their vibrations are often maintained for some time after\\nthe eyes are closed.\\nIt is not always necessary that the eyes should be\\nclosed for a person to be hypnotized, though this is gen-\\nerally the case, and in many instances to open the eyes\\nwould awaken the subject.\\nWhen the method of fascination is used, the eyes\\nmay remain wide open the whole time. In the deepest", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0182.jp2"}, "183": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 171\\nhypnosis, it is frequently found that the eyes are not quite\\nclosed, but that there is a slight opening left, through which\\nthe eyeball can be seen. Sometimes, as the eyes close, the\\neyeball turns upwards, and remains in this position till the\\nsubject is awakened at other times it is found that the\\neyeball returns to its natural position when the eyes are\\nclosed. In any but the lightest stages of hypnosis all mus-\\ncular movements can be prevented or induced by means\\nof suggestion. Thus, the statement, You cannot open your\\nmouth, or You cannot bend your arm, is sufficient to\\nprevent the action being performed.\\nA subject in response to the proper suggestion will be\\nable to say some definite word, but in all other respects\\nwill be absolutely dumb. He will be able to write, play\\nthe piano, sew, but quite unable to hold in his hand some\\nsmall given object.\\nBy means of suggestion it is possible to compel the\\nsubject to cough, sneeze, laugh, weep, etc., etc. In the\\ncase of those subjects who are in a deep stage, a series\\nof movements will be performed by them if they be so\\ndirected.\\nIt is important to note that while suggestion may be\\nmade verbally to the patient, it is by no means necessary\\nthat words should be used. All that is requisite is that the\\nsubject should clearly understand what it is that is desired\\nof him. The organs of sense and perception are all chan-\\nnels for the conveyance of any suggestion made to the\\nsubject. It is found for instance that some action on the\\npart of the hypnotist will tend to bring the suggestion more\\nvividly before the mind of the patient.\\nThis fact led many to suppose that the physical\\naction of the operator had some intrinsic value. Such is.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0183.jp2"}, "184": {"fulltext": "172 HYPNOTISM.\\nhowever, not the case its only value lies in Its power\\nof intensifying the impression which it is desired to create.\\nIn the deeper stages the memory is lost, miless after\\nawakening him, some hint be given to the subject this\\nmay serve to bring the whole chain of events to his recol-\\nlection. In the deepest states memory is entirely lost, the\\nsubject fails altogether to remember any event of the\\nhypnotic sleep, and when anything he may have said or\\ndone under hypnosis is pointed out to him he manifests the\\ngreatest surprise. A very important fact to be noticed is\\nthat if the subject be hypnotized a second time he will\\nremember all the events of the previous hypnosis, and thus\\na deep hypnotic subject may be said to lead two distinct\\nlives the hypnotic in which he remembers all the sugges-\\ntions which have been made, and the events which have\\ntaken place during previous hypnosis, and the waking\\nin which he has no recollection or knowledge of these\\nevents.\\nThe hypnotic memory is an element which the exper-\\nimenter has to carefully guard against, lest he be led\\ninto many errors by neglecting the necessary precautions.\\nIf, for instance, the operator has been in the habit of con-\\nnecting some particular touch or pass with the verbal\\nsuggestion of an act, he will find that owing to the memory\\nof the subject connecting the touch or pass with the verbal\\nsuggestion, he can dispense with speech, and rely solely on\\nthe touch for the production of the desired effect. This\\nexplains many of the performances of magnetizers who\\nhave learned in the same way to omit verbal suggestion,\\nand thus add to the mystery of the performance.\\nLoss of memory can be induced, and the recollec-\\ntion of any period of the subject s life may be completely", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0184.jp2"}, "185": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 173\\ndestroyed. The subject can be made to forget his own\\nname, age, where he Hves, or what is his occupation.\\nAccording to Forel and to Frayick, it is possible to cause a\\nsubject to forget entirely a language he has learned.\\nAny suggestion that takes effect in hypnosis will also\\ntake effect post-hypnotically, provided the hypnosis be\\nsufficiently deep to admit of post-hypnotic suggestion being\\nexecuted. Dreams can be suggested, and sleep free from\\ndreams. The suggestion carried on from hypnosis into the\\nnormal state is called a continuative suggestion as for\\ninstance, when a subject is given toothache in the hyp-\\nnotic state, and is told that he will still suffer from it\\nwhen he awakes.\\nIt is not necessary to its success that the suggestion\\nshould take immediate effect. Let it be said to a subject,\\nWhen you come to see me this day fortnight, you will\\nnot be able to speak to me and on that day he is quite\\nunable to utter a word.\\nThere are innumerable forms of such deferred sugges-\\ntion. It must be noted, however, that some forms will not\\nalways succeed with certain subjects. Thus, he is told,\\nat four o clock, that when the clock strikes five he will find\\nthat he is at a concert and will go to the piano and sing.\\nImmediately the suggestion is given he is awakened, and\\nhe will talk and conduct himself quite naturally, and will\\nnot have the least idea that any such suggestion has been\\nmade to him only as soon as the clock strikes five, he\\nwill get up, and seating himself at the piano, he will begin\\nto sing.\\nIn this case the precise time for the carrying out\\nof the suggestion is fixed by an external sign, and these\\nsuggestions nearly always succeed. If, however, we do not", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0185.jp2"}, "186": {"fulltext": "174 HYPNOTISM.\\nname any such concrete sign, butrely on something else\\nless definite such as a period of time the results are more\\nuncertain. The suggestion is made to a subject that in an\\nhour s time he will get up and dance, some will carry out\\nthe suggestion very punctually, others will dance, but they\\nwill begin a quarter of an hour too soon, or (very rarely) a\\nlittle late. With many the suggestion will altogether fail\\nowing to its want of definiteness.\\nAnother means of deciding the moment for the\\nexecution of a post-hypnotic suggestion is the following\\nThe hypnotist says to the subject, When I get up and\\nopen the window you will immediately become very\\nangry. He is then awakened, and converses amicably\\nenough till the window is opened, when he at once begins\\nto look seriously annoyed. Asked what he is angry about\\nhe says that to open the window was a very ridiculous\\nidea did we not know that he positively objected to\\ndraughts every one in the room must certainly feel very\\nchilly, etc.\\nThe suggestion may be made more subtle if the\\nsubject be told to laugh, .when the hypnotist for, say the\\ntenth time, taps his hand on the table.\\nAs they talk together, the hypnotist unconcernedly\\ntaps the table with his fingers at the tenth tap, the subject\\nlaughs. Frequently, though the execution of the sugges-\\ntion will not be so precise, but will happen a little before or\\nafter the exact moment.\\nThe question naturally arises, What is the precise\\ncondition of the subject during the action of the post-\\nhypnotic suggestion\\nThis is not capable of a very simple answer, because\\nthe state varies with the person hypnotized, and it is neces-", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0186.jp2"}, "187": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 175\\nsary to clearly understand the nature of these conditions\\nbefore any explanation is possible.\\nIt will be seen from the above examples that the\\nnature of the post-hypnotic states varies greatly, and this\\nvariation is dependent on the individuality of the subject.\\nIn the writer s experience, the first stage of post-hypnosis,\\nnamely, that stage in which the subject is normal in every\\nrespect save in the performance of the suggestion, is the\\nmost frequent, and the other stages are placed in the order\\nof their frequency.\\nIn all hallucinations of personality, the person hyp-\\ntized will always live up to the character as far as his\\nknowledge will allow. It is quite possible to make the\\nthe subject believe he is some inanimate object, such as\\na chair, a carpet, a piece of window glass.\\nThe sense of hearing is frequently increased to an\\nenormous extent by suggestion under hypnosis. A subject\\nwho could in the normal state only hear the ticking of a\\nwatch at a less distance than four feet, could by hypnotic\\nsuggestion hear it twelve feet away, and through a closed\\ndoor.\\nAn experiment which the writer frequently performed\\nat Oxford is the following:\u00e2\u0080\u0094 A number of persons each\\ntake in their hands some small object such as a penknife, a\\npencil case, a coin, a key, c. While the hypnotized\\nsubject is still out of the room these articles are placed on\\nthe table, and the subject is brought into the room. He\\ntakes up the first object, smells it, and then smells the\\nhands of the various persons till he comes to the owner\\nof the article, when he leaves it in his or her own hand, and\\nso on until he has settled the ownership of all the articles\\nplaced on the table.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0187.jp2"}, "188": {"fulltext": "176 HYPNOTISM.\\nAnother evidence of this increase of faculty was given\\nwhen the writer went, while the subject was out of the room,\\nto some book shelves and touched his finger to the backs\\nof several books. The subject, on returning into the room,\\nsmelled the two fingers, and going to the shelves pulled\\nout the very identical books which had been touched.\\nIn all the deep states of hypnosis, complete anaes-\\nthesia can be produced. The most powerful electric current\\ncan be administered without the patient evincing the\\nleast sign of discomfort. Teeth may be extracted or\\nfilled, and many surgical operations performed, without\\ncausing any pain to the subject. The fact that this\\nanaesthesia can be produced in all the deep hypnosis,\\nprovides the experimenter with a ready means of demon-\\nstrating that there is no simulation on the part of the\\nsubject.\\nThe pulse, respiration and temperature, are capable\\nof great modification by means of suggestion. Kraft-\\nEbling suggested to a patient that he was in a bath, and\\nimmediately the patient was covered with goose flesh\\nby this means, the suggestion made him cold. In a\\nsecond after he was told that it was very hot, ninety in\\nthe shade, and he began to melt till he finally sank to\\nthe ground in a mass as ridiculous as he could assume.\\nVery often an illusion given will result in what is\\ntermed auto-suggestion, for instance, a person hypno-\\ntized early in the afternoon is awakened in five minutes\\nwith the idea that it is seven in the evening. He says\\nhe feels hungry and wants his dinner.\\nThe following instance of a frequent phenomenon in\\npost-hypnotic suggestion is notable. The writer suggested\\nto a lady that when she awoke she would find that the", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0188.jp2"}, "189": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 177\\nfloor was covered with tacks, and that she had no shoes\\non. Immediately on waking, she huddled herself up in\\nthe chair, and drew her feet off the floor. When asked\\nthe reason, she said there was something sharp, and on\\nbeing further pressed as to what It was, she said, pins\\nthis variation, slight in itself, is an Illustration of the nature\\nof the action of the hypnotic suggestion the word tack\\nwas lost, but the essential idea of the suggestion was in\\naction. Binet and Fere point out that hypnotic hallucina-\\ntion has always the appearance of a spontaneous symptom.\\nOn awaking, the subject obediently performs the act which\\nhe was ordered to do during the hypnotic sleep, but he\\ndoes not remember who gave him the order, nor even\\nthat it was given at all. If asked why he is performing\\nthe act, he usually replies that he does not know, or that\\nthe idea has come into his head. He generally supposes\\nIt to be a spontaneous act, and sometimes he even Invents\\nreasons to explain his conduct.\\nAll this shows that the memory of the suggestion, so far\\nas respects Its utterance Is completely effaced.\\nSome of the results of the phenomena of hypnosis may\\nleem so startHng that we can quite understand their being\\neceived by some with a certain degree of suspicion and\\nindeed, in all such matters, the more scientific mind will\\nnaturally demand to at any rate see phenomena before\\nthey yield them absolute credence however It Is not our\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0jresent duty to convince any one, but only to record the\\n.ct.\\nCan the phenomena of hypnosis be explained? Is a\\nquestion often asked. In answering, l^r, Moll says, We\\nhave been able to connect many every-day occurrences\\nwith hypnosis, and have found many more connecting links", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0189.jp2"}, "190": {"fulltext": "1 78 HYPNOTISM.\\nwith normal life than is generally supposed. I even believe\\nthat we can explain certain hypnotic phenomena by means\\nof analog-y, and I think that many of the post-hypnotic\\nphenomena are capable of explanation in the above mean-\\ning of the word.\\nWe shall understand the different symptoms of hypnosis\\nmuch more easily if we first examine two phenomena. Let\\nus begin by considering the first point. There are people\\nwho believe they can escape external psychical influences,\\nbut they are wrong since observation shows that every\\none is more or less influenced by ideas. Bentivegni and\\nBernheim both believe that life is full of such influences, and\\nthey will work so long as there is mental activity in man.\\nIn the same way men have a tendency to believe things\\nwithout complete logical proof we will call this quality\\ncreduhty. Those who contend that men are not credulous,\\nshow that they are themselves incapable of reflection, says\\nForel. A few years ago it was believed that there was no\\nsuch thing as hypnotism, and that those who believed in it\\nwere deceived. But since that time opinion has entirely\\nchanged. The representations made by different people in\\nauthority as to the reality of the hypnotic phenomena, and\\nparticularly the repeated asssertions of numerous investiga-\\ntors, has caused a complete change of view.\\nThe second point in view, is that an effect on himself,\\nwhich a man expects, tends to appear. We can find a\\ngreat number of these phenomena in ordinary life they\\nare mysterious and astonishing only when we neglect to\\nconsider this tendency. Hack Tuke, and many other\\ninvestigators have beside admitted that these phenomena\\nare of great importance. I will now describe some of\\nthem", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0190.jp2"}, "191": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 179\\nDr. Moll says: People who suffer from sleepless-\\nness have often been sent to sleep by taking something\\nwhich they were told was a sleeping draught, but which\\nwas really some inert substance. They slept because\\nthey expected to. A great many people wish for sleep,\\nbut as they do not expect it, it does not come.\\nForel, says We will take a case of hysterical\\nparalysis it is well known that such a paralysis is some-\\ntimes cured at the exact moment the patient expects.\\nMany mysterious effects may be thus explained.\\nAccording to Noizet and Bertrand, who have been\\njoined lately by Liebault, Bernheim, Forel and others,\\nrapport is a state of sleep in which the attention of the\\nsubject is fixed exclusively upon the hypnotizer, so that\\nthe idea of him is constantly present in the subject s\\nmemory. On this account, Bertrand compared these pro-\\ncesses to the falling asleep of a mother by her child s\\ncradle. She continues to watch over it in sleep she\\nhears the least sound it makes, but no other sounds.\\nThis analogy may explain the peculiar influence which a\\nhypnotizer has over his subject. The subject has fallen\\nasleep with the thought of the hypnotizer in his mind,\\nand hears only what he says, as in the case of the mother\\nand child.\\nIf I tell a working man, who has a chair in front\\nof him, there is nothing there, neither chair nor table\\nhe will see the chair in spite of what I say but the\\nhypnotic subject will not see it, at least if he is suscep-\\ntible to negative hallucination. Now, we can regard this\\nprocess in the hypnotic as a diversion of the attention,\\nlike that in the waking man who fails to perceive things\\nwhich stimulate his organ 01 sense.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0191.jp2"}, "192": {"fulltext": "i8o HYPNOTISM.\\nAccording to Binet and Fere another factor must be\\nadded to the diversion of the attention, before it can be\\nattained. A conviction that the chair is not there must be\\nfirst estabhshed in the subject. Without this there would\\nhardly be a negative hallucination.\\nDr. Moll says Such a derangement of the memory\\nas sometimes occurs in hypnosis is certainly very striking,\\nthough it is clear at once that we can find many analogies in\\nordinary life. I need not, of course, discuss those hypnotic\\nstates in which there are no derangements of the memory.\\nBut there are persons w^ho after waking from hyp-\\nnosis remember nothing of what has happened. It is also a\\nwell-known fact that we forget certain events apart from\\nhypnosis. We entirely forget certain mechanical actions,\\nsuch as winding of a watch, etc. We study this phenom-\\nenon, and we saw that the subject in hypnosis remembered\\nall the events of preceding hypnosis and of his waking life\\nwe call this ^double co7isciousness.^ This requires special\\nconsideration. It is, indeed, a striking phenomenon that\\ntwo complete and thoroughly separate states of conscious-\\nness can be induced and distinguished in a human being\\nso that in one, the waking life, the events of waking life\\nonly are remembered and in the other, the hypnotic state,\\nthe events of preceding hypnosis and of waking life.\\nMax Dessoir supposes, with Pierre Janet, that human\\npersonality is a unity merely to our consciousness, but\\nthat it consists really of at least two clearly distinguish-\\nable personalities, each held together by its own chain\\nof memories. According to him many actions are done\\nunconsciously, though of mental origin. If, for instance, one\\ncannot recall a name, and purposely refrains from trying to\\ndo so in the hope that it will recur later, these statistics", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0192.jp2"}, "193": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. i8i\\nshow that there Is still very frequently a certain sense\\nof effort. To return to hypnosis, we have now to explain\\nthe state of double consciousness. Max Dessoir thinks\\nthat hypnosis simply exhibits the hidden half of our mental\\nlife, the part which is called secondary consciousness and\\nwhich can occasionally be observed in ordinary life or more\\nplainly, in pathological states, that hypnosis represents\\nexperimentally this part of life. According to Max Des-\\nsoir s theory, the condition of double consciousness is no\\nabsolutely new phenomenon, but only the experimental\\nrepresentation of a definite psychic relationship, such as\\nmay occasionally be observed even in normal persons.\\nWhatever we may think of this theory. Max Dessoir s\\nexplanations are none the less valuable for the consider-\\nation of the double consciousness In hypnosis.\\nBy means of automatic writing It can be proved that\\nthe impressions of hypnosis are really firmly lodged in\\nthe brain Gurney, F. Myers, and Pierre Janet have\\nmade a series of very good experiments on this point.\\nFor example, X Is waked from hypnosis and remembers\\nn thing that has happened but, when he Is ordered to\\nwrite automatically what was said to him, he does it\\ncorrectly. Now, as he could not tell these things, and\\nthey are not to be found In the primary consciousness,\\nthese experiments in automatic writing prove that the\\nImpressions exist all the same. They disclose themselves\\nIn the automatic writing.\\nIt is quite another thing when the sense delusion\\nappears w^Ithout any order or suggestion, which it often\\ndoes, in post-hypnotic actions. For example, I say to\\nsome one In hypnosis, When I cough after you wake,\\nyou will see a pigeon sitting on the table you will be", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0193.jp2"}, "194": {"fulltext": "1 82 HYPNOTISM.\\nthoroughly awake at the time you see it. He is awak-\\nened we talk of many subjects, for half an hour; suddenly\\nI give a slight cough, but go on speaking. He interrupts\\nme, exclaiming, See that pigeon on the table. There\\nis no pigeon there, but it is impossible to make him accept\\na further suggestion. That one point excepted, he was\\nperfectly normal.\\nProfessor Bernheim, says: Some of the subjects\\nwhom we hypnotize fall into a deep sleep with loss of\\nmemory upon waking we call such cases somnambulists.\\nAccording to M. Liebault, one-fifth or one-sixth of all\\nsubjects are somnambulists.\\nAlthough the other patients remember everything\\nthat has happened upon waking, and sometimes imagine\\nthat they have not been asleep, they have been influenced\\nin varying degrees. Suggestive catalepsy, induced con-\\ntracture, automatic movements, the suppression of pain,\\netc., decisively prove the existence of the influence.\\nThe patients in deep sleep with loss of memory\\nupon waking, lie quietly like natural sleep, if left alone.\\nThere is nothing by which to differentiate this induced\\nsleep from natural sleep, except the expression, and that\\ndiflerence cannot be described. The phenomena of sensi-\\nbility, motility, ideation, imagination, illusions, and hal-\\nlucination, do not appear spontaneously, but are brought\\nabout by means of suggestion. The same phenomena\\nmay be induced in these subjects when we put ourselves\\ninto relationship with them, in their natural sleep the\\nsame passive attitude of the limbs known as catalepsy, the\\nsame automatic movement, the same illusions, the same\\nactive or passive hallucination. Hallucinations are only\\nsuggested dreams dreams are only spontaneous hallucina-", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0194.jp2"}, "195": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. I \u00c2\u00a73\\ntlons. Whether spontaneous or suggested, these hallu-\\ncinations remain passive that is, the subject is motionless\\nas in the normal dreams. They do not become active\\nthat is the subject does not move, does not walk and\\nonly plays an animated part in the hallucination induced,\\nwhen roused from his torpid condition by suggestion.\\nIn like manner, the dreams of spontaneous sleep becomes\\nactive in some cases, and constitute natural somnambu-\\nlism. The fact will bear repetition, and all manifestations\\nrealized in the hypnotic condition maybe realized in natural\\nsleep in the same subject.\\nHypnotic sleep is not a pathological sleep. The hyp-\\nnotic condition is not a neurosis, analogous to hysteria.\\nCatalepsy, transfer, contracture, etc., are the effects of sug-\\ngestion. To, prove that the very great majority of subjects\\nare susceptible to suggestion is to eliminate the idea of a\\nneurosis. The sleep itself is the effect of suggestion.\\nThe Nancy School placed the study of hypnotism upon\\nits true basis, suggestion, and thus created this most useful\\nand fruitful application, an application which has caused\\nthe world to wonder. To M. Li6bault belongs the honor\\nof first introducing the application of suggestion, an honor\\nwhich cannot be denied him.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0195.jp2"}, "196": {"fulltext": "1 84 HYPNOTISM,\\nCHAPTER XII.\\nHYPNOTISM.\\nWhat can be done with Hypnotism The elevated moral tone of\\nSubjects when hypnotized Three rules, never to be forgotten\\nby the operator Can hypnotism be simulated? Professor\\nGregory s views How to waken subjects without harm.\\nI deem it proper to say a few words on one of the\\nbranches of hypnotism, which is now attracting the attention\\nalike of students of the science and the public at large.\\nThe idea is being very generally promulgated among the\\npeople that the ability for one man to hypnotize another\\nimplies the possession of a very dangerous power, and\\none which in the hands of an unscrupulous man, may\\nbe used in doing great harm to his subjects. There need\\nbe no fear on that account, for if a person does not wish\\nto be hypnotized^ he cannot be.\\nIn the first place, by reading over the methods given\\nin this book, it will be seen that it is necessary for every\\nsubject, to gaze at some object while being hypnotized.\\nThat the subject is asked to do and think certain things,\\nso as to place his mind and body in the right state to be\\nhypnotized. It must be remembered that a person who\\ndoes not intend to allow himself to be hypnotized will\\nhardly place himself in the necessary mental state. He", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0196.jp2"}, "197": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 185\\nwill not generally fulfill the conditions and unless he does\\nas desired, he cannot be hypnotized. The only way that\\nwe know a person can be hypnotized against his wishes,\\nis when he is asleep, and it is seldom an operator can\\ngain access to one when asleep.\\nDr. Bernheim says on this subject, No magnetizer\\nexists. No magnetic fluid exists. Neither Donata or Hansen\\nhave any special hypnotic virtues. The induced sleep does\\nnot depend upon the hypnotizer but upon the subject only,\\nit is his ov^xv faith which puts him to sleep. No one can be\\nhypnotised agairist his will, if he resists the commands and\\nconditions. I am very glad to join my word in re-assuring\\nthe pubHc against all chimerical fear which a false interpre-\\ntation of the facts of hypnotism might produce.\\nThis from Professor Bernheim who is an acknowledged\\nauthority by all the scientific world.\\nWe give here the three rules which Dr. Bernheim also\\nsays should never under any consideration be broken. He\\nsays\\nThese rules I bind to myself, and to which all physi-\\ncians and operators should bind to themselves before using\\nhypnotism in any form, in order to protect their conscience\\nand professional honor, as well as the honor of the subjects\\nor patients.\\nFirst: Never hypnotize any subject without his\\nformal consent, or the consent of those in authority over\\nhim.\\nSecond Never induce sleep except in the presence\\nof a third person in authority who can guarantee the good\\nfaith of the hypnotizer, also the subject. Thus any trouble\\nmay be avoided in the event of an accusation, or any\\nsuspicion of an attempt which is not for the relief of the\\nsubject.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0197.jp2"}, "198": {"fulltext": "i86 HYPNOTISM.\\nThird Never give to the hypnotized subject,\\nwithout his consent, any other suggestions than those\\nnecessary for his cure. The physician has no rights but\\nthose conferred upon him by the patient. He should Hmit\\nhimself to the therapeutic suggestion, any other experiment\\nis forbidden him, without the formal consent of the patient,\\neven though it be in the interest of science. The physician\\nshould not profit by his authority over the patient in order\\nto provoke this consent, if he thinks that the experiment\\nwhich he wishes to perform may have the slightest harmful\\neffect.\\nNo operator should hypnotize any one for idle curiosity,\\nor make any suggestions to ariy hypnotized subject for mere\\nexperiments. Every operator should know just what to do\\nwithout making use of new thought in hypnosis on subjects\\nwho have not been hypnotized many times.\\nThousands of experiments are daily being made which\\ndemonstrate the impossibility of controlling the hypnotic\\nsubject so far as to cause him to do that which he believes\\nor knows to be wrong. A common platform experiment is\\nthat of causing subjects to get drunk on water, under the\\nsuggestion that it is whiskey. It frequently happens that\\none or more of the subjects are conscientiously opposed to\\nthe use of strong drink as a beverage. Such persons\\ninvariably declme, in the most emphatic manner, to indulge\\nin the proposed debauch. Like all such expenments on the\\nstage, before a mixed audience, they are passed by as simply\\namusing, and no lesson is learned from them. The intelli-\\ngent student, however, cannot fail to see the far-reaching\\nsignificance of the refusal of a subject to violate his temper-\\nance principles. Again, every platform experimenter knows\\nthat while he can cause a crowd of his subjects to go in", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0198.jp2"}, "199": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 187\\nswimming in imaginary water, he can never induce them\\nto divest themselves of their clothing beyond the limits\\nof decency. Some cannot even be made to take off their\\ncoats in the presence of the audience. Others will decline\\nto accept any suggestion, the pursuance of which would\\ncause them to appear ridiculous.\\nAgain, it is well known to hypnotists that an attempt\\nto contradict or argue with a subject in the hypnotic\\nstate invariably distresses him, and persistency in such a\\ncourse awakens him, often with a nervous shock. A con-\\nflict of suggestions invariably causes confusion in the\\nsubjective mind and generally results in restoring the\\nsubject to normal consciousness. It is always well to\\nremember to speak plainly to a hypnotized subject, using\\nshort sentences, and to the point. Never speak of but\\none topic at a time dismiss one thing before speaking\\nof another.\\nIn fact, it is impossible for a hypnotist to impress a\\nsuggestion so strongly upon a subject as to cause him\\nactually to perform an act in violation of the settled\\nprinciples of his life. If this were not true, suggestion\\nwould mean nothing it would have no place in psycho-\\nlogical science, because it would not be a law of universal\\napplication. The strongest suggestion must prevail.\\nIt has often been said, that many persons simulated\\nhypnosis. A person might be able to do so before people\\nwho knew little about hypnotism, but never before\\noperators who have had much experience. In the first\\nplace, we must notice how the eyes close, and how the\\nsubject tries to open them. This closing of the eyes is\\ndifficult to describe. The gradual falling of the lids is\\nimportant, and the action of the muscles of the forehead", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0199.jp2"}, "200": {"fulltext": "i88 HYPNOTISM.\\nwhen opening the eyes, in a way like that after sleep,\\nas well as the convulsive rolling upwards of the eyeballs,\\nwhich is often seen. The fibrillary twitching of the eye-\\nHds is, on the contrary, of no importance, as it often\\nhappens without hypnosis.\\nDr. Moll says: In cases where the eyes are open\\ntheir expression is most important. The look is often\\nblank and meaningless, the mask-like expression and\\nattitude of the subject are often characteristic also. He\\nmoves his limbs slowly and heavily when commanded.\\nThe expression during sense delusion is also very important.\\nEveryone knows how difficult it is to place oneself in an\\nimaginary situation so that the expression, the attitude,\\nand the actions should correspond to the idea. This is\\nthe great art of actors, and everybody knows how seldom\\nan actor is able to represent a scene by the mere exer-\\ntion of his owm will but it is still more difficult to change\\nthe mood in a moment, and pass from one situation to\\nanother in a few seconds. It is extremely difficult for a\\nperson awake, but the hypnotic subject does it easily.\\nIt is astonishing that outsiders should regard this very\\nability as a sign of fraud, as a competent judge once\\ndid at Vienna (Ferroni). It is surely one of the most\\ndifficult things to do, and it would be wonderful that all\\nthe suspected persons should devote themselves to the\\nthankless part of fraud, when wdth such talents for acting a\\nvery different career would be open to them. The expres-\\nsion of pain, the smiles, the chattering of teeth, and\\nshivering at different suggestions of pain, pleasure, cold,\\netc., would be no easy task to the supposed impostor.\\nThe waking in many cases is just as characteristic;\\nthe astonished face with which the subject looks round.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0200.jp2"}, "201": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 189\\nas if to find out where he Is. His behavior in post-\\nhypnotic suggestion is Hkewise important.\\nThe impostor generally exaggerates, like a person\\npretending madness. In spite of the variability of the\\nsymptoms of hypnotism there is a certain conformity to\\nrule in its development. The impostor usually accepts\\nall suggestions very quickly, while the experienced experi-\\nmenter knows that susceptibility to suggestion increases\\nwith a certain uniformity. It is very easy to simulate\\nanalyesia to slight feelings of pain, as this analyesia is\\nmistakenly thought to be a common symptom. An unex-\\npected suggestion of pain causes the usual reflexes in\\nthe face and eyes, and yet the impostor will declare\\nthat he felt no pain. It is the same with sense delusions,\\nwhere the suggestion generally requires to be emphasized\\nbefore it takes effect. The impostor usually exaggerates\\nhere also.\\nAnyone who understands ever so little about hypnot-\\nism will soon be able to tell the true hypnosis from the\\nmake believe.\\nHypnotic subjects are always endowed with a physical\\nstrength far superior to that possessed in the normal con-\\ndition. Besides, it is the observations of every successful\\nhypnotist that the moral tone of the hypnotic subject,\\nwhile in that condition, is always elevated. On this sub-\\nject, we will let the late Professor Gregory speak\\nWhen the sleeper has become fully asleep, so as to\\nanswer questions readily without waking, there is almost\\nalways observed a remarkable change in the countenance,\\nthe manner, and the voice. On falling asleep at first,\\nhe looks, perhaps, drowsy and heavy, like a person dozing\\nin church, or at table when overcome by fatigue, or by", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0201.jp2"}, "202": {"fulltext": "I go HYPNOTISM.\\nthe foul air of an over-crowded apartment but when\\nspoken to, he usually brightens up, and although the\\neyes be closed, yet the expression becomes highly intel-\\nligent, quite as much so as if he saw. The whole manner\\nseems to undergo a refinement which, in the higher stages,\\nreached a most striking point, insomuch, that we see,\\nas it were, before us a person of a much more elegant\\nand elevated character than the same sleeper seems to\\nbe when awake. It would seem as if the lower, or animal\\npropensities were laid to rest, while the intellect and higher\\nsentiments shone forth with a lustre that is undiminished\\nby aught that is mean or common. In matter of fact, it\\nseems as if the very soul of the sleeper lay bare before\\nyou, as if the earthly part of man were indeed dead, and\\nonly the soul with its everlasting life was conversing and\\nlooking at you, with all the grander and purer thoughts\\nof existence at your command. This is particularly seen\\nin women of natural refinement and high sentiments\\nbut it is also seen in men of the same stamp and more\\nor less in all. In the highest stages of the hypnotic sleep\\nthe countenance often acquires the most lovely expression,\\nsurpassing all that the great artists have given to the\\nVirgin Mary or to angels, and which may fitly be called\\nheavenly, for it involuntarily suggests to our minds the\\nmoral and intellectual beauty which alone seems con-\\nsistent with our views of Heaven. Such an expression\\nis never seen, except in the hypnotic sleep. As to the\\nvoice, I have never seen one person in the true hyp-\\nnotic sleep w4io did not speak in a tone quite distinct\\nfrom the ordinary voice of the sleeper. It is invariably,\\nso far as I have observed, softer and more gentle, well\\ncorresponding to the elevated and mild expression of the", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0202.jp2"}, "203": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM, 191\\nface. It has often a plaintive and touching character,\\nespecially when the sleeper ?peaks of departed friends or\\nrelations. In the highest stages, it has a character quite\\nnew, and in perfect accordance with the pure and lovely\\nsmile of the countenance, which beams on the observer,\\nin spite of the closed eyes, like a ray of Heaven s own\\nlight and beauty. I speak here of that which I have\\noften seen, and I would say that, as a general rule,\\nthe sleeper, when in the ordinary state and when in the\\ndeep hypnotic sleep, appears not like the same, but like\\ntwo entirely different individuals. And it is not wonderful\\nthat it should be so. For the sleeper in the hypnotic\\nstate, has a consciousness quite separate and distinct\\nfrom his ordinary consciousness he is, in fact, if not a\\ndifferent individual, yet the same individual in a different\\nand distinct phase of his being, and that phase the highest\\none given to living man.\\nProfessor Gregory s experience and observations have\\nbeen those of every hypnotist whose works have been\\nexamined. There is, indeed, an ineffable and indescrib-\\nable something which overspreads the countenance of\\nthe virtuous woman while she is in the hypnotic state,\\nwhich disarms passion, and affects the beholder with a\\nfeeling that he at least has seen something of what\\nHeaven is Hke. He knows that the physical senses are\\nasleep, and he feels that the human soul is shining forth\\nin all its majesty and purity, untainted by any thought\\nthat is gross, any emotion that is impure.\\nIn the fore part of this book we have given many\\nmethods, and out of so miny, every one can certainly\\nselect one that they will be able to use with success but\\nmany subjects are put to sleep much easier than they", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0203.jp2"}, "204": {"fulltext": "192 HYPNOTISM.\\nare wakened, therefore we think it wise to give advice\\nabout the care to be given to subjects who do not return\\nto normal Hfe as quickly as others. Much hanii can be\\ndone to a subject, if great care is not taken when being\\nbrought back to actual life. If the hypnosis is deep\\\\ it\\nwill always go into natural sleeps if the patient is let alone\\nand does not waken readily.\\nThe awakening may be spontaneous. Subjects who\\nsleep lightly, generally have a tendency to awaken quickly\\nand easily. Often the subject will not awake while the\\noperator remains near him, but will waken as soon as he\\ngoes some distance from him, either to the far side of the\\nroom or out into the hall. The majority of the subjects\\nleft to themselves sleep on for several minutes, then the\\nhypnotic sleep emerges into natural sleep and that ijnay last\\nsome minutes, and perhaps, an hour. Dr. Bernheim cites\\na case, where the patient went from the hypnotic sleep into\\nthe natural sleep and did not waken for fifteen hours, yet\\nno harm was done to the patient.\\nIn order to awaken the subject immediately, use verbal\\nsuggestion, in the same manner as when sleep is to be\\ninduced. Dr. Bernheim always says over and over again,\\nwake up, wake up, and if not an unusual case it suf-\\nfices, even when uttered in a very low voice.\\nIn some cases, it may be necessary to add: Your\\neyes are opening you are awake. If that is not enough,\\nblow dce or twice on the eyes of the subject, it will\\ngenerally cause them to open their eyes. Some operators\\nsprinkle cold water on the faces of their subjects, but it\\nis not a pleasant method of awaking. The awaking is\\nusually very easy, but if any subject does not waken when\\nordered to do so there need be no uneasiness felt by the", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0204.jp2"}, "205": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. ^193\\nhypnotizer, as all hypnotic sleep will go into natural sleep\\nif the subject is left quietly alone.\\nProfessor Bernheim, says At times there is nothing\\nso strange as this awaking. The subject is in deep sleep. I\\nquestion him and he answers. If he is naturally a good\\ntalker, he will speak fluently. In the midst of his con-\\nversation, I suddenly say: Wake up; he opens his\\neyes, and has absolutely no remembrance of what has\\nhappened. He does not remember having spoken to me,\\nthough he was speaking, perhaps, but one-tenth of a second\\nbefore waking. In order to make the phenomenon more\\nstriking, I sometimes wake a patient in the following way\\nCount up to ten when you say ten aloud, you will be\\nawake, The moment he says ten, his eyes open; but\\nhe does not remember having counted. Again, I say\\nYou are going to count up to ten; when you get to six\\nyou will wake up, but you will keep on counting aloud\\nup to ten. When he utters the word six, he opens\\nhis eyes but keeps on counting. When he has finished,\\nI say Why are you counting He no longer remem-\\nbers that he has been counting. I have repeated this\\nexperiment many times with very intelligent people, the\\nresult always being the same.\\nIt is necessary to proceed cautiously with hysterical\\nsubjects, avoiding touching painful points, and exciting\\nthe hysterogenic zones, lest an hysterical crisis be pro-\\nduced. The hypnotic sleep may in this way give place\\nto hysterical sleep, and the operator is then no longer\\nin relationship with the subject. Suggestion has then no\\neffect.\\nSome subjects remain sleepy when they wake up. If\\nthe operator waves his hand once or twice before the eyes.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0205.jp2"}, "206": {"fulltext": "194 HYPNOTISM.\\nhe may dispel this drowsiness. Others complain of heavi-\\nness in the head, and of a dull headache or of dizziness.\\nIn order to prevent these various sensations, I say to the\\nsubject before waking him, You are going to wake up,\\nand you will be perfectly comfortable your head is not\\nheavy, you feel perfectly well, and he awakes without\\nany disagreeable sensations.\\nSome subjects can be awakened by suggestion after\\na specified time. It is enough to say, You will awake in\\nfive minutes. They wake precisely at the moment sug-\\ngested. They have a correct idea of time. Some subjects\\nhave no accurate idea of time, and awake before the\\nmoment suggested. Some too, forget to awake. They\\nremain in the passive condition, and appear unable to\\ncome out of the sleep spontaneously. It is necessary to\\nsay to such, wake up, in order to have them do so.\\nMany subjects upon waking rub their eyes, look\\nwildly about, and are conscious of having slept deeply.\\nOthers open their eyes suddenly, not remembering what\\nhas passed, and do not know that they have been asleep.\\nThey are like epileptic patients who have been uncon-\\nscious and ignore the void which has come into their\\nstate of normal consciousness. Have you slept I do\\nnot know; I ought to believe it if you say so, or, they\\nare convinced that nothing abnormal has happened to\\nthem, and deny that they have been influenced.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0206.jp2"}, "207": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 195\\nCHAPTER XIII.\\nHYPNOTISM.\\nThe Wonders of Hypnotism Hypnotism as a Curative Power\\nThe effects of Hypnotism upon the Senses The effect of\\nHypnotism on the Function of Individual Organs All Turns\\non the way Suggestion is made Donatism.\\nHypnotism is one of the Wonders of this age, perhaps,\\nthe Wonder that is the least understood of all in this the\\nclosing Nineteenth Century. In the beginning of the next\\nhundred years, let us hope that the student and the scien-\\ntist alike will try to achieve greatness through the avenues\\nthat lead to hypnotism, for in that way alone will this\\nmost wonderful oi sciences be fully understood. And man-\\nkind needs to know more of hypnotism for its own good.\\nEnthusiasm like scepticism is a good thing. In this\\nmost fascinating study both should be held in check by\\na firm, strong judgement ever regulated by reason and\\nexperience.\\nHypnotism, as has been said before, may be a pal-\\nliative in some incurable cases, as well as hasten the\\nrecovery of those so fortunate as to be susceptible of entire\\nrelief. A clear comprehension of the whole subject by the\\nintelligent classes would greatly diminish the amount of\\nfanaticism which is so deleterious to a large number of\\nindividuals. We do not need miracles or revelations to", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0207.jp2"}, "208": {"fulltext": "196\\nHYPNOTISM.\\nexplain phenomena which can be and are susceptible of\\nexplanation upon a hypothesis which is based upon\\nexperimentation.\\nCan so intangible a thing as suggestion exercise an\\ninfluence over the complex biological chemistry of the\\nbrain and body? Most certainly.\\nCharcot, Luys, Liebault, Krafft, Ebing, and others,\\nmany of whom are acknowledged to be the best authorities\\nin Europe^ if not in the world, upon mental and nervous\\ndiseases, all testify and are in accord about a few of the\\nfollowing facts, of what can be done with hypnotism.\\nFirst. Hypnotism can, by soothing an over-excited\\nbrain cause the blood supply in it to be diminished, and\\nrest follow delirium. Faculties unaccustomed to obey the\\nwill, can be trained to obedience through the power\\nof hypnotism.\\nIt is generally believed by most psycho-physiologists\\nthat different parts of the brain can act independently,\\nand in this way produce a great many varieties or states\\nof consciousness, hence the terms subconscious, dual-\\nconsciousness, and many other similar ones.\\nNow, when one part of the brain is acting abnor-\\nmally, says Dr. Cocke, it may be checked or exhibited\\nby the other parts of the brain. Each cell of the brain\\nhas a certain degree of vitality which can be expanded\\nrapidly or slowly according to the circumstances. Sup-\\npose the brain by its activity to be evolving, as the result\\nof the destruction of its own cells, substances which act\\nas poison, and which interfere with or prevent its action.\\nBy quieting this activity, the blood circulating through\\nthe brain will have an opportunity of removing and dis-\\nposing of the before-mentioned toxic (poisons) products.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0208.jp2"}, "209": {"fulltext": "Fig. (5.) The Operator Hypnotising 3 Persons at One Time.\\nOriginal Portraits. Copyright by M. Young, Aug. 1899.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0209.jp2"}, "210": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0210.jp2"}, "211": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 197\\nHence it follows, that hypnotism acts as a great regulator\\nof the brain and nervous metabolism,\\nSecond. The authorities quoted en masse practically\\nagree that by concentrating the mind intensely upon any\\npart of the body, various changes take place in that part,\\nboth in its sensation, in its blood supply, and in its nutri-\\ntion. Tell the hypnotic subject that a part of the body is\\nfreezing, and immediately the phenomena popularly termed\\ngoose-flesh appears. Apply a metal and tell him it is\\nhot, and he not only believes that he is being burned, but\\naccording to Professor Bernheim and others, actual blisters\\non the part will appear. The part will grow red or pale at\\nthe command of the hypnotist.\\nThird. The bowels too will move at a definite hour\\nstated by the hypnotist when his patient is in the hypnotic\\nstate. The suggestions will act for twenty-four or thirty-\\nsix hours afterwards. Chemically inactive substances will\\nnauseate and produce vomiting, and when ordered will\\nintoxicate like whiskey and what is more pertinent to this\\nchapter, hallucinations, illusions and delusions may be\\ncreated, or in many cases destroyed, at the pleasure of the\\nhypnotist. Hence it follows that no spiritual or magnetic\\ntheory is necessary to account for, or to give a reasonable\\nexplanation of, the curative effects of hypnotism.\\nThe terms nerve-force, vital fluid, etc., are perhaps as\\nvague, at least we know as little about them as we do\\nof hypnotism and other allied terms.\\nBut of this we are sure, hypnotism will cure some\\ncases of insanity which are accompanied by hallucinations\\nand illusions. It will reheve these same conditions when\\noccurring among sane people as a result of some local\\nor general slight disorder.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0211.jp2"}, "212": {"fulltext": "198 HYPNOTISM.\\nDr. Cocke, says I again urge upon my readers,\\nwhether they be medical men or laymen, the utter folly\\nof relying upon hypnotism without attending to all other\\nmethods of hygiene and medicine which have been and\\nare the glorious achievements of the best medical thought\\nof this and other ages.\\nFourth. Hypnotism can be used for surgical anaes-\\nthesia. In fact, it is no new thing to use hypnotism for\\noperations. Dr. Charpignon reviewed the following facts,\\nrelative to operations practised during hypnotic anaesthesia,\\nin the Gazette des Hopitaux^ in 1829, The removal of a\\nbreast by Jules Cloqaet, in 1845 in 1846, the amputation\\nof a leg, and the extirpation of a gland painlessly per-\\nformed by Dr. Loysel, of Cherbourg, France, in 1845\\na double thigh amputation by Drs. Fanton and Towsel\\nof London, England; in 1845, the amputation of an arm,\\nby Dr. Joly of London, England.\\nIn spite of these fortunate trials, surgeons soon\\nshowed that hypnotism only rarely succeeds as an anaes-\\nthetic, that absolute insensibility is the exception among\\nhypnotizable subjects, and that the hypnotizing itself\\ngenerally fails in persons disturbed by the expectation of\\nan operation.\\nMany of the failures, however, to produce by hyp-\\nnotism the insensibility to pain, were due to the subjects\\nnot having been properly prepared.\\nIf anaesthesia is complete, an operation can be per-\\nformed, without any difficulty whatever, and there are\\nnone of the bad after effects that usually follow the use\\nof opiates. However, it is a very easy matter to prove\\nif an operation could be performed upon the patient or\\nnot, if anaesthesia is complete, a pin may be stuck into", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0212.jp2"}, "213": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 199\\nthe skin, electricity may be applied, objects may be\\npushed up into the nostrils, ammonia may be held under\\nthe nose, and the subject will not even wince. When\\none can do all this there need be no fear of using the\\nknife. This complete anaesthesia may be spontaneously\\ndeveloped by simple hypnotization.\\nIn other subjects it is not spontaneous, but may be\\ninduced by suggestion, and according to some authorities\\nit is much safer to operate on a patient when suggestion\\nis used, as the hypnotic state is under better control.\\nFifth. The effect of hypnotism upon the sense of\\nsight is one of the most curious of all phenomena occur-\\nring in the hypnotic state. If a person who is hypnotized\\nis told to open his eyes, he will do so, and seeing,\\nwill perceive only as the operator may suggest. Profes-\\nsor James mentions many interesting experiments, which\\nprove that blindness which can be induced by suggestion\\nis purely psychic, and not due to any effect directly upon\\neither the centre of sight in the brain or locally upon\\nthe eye. The hypnotized subject will become psychically\\nblind at the operator s will. If a line is made upon a\\nclean blackboard, the hypnotized subject, if commanded\\nto do so, will tell you that the blackboard is still a blank.\\nPlace a number of lines in any position you please around\\nthe first one the hypnotized subject will still insist that\\nthe line you first made upon the blackboard is not there.\\nProfessor James argues that the fact of the hypnotized\\nsubject refusing to recognize the existence of a line, is an\\nevidence that the subject saw the line, but that his con-\\nsciousness refused to recognize its existence.\\nSixth. All sorts of hallucinatory impressions may be\\nproduced upon the sense of hearing. The subject s hearing", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0213.jp2"}, "214": {"fulltext": "200 HYPNOTISM.\\nmay be made abnormally acute, or he may be made to hear\\nthings which do not exist. This peculiar sub-conscious\\ncondition, when not interfered with by suggestion, renders\\nthe sense of hearing peculiarly, nay, pathologically, acute.\\nA hypnotized subject is much more sensitive to music. It\\nhas for him a deeper meaning than for the normal mind.\\nThere is, indeed, yet unexplored a vast field for experimen-\\ntation in this direction.\\nThe East Indian fakirs invariably invoke the aid\\nof music to enable them to enter the subjective state when\\nthey are about to give an exhibition of occult power. In\\nfact, the power of music over the hypnotized mind is prac-\\ntically unlimited. It speaks the universal language of the\\nsoul and is comprehended alike by prince and peasant. It\\nis the most powerful auxiliary of love, of religion, and\\nof war. It nerves the soldier to deeds of heroism, and\\nsoothes his dying moments. It inspires alike the devotee\\nof pleasure and the worshipper to God. But while it\\ninterprets every human emotion and embodies the inward\\nfeeling of which all other arts can but exhibit the outward\\neifect, its laws are fixed but the fact remains that music\\ncan produce remarkable effects upon hypnotized subjects,\\nand gives to the subjective consciousness a psychological\\nimportance which it has never occupied before, and un-\\ndoubtedly the future will prove that this field is rich with\\nyet undiscovered treasures.\\nSeventh.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Hallucinations and delusions of taste and\\nsmell in a hypnotized subject can also be produced by\\nsuggestion, but they possess no special value, but are inter-\\nesting when subjects are hypnotized for the amusement\\nof others. A rose will be smelled, (imaginary) perfumes\\ncommented upon, water will be called wine, in fact, any", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0214.jp2"}, "215": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 20I\\nsuggested smell or taste will appear real to the hypnotized\\none.\\nEighth. The power of speech may be wholly\\nabolished or partially inhibited, and certain words will be\\nforgotten at command while the hypnotic state lasts. Also,\\nthe memory of a printed page or the memory of certain\\nletters may be forgotten.\\nDr. Cocke, says: I once hypnotized a man and\\nmade him read all of his a s as b s, his y s as v s, and\\nhis b s as x s. I added suggestion after suggestion so\\nrapidly that it would have been impossible for him to have\\nremembered simply what I said and call the letters as I\\ndirected. Simulation was in this case impossible, as I\\nmade him read fifteen pages, he calling the letters as\\nsuggested each time they occurred.\\nNinth. The function of the individual organs, while\\nhypnotized, play no small part in hypnotism. The\\nalterations which we find in hypnosis affect the voluntary\\nand involuntary muscles as well as the organs of sense,\\ncommon sensation, the secretions, metabolism, and in rare\\ncases also the cell power of organization.\\nThe voluntary muscles show the most frequent abnor-\\nmalities, and suggestion exercises a most extraordinary\\ninfluence over their function during hypnosis. First of all,\\nwhat is the state of the function of the voluntary muscles\\nduring hypnosis, when no kind of external influence is\\nexercised. There are the greatest differences, according to\\nthe method of hypnotization selected, and according to the\\ncharacter of the subject. Some are able to move with\\nperfect freedom during hypnosis till the command of the\\nexperimenter inhibits some particular movement many, on\\nthe contrary, look as if they were asleep. In this case, we", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0215.jp2"}, "216": {"fulltext": "202 HYPNOTISM.\\nsee no movements, or very rare ones, which are slow and\\nlabored. Even when the hypnotists suggest movement, he\\nrarely accomplishes it, when the patient is in this state\\nof hypnosis. It is to be understood that between complete\\nfreedom of movement and the incapacity to move at all,\\nthere exists all sorts of transitional stages. It is all the\\nsame which of these characters has the preponderance\\nmuscular activity can nearly always be influenced in a high\\ndegree by suggestion. By means of it, we can make\\nthe existing movements impossible, or induce previously\\nimpossible ones.\\nI can make his arm powerless to move, says Dr.\\nMoll, simply by arousing in him the conviction that the\\narm is powerless. In just the same way, the movements\\nof the legs, trunk, larynx, and so on, escape the sub-\\nject s control. You cannot raise your arm cannot put\\nout your tongue. This suffices to make the forbidden\\nmovement impossible. In some cases the inability to move\\narises because the subject cannot voluntarily contract his\\nmuscles while in other cases a contracture of the antagon-\\nistic muscles makes every attempt at voluntary movement\\nuseless.\\nThe power of speech can also be taken away. And it\\nis even possible to allow the muscles to contract for one\\nparticular purpose only. If we say to a hypnotic subject,\\nYou can only say your name for the rest you are\\nabsolutely dumb, the desired effect will most surely be\\nproduced. In the same way it is impossible to prevent\\nmovements of the arms for one particular purpose. Thus\\nwe can make it impossible for a person to write, though\\nhe will be able to do any other kind of work. The\\nsubject can sew, play the piano, etc., but all efforts to", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0216.jp2"}, "217": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 203\\nwrite are vain. The movement only becomes possible\\nat the moment when the experimenter gives permission.\\nIt Is remarkable that In some persons one set of muscles\\nIs easier to Influence by suggestion, and In others another\\nset. For example, we can make a person dumb by sug-\\ngestion, while all the other muscles obey his will In spite\\nof suggestion. Another, again loses the power of moving\\nhis arms at once, while his speech remains unaffected.\\nIn the same way muscular movements are prevented\\nby suggestion. The hypnotist says You are Hfting your\\narm to lay it on your head. This happens at once.\\nThe movement with the subject s will can often be distin-\\nguished from those against it by a certain steady ease.\\nThese last are nearly always characterized by strong\\nmuscular contractions, and by trembling, which shows the\\nintense effort not to obey the will of the hypnotist.\\nJust m the same way the hypnotic subject Is obliged\\nto cough, laugh, talk, jump, etc., at command. It is\\nfurther possible to generate by suggestion the idea of\\nparalysis of one of the extremities. According to Lober,\\nGilles de la Tourette, and Richer, the clinical characteristics\\nof these paralyses are marked by the absolute loss of\\nmotor power and sensation, Increase of the tendon reflexes,\\nankle clonus, wrist clonus, complete loss of muscular sense,\\nof the ability to control perfectly the action of the\\nmuscles, and to be certain of the position of the limbs,\\ncharged electrical excitability, and vasomotor disturbances\\nthese last are particularly said to show themselves by a\\nbright flush of the skin on slight stimulation. These\\nparalyses can be produced in both the hypnotic and post-\\nhypnotic state.\\nTenth. With subjects who are deprived of will.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0217.jp2"}, "218": {"fulltext": "204 HYPNOTISM.\\nbesides the movements described above, complicated move-\\nments, or even performamces, also take place by suggestion.\\nI say to the subject, Dr. Moll says\\nSpin round three times, and he cannot help doing\\nso. You lift that book from the table, and he lifts it.\\nThe subject cannot help performing the command.\\nThe suggestion itself is made in different ways. The\\nmain pointy and all turns upon this^ is that the subject should\\nthoroughly understand what the experimenter wishes. Each\\nof the organs of sense is a door of entrance for sugges-\\ntion. The most common is naturally our habitual means\\nof communication, by means of which we tell the sub-\\nject what we wish. But it is very important, and much\\nmore effective than words alone, that the experimenter\\nshould accompany his words by a performance of the move-\\nment which the subject is intended to execute. Consequently\\nprofessional hypnotizers habitually induce movements by\\nimitation.\\nEleventh. Imitation appears particularly in a hyp-\\nnotic state, which certain authors (Bremaud, Marselli,\\nTauzi) have thoroughly studied, and which Descourties\\ncalls Fascination. A professional hypnotizer, Donata, has\\ndemonstrated this state completely and Morselli and\\nothers have on this account called this form of hypnosis\\nDonatism.\\nThis process aims at a primary forced contracture of\\nall the muscles of the body, in order, by this means, to\\nlimit the voluntary movements as much as possible. In\\nthis case the eyes of the hypnotist and the subject are\\nfirmly fixed on one another. The subject finally follows\\nevery movement of the experimenter. If he goes back-\\nward, the subject follows if he comes forward, the subject", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0218.jp2"}, "219": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM, 205\\ndoes the same. In the same way, the latter imitates every\\nmovement of the experimenter, only on the conditions,\\nhowever, that he knows he is intended to do so. We\\nsee here, as in the fascination experiments, that fascination\\nmay become a primary form of hypnosis.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0219.jp2"}, "220": {"fulltext": "2o6 HYPNOTISM.\\nCHAPTER XIV.\\nHYPNOTISM.\\nThe Wonders of Hypnotism Continued Catalepsy Automatic\\nMovement The Phenomena of Imitative Speech Hemi-\\nHypnosis Increased Sensitiveness of Hypnotic Subjects\\nHyperaesthesia of the Eye Suggestion and Hypnosis\\nCirculation and Respiration in Hypnotism Memory in\\nHypnotism Hypermnesia.\\nAs the most different views exist as to what Catalepsy\\nmeans, for the sake of brevity, we give Dr. Moll s defin-\\nition, Any state in which voluntary movements disappear\\nand the limbs remain as they are placed by the experi-\\nmenter, without having regard to the length of time which\\nelapses before the limbs move freely again, or fall from their\\nown weight.\\nTwelfth. The muscular sense, which keeps us\\ninformed of the position of our limbs, requires particular\\nconsideration as a way of entrance for suggestion. It\\ncauses the phenomenon which the school of Nancy calls\\ncatalepsy by suggestion. It is very common in hypnosis,\\nand is shown in the following example Professor Bern-\\nheim says, I lift the arm of a hypnotic, hold it in the\\nair, and then let go the arm remains as I placed it\\nalthough I say nothing. Why does this happen Because", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0220.jp2"}, "221": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM, 207\\nthe subject believes he must leave his arm thus, and\\nbecause this suggestion was conveyed to him by the\\nmuscular sense. Another person let his arm fall I raise\\nit again, and say at the same time, the arm keeps\\nstill, which happens but only because the person now\\nknows that this is intended, while he did not under-\\nstand the simple raising of the arm. The legs, head, trunk,\\netc., can be put into the most different postures and\\nmaintained there in exactly the same way the muscular\\nsense here is the only transmitter of the suggestion.\\nThe inclination of the subject to maintain cataleptic\\npositions is so great, that Heidenhain considered the\\nhypnotic state to be a catalepsy artificially produced. Cat-\\nalepsy by suggestion has nothing whatever to do with\\nphysical alteration of the muscles.\\nThe main point for the attainment of catalepsy is that\\nthe subject should accept the idea of the corresponding\\nattitude. Consequently the idea must take root before the\\ndesired result can be attained. For this purpose some\\nmeans or other must be employed to allow it to operate\\nduring a certain period. Words answer the purpose as\\nwell as other signs many persons can only be thrown into\\ncatalepsy from suggestion when the attitude required is\\nmaintained for some time.\\nCatalepsy is the part of hypnosis that the platform\\nexperimenters use the most successfully, as to those who\\nknow nothing of hypnotism it appears perhaps the most\\nwonderful. And then so many novel things can be done\\nwith the subject while in this hypnotic state. One of the\\nbest known features in hypnosis is the rigidity of the whole\\nbody. There is sometimes a complete tonic contracture\\nof nearly all the voluntary muscles, through which the", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0221.jp2"}, "222": {"fulltext": "2o8 HYPNOTISM.\\nhead, neck, trunk and legs become as stiff as a board. A\\nwell-known experiment can be carried out in this state\\nthe head can be placed on one chair and the feet on\\nanother, and the body will not double up. A heavy\\nweight, that of a man, for example, may even be placed\\nupon the body without bending it. It is well to make\\npasses over the body, as the stiffening is most easily\\ninduced by this means, and it cannot always be induced\\nby mere verbal suggestion. A command from the experi-\\nmenter is generally sufficient to put an end to the rigidity.\\nThirteenth. A deeper degree of hypnosis seems to\\nbe required for the production of automatic movement tkan\\nfor simple catalepsy. Both arms are lifted horizontally and\\nrotated one about the other. The subject keeps on moving\\nthem spontaneously or in obedience to a command. In\\ncases of deep sleep these automatic movements occur\\nthrough imitation. I stand in front of a patient, says\\nProf Bernheim, and turn my arms one above the other.\\nThe subject imitates me. I make the movement in the\\nopposite direction he does the same.\\nFourteenth. The phenomena of imitative speech\\nis also one of the features of hypnosis. Berger says that\\nhypnotics will repeat every thing that is said before them,\\nlike phonographs even what is said in foreign languages\\nis repeated with some exactness. The notion that only\\ncertain tracts of the bodily surface must be stimulated\\nin order to produce this repetition, Heidenhain, and\\nBerger, consider a mistake, the result of insufficient acquaint-\\nance with suggestion. They believe that the hypnotic\\nechoes what he believes he is intended to echo. It is cer-\\ntain that some persons are able to perform great feats\\nin this way, imitating a hitherto unknown language quickly\\n1", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0222.jp2"}, "223": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 209\\nand correctly. The main point is, that the hypnotic should\\nknow he is intended to repeat the sound. Certain reflexes,\\nwhich are supposed to be induced by touching the head,\\nthe appearance of aphasia, or of twitching or contractures\\nin the arm or leg on touching certain parts of the cranium,\\nshould be understood in the same way statements of this\\nkind were made by Heidenhain, and have been repeated\\nlately by Silva, Binet, and Fere.\\nFifteenth. Another wonderful point is, that it is\\npossible to induce hemi-hypnosis, or hypnosis of one side\\nof the body, by suggestion, or to influence each half\\nof the body in a different way. It was known even to\\nBraid, that by blowing on one eye the corresponding\\nside would be awakened. Descourtis, Charcot, Dumont-\\nPaUier, Berillon, Lepine and Strohl, carried on these\\nexperiments in various modified forms. Though these\\nauthors regard hemi-hypnosis as a physiological condition\\ninduced by the closing of one eye or by friction of one-\\nhalf of the crown of the head, their statements do not\\nnow prove their point. But, we know that we can pro-\\nduce all these states by mental influence, and suggestion\\nmust be excluded before the experiments can be considered\\nconclusive.\\nSixteenth. The senses of pressure and temperature\\nbecome much more delicate in hypnosis than in normal\\ncondition. The hypnotic recognizes things half an inch\\ndistant from the skin, and this simply by the increase and\\ndecrease of temperature, says Braid. He walks about\\na room with bandaged eyes or in absolute darkness\\nwithout striking against anything, because he recognizes\\nobjects by the resistance of the air, and by the alteration\\nof the temperature.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0223.jp2"}, "224": {"fulltext": "2IO HYPNOTISM.\\nBergson has described one of the most remarkable\\ncases of increased power of vision. This particular case\\nhas been cited as a proof of supersensual thought-trans-\\nference but Bergson ascribes the result to hyperaesthesia\\nof the eye. In this case, the hypnotic was able to read\\nletters in a book which were 3 MM. high the reading\\nwas made possible by a reflected image of these letters\\nin the eye of the experimenter. According to calcula-\\ntion the reflected image could only have been OT MM.\\n(=1/250 inch) high. The same person was able, without\\nusing the microscope, to see and draw the cells in a\\nmicroscopical specimen, which were only o o6 MM. in\\ndiameter. Souvaire, after some not quite irreproachable\\nexperiments, suppose the existence of such a hyperaes-\\nthesia of sight, that a hypnotic recognized non-transparent\\nplaying cards by the rays of light passing through them.\\nA case of Tagnets, in which an ordinary piece of card-\\nboard was used as a mirror, is said to have proved\\nquite as strong a hyperaesthesia. All objects which were\\nheld so that the reflected rays from the card fell upon\\nthe subject s eye were clearly recognized. The same thing\\nis shown by a great increase of the sense of smell. A visit-\\ning card is torn into a number of pieces, which pieces are\\nprofessedly found purely by the sense of smell pieces\\nbelonging to another card are rejected. The subjects give\\ngloves, keys, and pieces of money to the person to whom\\nthey belong, guided only by the smell.\\nSeventeenth. Suggestion is, perhaps, the greatest\\nof all the wonders of hypnosis for without suggestion,\\nhypnotism can accompHsh little while with suggestion,\\nno man can yet tell the wonders that lay before us, in\\nthe undiscovered forces of hypnosis.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0224.jp2"}, "225": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 211\\nDr. Moll, says: Suggestion influences common sen-\\nsation in the same way as the functions of the organs\\nof sense. Nothing worthy of remarks takes place in\\nhypnosis, unless suggestion is called into play. I may,\\nhowever, mention the feeling of fatigue which many\\nhypnotics experience it sometimes appears in the lightest\\nhypnosis, and may also exist in the deeper stages. We\\ncan influence common sensations very materially by sug-\\ngestion in hypnosis. This is not surprising when we\\nconsider that it is exactly the common sensations which\\nare most under the influence of mental processes. It is\\nin this direction that suggestion has to record its most\\nstriking successes, since the common sensations, of which\\npain is one, are the cause of most of the complaints we\\nhear. As pain, etc., can be induced by suggestion, so by\\nsuggestion it can often be banished. I say to a subject who\\ncomplains of want of appetite, The loss of appetite has\\ndisappeared you are hungry. I can cause another to feel\\nthirst. Feelings of pleasure can likewise be excited.\\nThe state of mind which is intimately connected with\\ncommon sensation can also be influenced by suggestion.\\nIt is consequently easy to induce either sadness or cheer-\\nfulness in hypnosis. The method of hypnotization has\\nsome influence here. The desires and aflections can be\\ncontrolled in hypnosis as well as the moods. Love and\\nhate, anxiety, anger and fear, can be easily called up,\\nand produce corresponding expressions and postures in\\nthe hypnotic.\\nEighteenth. One more word about the circulation\\nand respiration in hypnotism.\\nAccording to Braid, the pulse and respiration are at\\nfirst slower than normal but as soon as the muscles are", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0225.jp2"}, "226": {"fulltext": "212 HYPNOTISM.\\nput into activity a tendency to cataleptiform rigidity is\\nproduced, with increase of the pulse rate and rapid and\\nlaborious respiration. According to his experiments, the\\nincrease of the pulse rate caused by the muscular effort\\nwhich the person makes normally, in order to keep, his\\nlegs and arms extended for five minutes, is about twenty\\nper cent. In the hypnotic condition it is one hundred\\nper cent. If, then, all the senses are excited, if the\\nmuscles of the head and neck are put into a catalepti-\\nform condition simultaneously with the limbs, there is a\\nrapid fall to forty per cent, (that is, twice as much as\\nthe increase during the normal condition). If the muscles\\nare allowed to relax again, the subject still remaining in the\\nhypnotic state, the pulse falls rapidly to its rate before the\\nexperiment, and even below it. Further, during the catal-\\neptiform rigidity the pulse is slow and small, and at the\\nsame time, a sudden injection of the ocular conjunctiva\\nof the capillaries of the head, neck and face occurs. Braid\\nthinks that the rigidity of the cataleptic muscles prevents\\nthe free transmission of blood to the extremities, and\\nthus causes an increase of the cardiac action and hypersemia\\nof the brain and spinal cord.\\nOther authors have, like Braid, observed modifica-\\ntions of the cardiac and respiratory function. In a case\\nof hypnotic lethargy reported in a thesis at Strasburg,\\nPan de St. Martin noticed the increase of the pulse and\\nrespiration, the diminution of the vascular tension and\\nprofuse perspiration.\\nBy means of more precise methods, Heldenhain reached\\nthe same results, and noticed besides an augmentation\\nof the salivary secretion, and recently Tamburini and\\nSeppili, with the graphic method, and Mosso s plethysmo-", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0226.jp2"}, "227": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 213\\ngraph, observed that at the time of transition from the\\nwaking condition to the hypnotic sleep, the respiratory-\\nmovements became irregular, unequal, and more frequent,\\nthe cardiac and vascular pulsation increased, and the face\\nwas congested.\\nDr. Hack-Tuke observed an acceleration of the cardiac\\nand respiratory movements in one case in another, on\\nthe contrary, both remained unaffected.\\nDr. Bernheim, says on this same subject: **None of\\nthese symptoms are manifested by patients who are hyp-\\nnotized by the quiet suggestion method, and who retain\\ntheir tranquility of mind nor by those who, having already\\nbeen hypnotized several times, go to sleep with confidence\\nand without emotion or agitation. Under these conditions\\nI have observed neither increase nor diminution of the\\npulse rate, nor of the respiratory movements. I have\\nrecorded the pulse by the sphymograph before, and dur-\\ning hypnosis, and have found It to be the same at both\\ntimes. Neither have I noticed the marked accelerations,\\nwhich according to Braid, is produced by the catalepti-\\nform rigidity which occurs in the extension of the limbs.\\nIt appears to me that no appreciable difference exists\\nbetween the waking and the hypnotic condition.\\nBut the above only refers to the hypnotic state when\\nbrought about by the suggestive or Bernheim methods.\\nNineteenth. Is the chain of memory in ordinary\\nlife broken by the hypnosis or not? It was formerly\\nsupposed that a break in the memory occurred, because\\nthe subject always forgot on awaking what had taken place\\nduring hypnosis. But this view has not proved correct.\\nIn the lighter hypnotic stages, especially in the first\\ngroup, no abnormality of memory is found the subject", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0227.jp2"}, "228": {"fulltext": "214 HYPNOTISM.\\nremembers everything in the hypnosis which concerns his\\nnormal Hfe, and after the hypnosis remembers all that\\nhas occurred. In the deeper hypnosis, it is very different\\nthey belong for the most part to the second group, and\\nthere is loss of memory after the hypnosis. The subject\\nis much astonished when he hears what he has done\\nduring the hypnosis that he has been running about,\\nthat he has had hallucinations, etc. Often, however, a dim\\nmemory persists, like the memory of a dream. Dr. Moll,\\nsays I suggest to some one the hallucination of a bird\\nflying about the room the hypnotic tries to catch it,\\namuses himself for a long time with it, gives it sugar, puts\\nit in an imaginary cage, and so on after waking, he dimly\\nremembers that he had seen a bird, but that is all he\\ncertainly does not believe that he has left his seat.\\nHowever, in some cases, chiefly in the deepest hypnosis,\\nmemory cannot be recalled by anything you can say or do.\\nIn such cases there is a complete loss of memory. On\\nthe other hand, the subject remembers in hypnosis all\\nthat has happened in previous hypnosis. Things that\\nhappened in hypnosis dating many years back, even as\\nmany as ten, may be recalled, although they are completely\\nforgotten in the waking state. Wolfart, relates the case of\\na woman who remembered in the hypnotic sleep all that\\nhad taken place in a hypnotic sleep thirteen years before,\\nalthough in the meantime she had never recollected it.\\nEvents of normal life can also be. remembered in\\nhypnosis, even when they have apparently been long\\nforgotten. This increased power of memory is called\\nhypermnesia. Benedikt relates a case of it. An English\\nofiicer, in Africa, was hypnotized by Hansen, and suddenly\\nbegan to speak a strange language. This turned out", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0228.jp2"}, "229": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 215\\nto be Welsh, which he had learned as a child, but had\\nforgotten. Brewer and Frend point out, many cases\\nof hysteria are called forth by some psychic moment that\\nthe patient cannot recall in the waking condition, though\\nhypnosis may again bring it back to memory.\\nAll the phenomena which have been spoken of are\\nvery variable. Only the most common, and the most\\nimportant have been mentioned. But hypnotic education\\nor training needs to be accomplished with great care.\\nEvery one who watches hypnotic experiment should give it\\nparticular attention. All the phenomena of hypnosis may\\nbe interpreted falsely by a mere spectator, if sufficient\\nattention is not paid to this point. When hypnotic\\nexperiments are shown to outsiders, subjects are as a rule\\nselected who have gone through a hypnotic training in\\nsome particular direction, and as the directions are various,\\nthe results also are various. The Breslau investigations, for\\nexample, developed the imitative movements, while others\\ndid the same with the effects of the movements on the\\nfeelings {suggestions d aiiitude).\\nHe who only regards the final results and pays no\\nattention to their gradual evolution will be inclined to\\nbelieve that the two parties of Investigators are engaged\\nwith different things though it is in reality only differ-\\nence in training which gives a different appearance to\\nidentical states. Each experimenter now only demonstrates\\nsuch symptoms as he has cultivated by training, espe-\\ncially as this training commonly produces most interesting\\nphenomena, the heightening of certain faculties in par-\\nticular. The outsider is unaware that this is a mere\\nresult of hypnotic training, and is easily misled. Children\\nwho repeat to strangers the piece of poetry they know", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0229.jp2"}, "230": {"fulltext": "2i6 HYPNOTISM.\\nbest, do exactly the same thing. Experimenters produce\\ncertain objective symptoms by means of training, and any\\none seeing them for the first time is apt to make mis-\\ntakes. But every experimenter produces different objective\\nsymptoms one, for example, a lasting catalepsy, another\\na perfect echolalie. These things strike the stranger, who\\ncannot estimate the effect of training. Thus it happens\\nthat different experimenters discover different objective\\nsymptoms. The question of training is of immense import-\\nance. Many have suspected simulation because of the\\napparent variety of hypnotic states. This variety is really\\nthe result of different training, if we put aside difference\\nof character. The experimenter influences the develop-\\nment of the hypnosis.\\nTraining, says Dr. Moll is the great source of\\nerror for the experimenter in hypnotism, because the subject\\nis inclined to divine and obey his intentions, and thus\\nunconsciously mislead him. Unknown to himself, the\\ntone of the voice may induce the subject to prevent the\\nphenomena which he expects. The subject is also greatly\\ninfluenced by his surroundings, and by watching other\\nsubjects. Imitation is also of great importance here.\\nDr. Bertrand says I hypnotize X, and suggest that\\nhe cannot speak, at the same time inadvertently touching\\nhis left shoulder with my right hand. Y, in hypnosis, sees\\nthis, and every time I touch his left shoulder with my right\\nhe, too, is unable to speak. Y, believes that this is the\\nsignal for loss of speech, and behaves accordingly.\\nTraining enables a hypnotic subject to divine all the\\nexperimenter s wishes. The latter need not speak the\\nleast movement betrays his wish. A long training is not\\nnecessary. The object of making these remarks is to warn", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0230.jp2"}, "231": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 217\\nagainst attributing great importance to demonstrations,\\nparticularly when these contain symptoms apparently\\nobjective and impossible to imitate. It should always be\\nkept in mind that many such symptoms can be produced\\nby training; and can, perhaps, be imitated by practice\\neven without hypnosis.\\nDr. Moll also adds In most cases it is necessary to\\ngive the subject a hypnotic training, in order to make\\nthe state as deep as possible. For this, I wish to recom-\\nmend a particular method, as otherwise the deepening is\\nnot always attained. Let the first suggestions be simple, so\\nas not to shock the subject s sense of probability. The first\\nsuggestions should be possible, and progress should be\\ngradual. More will be attained in this way than by\\nsuggesting impossible situations at first which the subject\\nwill not believe in. And if a suggestion is often declined,\\nthere Is apt to arise in the subject the auto- suggestion that\\nhe Is refractory to this suggestion, or perhaps to any sug-\\ngestion. This is often lastingly prejudicial, and may lessen\\nsusceptibility to suggestion in all later hypnosis. I there-\\nfore strongly recommend a slow and gradually increasing\\nmethod for post- hypnotic suggestion.\\nThis concludes the symptoms of hypnosis. We have\\nseen that symptoms are of manifold kinds, and that they\\nare hardly ever identical in two different persons. In\\nspite of conformity to law one human body is never\\nexactly like another, the mental state of one man is\\nnever exactly like another s. It is the same In hypnosis:\\none man displays this symptom with greater clearness,\\nanother that. We shall never be able to find a subject\\nin whom all the symptoms are united, just as we cannot\\nfind a patient who has all the symptoms of an illness\\nas they are theoretically described.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0231.jp2"}, "232": {"fulltext": "2i8 HYPNOTISM\\nCHAPTER XV.\\nHYPNOTISM.\\n[From the New York Journal, June, 1899.]\\nA Boy who can see straight through your clothes to your very\\nBones How he has diagnosed Diseases which puzzled Physi-\\ncians Described Internal Disorders which Science had no\\nway of finding out, and explained Fractures of Bones which\\nthe Doctors did not suspect\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Physicians confronted with a\\nScientific Phenomenon which it is impossible to explain.\\nThe most remarkable feat that has ever been performed\\nthrough hypnotism has just been made public through the\\nefforts of one of the most widely read and enterprising\\ndailies of New York, from which we make the follow-\\ning interesting extracts\\nThe narrative of facts herewith related would seem\\nutterly beyond belief were the facts not solemnly vouched\\nfor by some of the best known physicians of Boston. Briefly\\nstated, it may be said that the human eye can see through\\nthe usual clothing, underclothing and flesh of man, and to\\nobserve the bones and internal organs as clearly and as\\naccurately as the ordinary eye reads a newspaper.\\nThe eleven-year-old boy who performs this scientific\\nmiracle is the son of a Massachusetts physician. Dr. Frank\\nWallace Brett. Not as a freak or an idle test of the", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0232.jp2"}, "233": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 2ig\\npossibilities of sight have the experiments been conducted,\\nbut for the diagnosis of disease. Some of the actual\\nscientific accomplishments of this extraordinary boy are\\npresented in the exact words of the Massachusetts physi-\\ncians who tested his powers. Science has, apparently, come\\nface to face with new phenomena and a broadened horizon\\nof the human eye which were hitherto unsuspected and\\nwhich no one is able to explain.\\nBy Dr. John S. Flagg, former Dean of Faculty of Phy-\\nsicians and Surgeons: I have watched the case of the\\nBrett boy for over a year with great interest. I was present\\nin person at one of the first experiments performed upon\\nhim by his father. In his hypnotic state, the boy answered\\nquestions put to him by his father in a manner which did\\nnot admit of deception, and into which, I am satisfied, tele-\\npathy had no part, for some of his answers to expert medical\\nquestions surpassed even the medical acquaintance of his\\nown father. The workings of the sensory and motive\\nnerves-^^rom the brain to and from the upper extremities\\nwas correctly described, and his correctly locating the\\ndouble nerve centres, which modern science has agreed\\nto accept as true, was a complete surprise to his father\\nhimself.\\nIn all, the boy correctly described nine separate\\ninstances of his father s interior economy, and, so far as\\nI could observe, he was correct in every instance. He\\nalso compared his father s heart and liver with my own\\nwithout the slightest possible chance for deception.\\nA broken right arm which I had when a child seemed\\nto puzzle him for some time, but that was not at all to be\\nwondered at, since the accident had occured when I was but\\nfour years of age, and the only trace of it was a slight", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0233.jp2"}, "234": {"fulltext": "220 HYPNOTISM.\\nthickening of the bone. It is exceedingly difficult to\\naccount for this singular gift of the boy. In default of other\\nexplanation might it not be assumed that this peculiar\\nvision of the boy may be simply a reversion to a gift of the\\nprimordial man out of which the ages have evoluted him\\nI am not a spirituahst, and am a member of the Society\\nof Psychical Research. The only interest I take in these\\nstray instances of supernormal happenings or what pro-\\nfesses to be supernormal is strictly in a scientific sense.\\n(Signed) John S. Flagg, M. D.\\nBy Dr. Frank L. Burt, Head Physician Union General\\nHospital of Boston: I have known the Brett boy, through\\nhis father, for the last two years. Dr. Brett I have known\\nfor about six years. I consider him a man of the highest\\nintegrity and absolutely truthful. In two instances I have\\nbeen present at the marvelous experiments of the Brett\\nboy, and in both cases deception was impossible.\\nThe first occurred here in my study, at the hospital,\\nin the month of February of the current year. The Brett\\nboy and his father, the doctor, were visiting me, and my\\nhead matron, Mrs. Randall, entered the room. She was\\nsuffering at the time from what both she and I supposed was\\na heavy cold. She had heard of the peculiar power attrib-\\nuted to the Brett boy, and jokingly asked Dr. Brett to\\nallow the boy to make a physical examination of herself\\nThe doctor acquiesced, and the boy at once passed under\\nthe hypnotic trance. The boy turned his large widely\\nopened eyes in her direction and looked at her fixedly for\\nabout a minute, when he said aloud to his father:\\nOh, papa, I can see a great big sore in her lungs,\\njust where they come together. And it looks around\\nit as if the lungs had been bleeding.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0234.jp2"}, "235": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 221\\nThis was all he said this time, Mrs. Randall not\\nwishing to hear more. When the boy and his father\\nhad gone she told me that she had had two hemorrhages a\\nday or two prior to the boy s visit, but she had attached\\nno particular fear to them, thinking that the blood had\\ncome from the stomach. At that time she was apparently\\nin the best of health, and there never was a nurse in\\nany of the hospitals of Boston who excelled her in the\\nuse of Ether prior to an operation. On the first day\\nof June she died of what people call quick consumption.\\nThe other instance was in a matter relating to my\\nown personality. A short time after the boy s examina-\\ntion of Mrs. Randall, I asked his father to allow him\\nto examine me. He consented, and the boy looked me\\nover slowly. He told me I do not remember his exact\\nwords that I was about to be troubled with my kidneys.\\nThis I already knew of, and was in no way surprised,\\nbut when he concentrated his gaze upon the abdomen\\nand described to me a certain formation there, of which\\nI myself was unaware, I was struck with amazement.\\nThat this condition did exist at the time, I have since\\nproved by experiments and treatment. I am entirely\\nsatisfied that the boy is not deceiving his father or any\\none else, and believe that he is the possessor of. some super-\\nnormal force, the nature of which I have never before seen\\nexemplified. (Signed) Frank L. Burt, M. D.\\nBy Professor William A. Barnes, Member of Faculty\\nof College of Physicians and Surgeons: Dr. Frank W.\\nBrett, of South Braintree, is a personal friend of mine and a\\nformer pupil. I taught him hypnotism in the medical\\nschool. I have known of the experiments upon his eldest\\nboy for at least a year. I have personally been a witness", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0235.jp2"}, "236": {"fulltext": "222 HYPNOTISM,\\nof an exhibition of the boy s peculiar power. This occurred\\nin my own office, in obeying a command from his father.\\n*He examined Mrs. Barnes (my wife), whom he had\\nnever before seen, to either her or my knowledge, and\\ncorrectly diagnosed a broken ankle, the result of an\\naccident when she was a girl. He located the ankle,\\ndescribed its present state, and gave certain evidences of\\nhaving it might or might not have been a mental picture\\nof the ankle before him.\\nHis eyes were wide open and fixed staringly upon the\\nankle in question during the time he was speaking.\\nThere is no question of the authenticity of this strange\\ngift. As a professional hypnotist I am, of course, well\\naware that the visions and answers returned to the ques-\\ntioning of the hypnotist are wholly the result of telepathy,\\nbut in this case there is no evidence of this whatever.\\nThis boy SEES portions of the human anatomy which\\nthe ordinary man or woman are unable to see, and answers\\nquestions concerning them. His father, the hypnotist,\\ncould not have suggested my wife s broken ankle to him,\\nsince he did not even know of it. I have as yet formulated\\nno theory concerning his marvelous faculty.\\n(Signed) William A. Barnes, A. M.\\nNarrative of Dr. Brett, the boy s father: South\\nBraintree, Mass., June 23. Oh, papa, I can see your\\nbones This was the exclamation of little Afley Leonel\\nBrett, the eleven-year-old son of Dr. Frank Wallace Brett,\\nin the November of 1897, just before regaining his senses\\nafter a hypnotic trance, induced by his father.\\nAnd he could. He proved it then and there. He\\nhas proven it hundreds of times since, and again this\\nafternoon, in the parlor of his father s house, he proved", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0236.jp2"}, "237": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 223\\nit for the last time upon the person of the Journal cor-\\nrespondent himself.\\nThe boy is not only the marvel of the town, but\\nof all the surrounding country. Boston has heard of him,\\nand New York, and to-day, his father received an offer\\nfrom a celebrated New York specialist for the services of\\nhis son in the diagnosis of a difficult case in the metropolis.\\nAfley (from the Greek verb Aphleo Leonel Brett,\\nwho possesses this wonderful faculty, is a small school-\\nboy, who will not have attained the age of twelve years\\nuntil next August. To look at him, one fails to see just\\nwherein he differs from any other schoolboy of his age\\nand condition, excepting, perhaps, that he is far better\\nlooking than the majority. But he has a good looking\\nfather and a handsome mother, and that would account for\\nthis. But it will not account for the fact used advisedly\\nthat, when hypnotized by his father, the eyes of this\\nboy possess all the wonderful faculties of the Roentgen\\nrays. Outside clothing, linen, underwear, the human\\nskin and flesh itself, are as nothing in his sight. The\\nbones of the subject stand out in bold relief, and the\\norgans of the person upon whom he may be looking\\nare spread before him as though on a chart. Further-\\nmore\u00e2\u0080\u0094and most important of all these miraculous eyes\\nbehold the human anatomy in its true colors, red, white\\nbrown, even to the blue of the venous blood. This is\\nimpossible with the X rays. Under its use everything\\nappears of the same shade.\\nBut this supernormal gift entails its responsibilities.\\nThe boy is unable to remain under the hypnotic influence\\nfor longer than fifteen minutes at a time, and when awakened\\nby his father from the trance is at first weak and faint.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0237.jp2"}, "238": {"fulltext": "224 HYPNOTISM.\\nIt is undoubtedly a strain upon his nervous system, and\\nwisely has his father decided not to ask him to undergo it\\noftener than once a week. This afternoon, for the benefit\\nof the readers of the Journal, Dr. Brett allowed his won-\\nderful boy to illustrate his marvelous faculty.\\n**To begin with, said Dr. Brett, I myself knew\\nnothing of this gift of my boy until the month of Nov-\\nember, 1897, when, one afternoon, upon coming out of a\\nhypnotic state into which I had cast him, he made use\\nof this curious expression, Oh, papa, I can see your\\nbones Of course, at first, I thought it was only an\\nillusion, but when he began to describe lo me my anat-\\nomy as though he had it spread out before him on a chart,\\nI began to realize that I was on the verge of a mighty\\ndiscovery. The idea of anything supernatural did not occur\\nto me I am not in any sense a spiritualist. I do not claim\\nthat this is supernatural. I only say that it must be super-\\nnormal, as neither the doctors with whom I have talked\\nover the case nor I myself have ever heard of a similar\\ncase.\\n.Since the time of the first discovery of his gift, Leo, as\\nhis mother and I call him, has demonstrated it in probably\\na hundred instances. In the presence of Professor John S.\\nFlagg, of Boston, a member of the faculty of the College\\nof Physicians and Surgeons, Leo plainly saw and indi-\\ncated the brain flashes of the sensory and motor nerves\\nfrom the brain centres to the arm, and back again.\\nAnd, as if to make the evidence doubly sure, he indicated\\nby his fingers the very spots in the cerebrum as the origin\\nplaces of the flashes in which scientists have agreed are\\nlocated the centres for controlling the movements of the\\nupper extremities.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0238.jp2"}, "239": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM, 225\\nThe experiments I am about to now reveal to you\\nhave been made within the past year, and some of them\\nwithin the past week. Only so recently as Thursday of\\nlast week, June 15, I was called into consultation with Drs.\\nChase and Allen, of Randolph, in the case of the three-\\nyear-old daughter of Mr. F. H. Libby, of that town. The\\nchild had been playing in the yard with some of the older\\nchildren, and they said that they had seen her swallow a\\ncent. When questioned at length, they stuck to the story,\\nand the first two doctors who were called in physicked\\nthe child very strongly. Dr. Chase, who was the last\\nphysician called by the parents of the suffering child, called\\nDr. Allen into consultation, and later they both called me\\ninto it. The question came up at once whether the little\\none had or had not swallowed the coin. We were unable\\nto agree, and, with the consent of my brother physicians,\\nI was allowed to introduce Leo into the case. I hyp-\\nnotized him, and asked him to examine the organs of\\nthe apparently dying child, as she lay stretched upon\\nthe bed before him. He almost at once declared there\\nwas no cent in the child s stomach or intestines, but\\nthat there was a mass of some kind, just below the\\npylorus. Furthermore, he told us that the intestines of\\nthe little girl were red and inflamed for a considerable\\ndistance. Of course, the violent physicking of the child\\nwould account for this. On the evening of that day\\nthe child died, and Drs. Chase and Allen and myself\\nperformed an autopsy on the body the next day (Friday).\\nWe found no cent in the body, but we did find the mass (of\\nfibrous tissue) just below the pylorus, as Leo had described.\\nLast winter, Leo was with me one day when I was\\ncalling upon the family of Dr. Allen, mentioned in the last", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0239.jp2"}, "240": {"fulltext": "226 HYPNOTISM.\\nexperiment, and Mrs. Allen, the doctor s wife, asked him if\\nhe could describe her ailments. He said that he thought\\nhe could, and I hypnotized him. He at once began to\\ndescribe all the symptoms of gouty rheumatism, even\\ngoing so far as to describe the chalky deposits in the\\njoints. He also described the thickening and inflamma-\\ntion of the right sciatic nerve. The diagnosis, according\\nto Dr. Allen himself, was exactly right. Mrs. Allen had\\nbeen for years a sufferer from gouty rheumatism, and\\nespecially from sciatic rheumatism on the right side. To\\ntest him further, before I released him from the trance,\\nMrs. Allen asked him whether or not she had eaten her\\ndinner. I think so, said Leo. Your stomach looks as\\nthough it were filled with dishwater (chyme).\\nOne of the strongest and at the same time most\\nemphatic experiments that Leo has ever performed was\\nthat of the case of Mrs. Randall. In the month of\\nFebruary last while visiting in Boston, I brought my\\nboy to see Dr. F. H. Burt, an old medical friend of mine,\\nwho is the head of Bart s Hospital, of Massachusetts\\nAvenue. Dr. Burt was already acquainted with Leo s\\npeculiarities, and we were, if I remember, talking about\\nthem when the matron of the establishment, Mrs. Randall,\\nentered the office. The doctor had spoken to her of\\nLeo Brett, and she was anxious to test him. She was\\nthen a fine figure of a woman, stout, well set up and\\napparently in the best of health with the exception of\\na somewhat toublesome cough. Dr. Burt introduced Leo\\nto her, and she said to him, Do you think you could\\ntell what is the matter with me? *Yes, I think so,\\nsaid the boy. I hypnotized him and told him to examine\\nher. Papa, said the boy, after a minute, I can see a", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0240.jp2"}, "241": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 227\\ngreat big sore in her lung, just where the two are joined\\ntogether, and around it it looks as though it had been\\nbleeding. That was enough for Mrs. Randall. She left\\nthe office in a hurry, and when she had gone the doctor\\ntold me that she had had two hemorrhages within a\\nweek, although she made little of them. That was in\\nFebruary. On June i, I had received a note from Dr.\\nBurt telling me that Mrs. Randall had just died from\\nhasty consumption.\\nThe next experiment is, perhaps, at once the most\\ninteresting and convincing of any in which Leo has taken\\na part. I cannot give you the name of the patient she is\\none of my own private patients, and I am well acquainted\\nwith her family. Although I do not make her name\\npublic, I do not wish it to be understood that she is not\\nwilling to substantiate my statements. If necessary, she\\nwill come forward to back me up.\\nThe patient in question, is an elderly lady of per-\\nhaps sixty years of age. She came to me from out of\\ntown to have her case diagnosed. She had been to many\\ndoctors, and they had almost unanimously pronounced her\\ndisease to be a cancer of the liver. Of course, this\\nmeant certain death, and a very painful one. I refused to\\ndeclare my diagnosis until Leo had been called into my\\nstudy to aid. Leo, said I, I want you to compare this\\nlady s liver with mine. In hardly a minute the boy\\nanswered, to quote his own words, Why, papa, her liver,\\nis much larger than yours. Besides, yours is smooth,\\nwhile hers is all covered with bunches like hubbly ice.\\nYours is brown, while hers is brown all streaked with\\nwhite, like fancy chocolate cake. The white stuff looks\\nto me like candle grease.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0241.jp2"}, "242": {"fulltext": "228 HYPNOTISM.\\nThat was sufficient. The correct source of her trouble\\nhad been shown to me. She was suffering from amyloid\\ndegeneration of the liver, which, while dangerous, is\\ndistinctly not cancer. This, notwithstanding the diagnoses\\nof all the other physicians she has visited. I am now\\ntreating this patient for the above disease, and it has at\\nleast made no progress. Had it been a case of cancer of\\nthe Hver she would have been dead long ago.\\nJust one more before I close. There came to me\\nin September, 1898, a married lady of about thirty-five,\\nsuffering from what I was convinced was valvular dis-\\nease of the heart. So far as a physician can I examined\\nher with the stethoscope, and her condition appeared to\\nme to be alarming so much so, in fact, that I was at\\na loss to understand how she managed to be alive at\\nall. To obtain a clear idea, with the patient s consent,\\nI called Leo into the consultation room and told him to\\nexamine the lady s heart. In a minute, he said I can\\nsee her heart and the valves. One of them opens slowly,\\nas though it were stiff and tired. Sometimes it shuts,\\nand sometimes it does not. When it don t the blood\\nruns back. I asked him, Why, how many valves are\\nyou looking at? Three, of course, was his reply;\\nthe other two are all right.\\nThis testimony, concluded the doctor, ought to\\nbe enough to convince any one of the boy s abnormal\\ngifts. As I said before, I do not claim the boy s peculiar\\nability as supernatural. I do not believe in the super-\\nnatural. But I do say that they are supernormal.\\nDoctor, said the Journal correspondent, will you\\nallow your boy to examine me to see whether there is\\nanything the matter with me or not?", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0242.jp2"}, "243": {"fulltext": "HYPNO TISM. 229\\nIt is strictly against my rule, said the doctor,\\nbut perhaps it may serve a useful purpose in the end.\\nLeo, I am going to ask you to examine this gentleman.\\nNow, close your eyes. (A minute elapsed.) Now, open\\nthem; look at him, and tell me what you see.\\nThe boy was standing leaning on the back of a\\nchair with a serious, eager sort of expression on his\\nface. While he appeared to be entirely conscious of\\nothers in the room, his fixed, concentrated attention\\nwas centered on the Journal man. Slowly he began to\\nspeak in his natural voice. I see nothing at all the\\nmatter with him, but I think there has been something\\nthe matter with one of his arms a long time ago. It s\\nthe right one. Ah, now I see more clearly (as the sun\\nshone out from behind a cloud). It has been broken\\nin two places at the wrist. And besides, the muscles\\nand chords look as though they had been wrenched\\nfrom where they ought to have been, and they look to\\nme as though they never had gone back again. The\\nplace where the break was in the top of the wrist looks\\nas if the bones had been grown into one. It s a funny\\nsort of a looking arm, anyway.\\nSnap! went the doctor s finger, and the boy came\\nto his normal senses in a second. He looked rather\\nfrightened, as though he had been doing something he\\nought not to but this expression only lasted a minute.\\nIn another minute he was out in the yard and away on\\nhis bicycle.\\nFor the benefit of Journal readers, the Journal\\ncorrespondent will explain that, fifteen years ago, when\\na schoolboy, his right arm was broken in two places\\nat the wrist, precisely as Leo Brett described it. The", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0243.jp2"}, "244": {"fulltext": "230 HYPNOTISM.\\nmuscles and chords were also wrenched and bruised,\\nand the swelling never entirely subsided, so that the\\nboy s further description of the way that the arm looked\\nwas microscopic in its completeness. The Journal cor-\\nrespondent will also add that never in his life up. to\\nto-day, had he ever met Dr. Brett and his boy Leo.\\nAgain, he was separated from, the boy by about seven\\nfeet. He wore his ordinary clothing, coat, linen and\\nunderwear, so that it was impossible for the boy to have\\nin any way seen the arm.\\nDoctor, this is all very wonderful. But how do you\\naccount for the boy s gift asked the Journal man.\\nI don t account for it, was the doctor s reply.\\nThat is beyond my power. But let me tell you some-\\nthing about his characteristics. In the first place, ever\\nsince he began to take notice of things, his mother and\\nI have noticed his wonderful power of concentration,\\nexclusion and application. Shortly after I begun to hyp-\\nnotize him, I early recognized that he would prove a\\nwonderful hypnotic subject. I found that hypnotism seemed\\nto develop this power of concentration still more, even to\\nthe point of excluding the sunlight My theory of his\\ngift is that his retina, his optic thalmus or his mental\\nperception must be something altogether out of the nor-\\nmal, so much so that medical science has hitherto had\\nno record of a similar case.\\nWhen I have asked him how things appear to him\\nwhen hypnotized, he tells me that he sees a reddish-\\nblack background, with a pale green light irradiating\\nthe object at which he looks, emanating from it. This\\nis exactly the same as the effect with the Crookes tube.\\nYet, when I introduced hmi to the fluoroscope at the", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0244.jp2"}, "245": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. -31\\nMechanics Fair in Boston last Fall, he threw it down\\nin disgust, after a look, and said Pooh I can see\\nplainer than that with my own eyes\\nDr. Frank Wallace Brett, father of this wonderful\\nboy, was born in the old Massachusetts town of Hing-\\nham. May 14, 1861. He graduated from the Hingham\\nHigh School and from the Bridgewater Normal School,\\nin the class of 1880. In 1882, he accepted the post of\\nPrincipal of Hanover Academy, and taught there for six\\nyears, leaving in 1888 to become Principal of the Highland-\\nville (Needham) Avery Grammar School, where he taught\\nfor three and one-half years. He was graduated from the\\nBoston College of Physicians and Surgeons in 1894,\\nreceiving the degree of M. D., and settled in South\\nBraintree for the practice of his profession.\\nNote. The publisher of this book feels convinced that this\\nboy s development is but the commencement of an era of many\\nmore similar cases, and trusts it will increase the interest in and\\nstudy of the science of Hypnotism, perhaps by some that\\nheretofore have pronounced it unworthy of investigation.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0245.jp2"}, "246": {"fulltext": "\u00e2\u0080\u00a232 HYPNOTISM.\\nCHAPTER XVI.\\nHYPNOTISM.\\nThe dangers of Hypnotism.\\nIs hypnotism in itself dangerous to those submitted\\nto it? Dr. Bernheim says: From experience, I do\\nnot hesitate in stating that, when it is well-managed, it\\ndoes not produce the slightest harm. It does not inter-\\nfere with the functions of organic life we have seen that\\nrespiration and circulation are not influenced in subjects\\nwhose minds are at rest. If, in the first sittings, some\\nsubjects manifest nervous phenomena, such as muscular\\ntwitchings, shortness of breath, discomfort, acceleration of\\nthe pulse, and if some hysterical subjects have convulsive\\nparoxysms during the operation, these symptoms, auto-\\nsuggestive so to speak, are due to moral emotions, to a\\nsentiment of fear, and always disappear in the following\\ntreatment, thanks to a quieting suggestion which brings\\nback confldence. When the habit has been formed, the\\nsubjects go to sleep peacefully and naturally and awake\\nin the same way, without the slightest discomfort, if the\\noperator has been careful to suggest no discomfort upon\\nwaking.\\nIn my already long practice, I have never seen any\\nharm produced by sleep induced according to our method.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0246.jp2"}, "247": {"fulltext": "Figr. (6.) Three Persons passing: into Hypnotic Sleep.\\nOrigrinal Portraits. Copyright by M. Young, Aug. 1 899.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0247.jp2"}, "248": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0248.jp2"}, "249": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 233\\nfor the suggestion is always present as a corrective to\\nany disagreeable symptoms which may arise.\\nThere is a danger which it is important to recognize\\nand which I am going to mention. After having been\\nhypnotized a certain number of times, some subjects\\npreserve a disposition to go to sleep spontaneously.\\nSome have been hardly awakened when they fall to sleep\\nagain of themselves in the same hypnotic sleep. Others\\nfall asleep thus during the day. This tendency to auto-\\nhypnotization may be repressed by suggestion. It is\\nsufficient to state to the subject during sleep that when\\nonce awakened, he will be completely awake, and will not\\nbe able to go to sleep again spontaneously during the day,\\nOthers are too easily susceptible to hypnotization when\\nthey have often been put into somnambulism. The first\\ncomer may sometimes put them into this condition by\\nsurprise, simply closing their eyes. Such a susceptibility\\nto hypnotism is a real danger. Delivered over to the mercy\\nof anyone, deprived of psychical and moral resistance,\\ncertain somnambulists thus become weak and are moulded\\nby the will of the suggestionists.\\nThose moralists who are careful of human dignity,\\nand who are pre-occupied with thought of such great\\npossibilities of danger, are in the right. They are right to\\ncondemn a practice which may rob man of his free-will\\nwithout the possibility of resistance on his part they\\nwould be a thousand times right, if the remedy were not\\nside by side with the evil. When we foresee such a tend-\\nency in our cases of somnambulism, we take care to say\\nduring sleep (and it is a good rule to follow^) Nobody\\nwill be able to hypnotize you in order to relieve you,\\nunless it be your physician And the subject, obedient", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0249.jp2"}, "250": {"fulltext": "234 HYPNOTISM.\\nto the command, is refractory to any foreign suggestion.\\nOne day, I tried to hypnotize an excellent somnambu-\\nlist whom I had already hypnotized several times I\\ncould not succeed. I called M. Liebault to aid me;\\nhe hypnotized her in a few seconds. I then asked her\\nwhy I had not succeeded. She told me that, sev^eral\\nmonths before, M. Beaunis had suggested during sleep\\nthat M. Liebault and himself were the only ones who\\ncould hypnotize her. This idea, written on her mind, and\\nof which she was not conscious in the waking condition,\\nhad forwarned her against me. Thus, the danger of a\\ntoo great susceptibility to a suggestion may be forestalled\\nby suggestion itself\\nBut another order of dangers may result from pro-\\nvoked hallucinations, and here I should speak as I think.\\nDoubtless inoffensive hallucination provoked at long\\nintervals, whether hypnotic or post-hypnotic, trouble the\\nmind momentarily, in the same way as do dreams, but the\\nequilibrium is quickly re-established as soon as the hal-\\nlucinatory dream has disappeared.\\nIs it the same of these hallucinations that are\\nfrequently suggested to the imagination In the long\\nrun may not some trouble remain in the mind? Is it\\nnot to be feared that a more or less marked derange-\\nment of the intellectual faculties may survive I should\\nnot like to state that certain delicate brains, predisposed\\nto mental alienation, could not receive serious harm\\nfrom inopportune and awkward experiments of this kind,\\nknowing that all emotion, all violent disturbance can\\nmake an insanity bud out, the diathetic germ of which,\\noften hereditary, is inherent in the organism. I simply\\nshould say that in the many experiments which I have", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0250.jp2"}, "251": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 235\\nperformed, I have never known any psychical trouble\\nto result.\\nAnother real danger Is this After many hypno-\\ntizatlons, after many hallucinations provoked during sleep,\\ncertain subjects become susceptible to suggestion and\\nhallucination in the waking condition.\\nTheir minds realize with extreme facility every con-\\nception insinuated every idea becomes an act, every\\nimage evoked becomes a reality they no longer dis-\\ntinguish between the real world and the Imaginary world\\nsuggested. The majority, it is true, are only thus suscep-\\ntible to hallucination through the one person who is\\naccustomed to hypnotize them.\\nBut among these subjects, especially if the physician\\nhas not taken the precaution to attribute a monopoly\\nof the ability to give suggestion to himself, some may be\\nsusceptible to hallucination and suggestion at the hand\\nof any one who knows how to force it upon them.\\nAnd if this extreme susceptibility to hallucination\\nis once produced. If this nervous disease is once created,\\nIt Is not always easy to cure or to improve it by a new\\nsuggestive Interference. But it is not necessary to subject\\nthe human mind to influences of this sort. Doubtless,\\nsome experiments of hallucination induced from time to\\ntime are inoffensive, if they are performed with reserve\\nrepeated frequently upon the same subject they may become\\ndangerous.\\nDr. Bernheim says Must we proscribe a thmg wnich.\\nmay be efficacious, because the abuse of It is injurious\\nNo one proscribes wine, alcohol, opium, quinine, because\\nthe immoderate or intemperate use of these substances\\nmay bring about accidents. Doubtless suggestion used", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0251.jp2"}, "252": {"fulltext": "236 HYPNOTISM.\\nby dishonest or awkward men is a dangerous practice.\\nLaw can and should intervene to repress its abuse.\\nSuggestion is only beneficial when used prudently\\nand i7itellige7itly iox a therapeutic end. It is the physician s\\npart to separate the useful from the harmful effect, and to\\napply it to the relief of his patients.\\nDr. Moll says The danger of hypnotism has been\\nenormously exaggerated. The inhabitants of a little town\\nonce left off eating potato soup because a woman fell down-\\nstairs and broke her neck half an hour after eating same.\\nConclusions have been drawn in the same way here, and\\nthis sort of reasoning is not uncommon. If a person was\\nhypnotized, and later on had some ailment or other,\\nstraightway the ailment was ascribed to hypnotism. If we\\nreason thus, we should have to say that Carlsbad causes\\napoplexy, for Mr. X. had an attack of apoplexy, a\\nfortnight after he returned from Carlsbad, etc. Many\\nthings could be proved in this way.\\nI should hardly have thought it possible that such\\nlogic should be used in scientific circles. It is true I\\nhave often heard that when patients come back from a\\nwatering-place without having been cured which must\\nhappen sometimes they are dismissed with the comforting\\nassurance that they will feel the effects later on. Till now,\\nI thought this was a bad joke, or at best, an effort to con-\\nsole the patient I never believed that such a principle\\nwas really credited in the medical world. If a patient\\ngot better or worse six months after his return from a\\nwatering-place, I should not be inclined to ascribe the effect\\nto the baths, because in the interval other things might\\nhave affected the patient. Like Pauly, I must on these\\ngrounds reject the connection found by Binswanger, Ziems-", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0252.jp2"}, "253": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM, 237\\nsen, between hypnosis and ailments long subsequent to It.\\nBesides, If I were to accept their sophisms, It would be\\neasy for me to prove In the same way that modern medicine\\nmade mankind ill; for what medicine might not produce\\nimportant results half a year after its administration\\nWhat doctor has ever argued In this way? Recently\\nFriedrlch, formerly an assistant of Zlemssens, has written\\nat length on the dangers of hypnotism he has, however,\\nbeen refuted by Forel, Schrenck-Notzing, and Bernhelm,\\nwho show the cases in which hypnosis Is supposed to\\nhave had dangerous results, are published In careful detail,\\nit becomes clear\u00e2\u0080\u0094 as In the cases of Seglas, Briand, Lvvoff,\\netc. either that important precautions were neglected, or\\nelse that a connection between hypnosis and the disease\\nwere assumed according to the principle, post hoc ergo\\npropter hoc\\nHowever, I by no means deny that there are certain\\ndangers in the improper use of hypnotism.\\nMendel maintains that it induces nervousness; that\\nnervous people grow worse, and sound people nervous\\nthrough Its use but Forel and Schrenck-Notzing think\\nthis is a mistake of Mendel s, caused by his using the\\nmethod of Braid s instead of suggesting hypnosis verl)-\\nally. Dr. Moll, agrees that fixed attention too long\\ncontinued may have unpleasant effects. It may be fol-\\nlowed by nervous debility or nervous excitement. But\\nI have never seen anyone become nervous whom I hyp-\\nnotized verbally^ and to whom I made no exciting\\nsuggestion. This is important to remember. Whoever\\nhas seen the difference between a subject who has received\\nan exciting suggestion, and one who has received a soothing\\none, will agree that as much good can be done in one way", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0253.jp2"}, "254": {"fulltext": "238 HYPNOTISM.\\nas harm in the other. A man who makes absurd sugges-\\ntions to amuse himself and satisfy his curiosity, without\\na scientific aim, need hardly be astonished if he produces\\nailments. Sawolshskaja is right in warning against such\\nsports. I have observed that patients are often worse\\non days following bad dreams. Can we be astonished\\nthat a person who has awaked from hypnosis during an\\nimaginary fire should feel ill after it? Such suggestions\\nshould not be made at all, for most of the danger lies in\\nunpleasant suggestions, and there is never any need of\\nmaking them. Too much cannot be said against nypno-\\ntism being used for such purposes. Great care should\\nbe taken, to only use pleasant words to the subject,\\nand only make pleasing suggestions, and always be sure\\nthat the subject is soothed, and in a happy frame of\\nmind before the waking. This is the most important\\npoint. Mistakes can be made of little consequence, pro-\\nvided the subject is thoroughly and properly wakened in\\nthe manner used at Nancy, and by all who follow the\\nprescriptions of that School. Dr. Moll asks of those who\\ntalk of the dangers of hypnotism, if they have taken\\ncare that the awaking should be complete I know that\\nmost people are not at all aware that they should do\\naway with the suggestion entirely. They think it enough to\\nblow on the subject s face, and I am astonished that more\\nmischief is not done in consequence of insufficient technical\\nknowledge. It is this that is dangerous, not hypnotism.\\nNo wonder that there are sometimes unpleasant conse-\\nquences. It is as necessary to know the right way in\\nthis case as in using a catheter.\\nTo show how a suggestion should be done away\\nwith, I will suppose that an exciting suggestion has been", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0254.jp2"}, "255": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 239\\nmade to a subject, who is disturbed in consequence.\\nOne should say something hke this What excited\\nyou, is just now gone, all gone it was only a dream, and\\nyou were mistaken to believe it. Now be quiet. You\\nfeel quiet and comfortable. It is easy to see you are\\nperfectly comfortable. Only when this has succeeded\\nshould the subject be awakened; and this should not\\nbe done suddenly there are reasons for thinking it better\\nto prepare the patient for waking. I generally do it by\\nsaying, I shall count up to three. Wake when I say\\nthree; or, Count to three, and then wake.\\nThese three rules should always be followed\\nFirst. Avoid continuous stimulation of the senses as\\nmuch as possible.\\nSecond.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Avoid all mentally exciting suggestions as\\nmuch as possible.\\nThird. Do away with all suggestion, carefully, but\\nsurely before the awakening.\\nThis inethod caymot cause nervousness, and If the above\\nrules are properly followed there can be no danger in\\nhypnosis.\\nForel mentions some slight accompanying ailments,\\nwhich are sometimes found after hypnosis, though they\\ncannot be thought a real danger, and are often the result\\nof auto-suggestion, or of a bad method. There may be\\nfatigue and languor, heaviness of the limbs, etc., after\\nwaking. It is easy to prevent these by suggestion in\\ndeep hypnosis. It is different in the light ones, though\\nI believe a clever operator can do it by post-hyp7iotic\\nsuggestion even here. In other cases it is better to\\nprevent fatigue by suggestion before awakening in any\\ncase it is a good plan to get rid of It at the first sitting.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0255.jp2"}, "256": {"fulltext": "240 HYPNOTISM.\\nas otherwise it increases by auto-suggestion at each\\nsitting, and can finally be hardly overcome. This feeling\\nof fatigue in the light hypnosis is the same we sometimes\\nhave after an unsound sleep. All these inconveniencies\\nare slight, and can for the most part be avoided.\\nThe main dangers of hypnotism are not those just\\nmentioned, which appear seldom, even when improper\\nmethods are used. The real ones show themselves more\\neasily. They are, the increased tendency to hypnosis, and\\nheightened susceptibility to suggestion in the waking\\nstate. This too great susceptibility to hypnosis shows\\nus how careful we should be with the method of Braid,\\nwhich is the most frequent cause of this for accident-\\nally fixing the eyes on some object may cause a sudden\\nhypnosis, simply because the idea of an earlier hypnosis\\nis thereby vividly recalled.\\nThe last-mentioned danger can be guarded against by\\nrepeatedly making some such suggestion as follows to the\\nsubject before waking him. Nobody will ever be able\\nto hypnotize you without your consent you will never\\nfall into hypnosis against your wish nobody will be able\\nto suggest anything to you when awake; you need never\\nfear that you will have sense delusions, etc., as you do\\nin hypnosis, you are perfectly able to prevent them.\\nThis is the surest way to avoid the danger. Such are the\\ndangers of hypnotism, and such the methods of meeting\\nthem. Their antidote is suggestion, and they are no\\nhindrance to hypnotic treatment. They can be avoided\\nby a proper use of hypnotism.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0256.jp2"}, "257": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 241\\nCHAPTER XVII.\\nHYPNOTISM.\\nBrief Explanations of Important Points in Hypnotism Special\\nAdvice and Instructions to Young Experimenters, and Par-\\nticular Reference to Inducing Hypnotic Sleep and Awaking,\\nWe have in the preceding chapters of this book given\\nthe methods used by the most celebrated physicians,\\nsurgeons, and scientists in the world, to produce hypnotic\\nsleep. Their names are well-known throughout all lands,\\nand their ability and judgment is unquestionable. This\\nbook may fall into the hands of a few readers who m^ay need\\nsome further or plainer explanations on this great subject of\\nHypnotism. As many people desire .to learn every\\nimportant point connected with it, and become proficient\\nhypnotizers, and therefore feel themselves fully competent\\nto teach the art to others, to all such we can only say,\\nthat if you follow the full directions given, you cannot\\nfail to succeed in every particular. You must have the\\nconfidence of your subjects, and impress upon their mind,\\nthat you will produce sleep and benefit them thereby. You\\nmust feel yourself fully competent to the task, and know\\nthat you can hypnotize others.\\nIn case you are not successful in your first attempts\\nto hypnotize, you must not allow yourself to feel dis-", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0257.jp2"}, "258": {"fulltext": "242 HYPNOTISM,\\ncouraged. This book has made you the master of the\\nmost wonderful science or art of this century. You are\\nHable to hypnotize the first person you use as a sub-\\nject, but you may try several before you will succeed.\\nYou possess the knowledge, and there is no reason\\nwhatever why you should not become as good an operator\\nas any other person. It is unnecessary to again repeat\\nhere the different methods to produce the hypnotic\\nstate. It is given quite fully ten different times in the\\npreceding chapters. But we desire to impress the reader\\nto study every page, and perfect themselves in every\\nstep that they will necessarily take in becoming a thor-\\nough hypnotist. It may seem at first almost incredible\\nto a beginner, that he can learn to hypnotize so quickly\\nand perfectly as thousands have already done. But he\\nmust abandon all such ideas, and he will very soon witness\\nthe most marvelous feats, produced by the simple methods\\nhe is using on his subjects.\\nYou will find that those you hypnotize will obey\\nyour commands as perfectly as a soldier hastens to obey\\nthe orders of his superior officer. What at first will\\nastonish the operator most will be to see his subject\\nsleep, because you commanded him to sleep,^ then to see\\nhim carry out your suggestions and think as you direct\\nhim to think. You must in a very mild way impress\\nupon your subjects that you want them to sleep, and\\nin a very short time you will waken them refreshed and\\ncontented. You must feel positive and in fact know :hat\\nyou can hypnotize a large percentage of the subjects\\nthat desire you to, and if they fully believe that you\\ncan produce the hypnotic sleep in their cases, it will\\ngo very far towards your success. After you have", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0258.jp2"}, "259": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 243\\nhypnotized one or two, you will have galnea so much\\nconfidence in your ability to control others, that it will\\nbe no task to you any longer, and you can go before\\nanyone and feel as bold as if you were just graduated\\nfrom college. You can study this book and perfect\\nyourself, and give parlor entertainments, cure such dis-\\neases as rheumatism, opium habit, tobacco habit, cigarette\\nhabit, nervous prostration, stammering, violent headaches,\\nalcoholism, etc.\\nYou will observe all through this book that subjects\\nwho have been hypnotized before, are much easier to\\ncontrol than others, and if you know of any such person,\\ntry to get them as your subjects at first. Tell them\\nthat you are well read up in the science, and have the\\nbest authorities in the world to guide you in every\\nmove in hypnotism. Even show the book if necessary.\\nYoung people are generally quickly influenced, and if\\nthe operator follows the instructions here given in every\\nchapter, he will very soon observe that his efforts are\\nmeeting with wonderful success. In several chapters in\\nthis book, you will be instructed in the methods and\\nthe directions given that you are to follow to become\\nan expert in this art. You must never allow any person\\npresent to make foolish or discouraging remarks to the\\nsubject before or while you are hypnotizing him. He must\\nnot speak until he is told to do so by you. He must\\nconcentrate his thoughts on an effort to sleep, as thereby\\nhe is assisting the operator in this wonderful phenomena.\\nGive the subject time to become drowsy and sleep will come\\neighty to ninety times out of every hundred. Speak very\\nsoftly to him when you observe the changes in his facial\\nexpression. Speak as if he was a child you loved, and", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0259.jp2"}, "260": {"fulltext": "2 14 HYPNOTISM.\\nlet the tone of your voice be low and sweet, not whining,\\nbut expressive, and when you finally command him to sleep,\\ndo not speak as if you owned him body and soul, but\\nspeak as if you were positive he was asleep, and right\\nhere I beg to call attention to the waking method as used\\nin the School of Nancy, which you must study and become\\nproficient in. It is very important, and you will so\\nobserve when you have become a thorough hypnotizer.\\nAnd in this connection, it is well to read carefully Chap-\\nter XVI., as the waking methods are explained very\\nminutely.\\nAfter your subject has passed into the hypnotic sleep,\\ndo not speak to him for a few minutes, and he will become\\nquiet as if he were in natural sleep, then you can say to\\nhim pleasantly, You are sleeping soundly, you will sleep a\\nshort time, but you will not wake until I order you to. Be\\ncalm and enjoy this little nap. You can suggest some\\npleasant view in the distance, such as What a beautiful\\nsunset you see over there, pointing to it with your right\\nhand. *You have a grand summer house just beyond\\nthe turn in the road. You see the sheep on the side of\\nthe hill, and the children in the boat sailing on the lake.\\nListen You can hear their voices singing, Home, sweet\\nhome. Oh, how happy you are now when you hear the\\nvoices of those you love. When you wake you will\\nremember what a beautiful sight you are witnessing.\\nNow, I do not intend to wake you suddenly, so when\\nI count ten, you will wake at that time, and you will\\nopen your eyes, and will feel well, refreshed and happy.\\nWhen you have counted ten, say Wake.\\nWe call attention to illustration (Fig. i). Notice the\\nearnestness of both hypnotizer and subject. The operator s", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0260.jp2"}, "261": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM, 245\\nexpression is calm, thoughtful, and he knows his subject\\nwill sleep. The subject is there to be hypnotized, and\\nthat is the belief of the operator, or the subject never would\\nhave called there. He has confidence in the operator, and\\nbelieves he will benefit him. You must get your subjects\\ninto just that state of mind that is so beautifully illus-\\ntrated in that picture.\\nIt is the method used in the hospitals of France and\\nGermany, and the position of the operator and subject\\nis very beautifully and correctly shown. It is known as\\nDr. Liebault s method, and is extremely simple, and easy\\nto learn bv the experimenter. (See Chap. IV., of this\\nbook).\\n(Fig. 2). Is Youyig s Method. The right hand of the\\noperator is held about 12 to 15 inches from the subject s\\neyes, the hand being closed with the exception of the\\nfirst two fingers which are extended (as in illustration)\\nat such an angle that the gaze shall be directed upwards\\nin a strained manner. The left hand of the operator is\\nraised as high as his head, and nearly two feet away\\nfrom his right hand. It is a new method, and we think\\nsomewhat more expressive than others. But we do not\\nclaim that it produces hypnotic sleep any quicker than\\nthe one so generally used throughout all Europe. But\\nwe believe it is another step towards the advancement of\\nthis wonderful science.\\n(Fig. 3). The FasciJiafion Method. The subject and\\noperator should be seated in ordinary chairs such as ap-\\npear in the illustration. Place your thumbs against his\\nlet the subject gaze steadily in the operator s eyes, and\\ntell him to concentrate his thoughts entirely on sleep,\\nand think of that only. Arrange the chairs so that the", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0261.jp2"}, "262": {"fulltext": "246 HYPNOTISM.\\nsubject will feel at ease, his back against the chair. The\\noperator can lean forward, but do not suggest to the\\nsubject to change his position. Tell him not to speak\\nto you unless you request him to talk. In a short time\\nten or fifteen minutes, sometimes less, you will notice\\nslight twitching of the muscles of the face, and the eyes\\nappear dull, perhaps watery, and when these symptoms\\nappear, you can draw both of the subject s hands together\\nat the same time holding both his thumbs with your right\\nhand, and place your left hand on his forehead. He may\\nthen close his eyes. If he does not voluntarily, let your\\nleft hand move slowly down and close his eyelids, stroking\\nthem slightly with your fingers, and then return your left\\nhand again to the subject s hand as first held, his eyes now\\nbeing closed then say to him, You are resting pleasantly,\\nand you appear sleepy. You are sleepy very sleepy.\\nSleep.\\nIf your subject sleeps, he will imitate everything you\\ndo. You can swallow as if drinking, and the subject\\nwill swallow. You can raise your arm he will do the\\nsame. If you stand several feet apart, back to back, and\\na person pricks your leg with a needle, the subject will\\njump, although he does not see you. We refer the\\nreader to Chap. VIII., in which the method is treated\\nat length.\\n(Fig. 4).\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Think think deeply for an Instant without\\nfalling asleep. Arousing latent memories, after being\\nawakened from somnambulistic sleep. A most wonderful\\nphenomena, thoroughly explained in Chap. X.\\n(Fig. 5). The operator hypnotizing three persons at\\none time.\\n(Fig. 6). Three persons passing into hypnotic sleep.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0262.jp2"}, "263": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM. 247\\n(Fig. 7). Method used in therapeutics, and the method\\nused in curing cigarette smoking, opium, tobacco habit,\\nalcohohsm, and other dangerous habits. See Chap. 10.\\nIt is highly important that we call attention to Chap.\\nIII. The Nine Degrees of Hypnotism^ also the use and\\ndiscovery of suggestion.\\nYou will notice that the time necessary to hypnotize\\nwill generally vary from one minute to five minutes, and\\nthen again you will meet some who are thinking of some-\\nthing else, which often prevents them being influenced.\\nBut those may be hypnotized at some other sitting. When\\npeople are hypnotized they do not hear the voices of those\\npresent. Neither do they even see or know their own\\nrelatives in whose company they are. The operator can\\nintroduce the subject to any person in the room. If the\\nparty is his own wife, mother or sister, the operator can\\nsuggest that the ladies to be introduced are very important\\npersonages, mentioning the names of Queen Victoria or the\\nPresident s wife, and the subject will treat them with great\\ndignity and attention, and in the next suggestion, you can\\nsay to him that he must not encroach on the ladies time,\\nand bid them good evening, and the people present often\\nwitness then a wonderful sight, for the most rough, uncouth\\npersons when in the somnambuHstic state of hypnotism, are\\nchanged into the most polite and gentlemanly men, and\\nthe expression of the face is transformed as it were into\\nthe highest degree of refinement. By suggestion, you\\ncan direct the subject s mind in almost any direction\\ndesired. You can send him off far away to Manila,\\nand he will describe quite accurately the country he is\\nvisiting. You can say to him, why look off to the right\\nof you, there is a tremendous battle being fought, and", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0263.jp2"}, "264": {"fulltext": "248 HYPNOTISM.\\nhere to the left of you is a wedding party, and see\\nwhat a crowd of elegant ladies and gentlemen are there.\\nIf you watch the subject closely, you will notice that\\nhe hears the roar and din of battle, and if you ask him\\nhow that wedding is progressing his face will change\\nentirely when he answers you, but you must not make\\nthe second suggestion until the subject has fully described\\nthe first. When you have studied this book, and have\\nbecome a thorough hypnotizer, you will be able to originate\\nvery many new and startling manifestations that other\\noperators have not thought of; and if you wish to give\\nparlor exhibitions, or to entertain a family gathering or\\nan evening party, the more novel ideas you have to\\nshow them among those you hypnotize, the oftener you\\nwill be sought after, and in some places such a private\\nentertainment commands from $50 to $100. There are\\nmany suggestions that the reader may originate, many\\nof which might be very important, not to the subject\\nalone, but to his friends or relatives. Many people that\\nprocure this book, become teachers of the. science, and\\nthereby have a very considerable income from such an\\noccupation.\\nThe cataleptic or rigid state is, when the body becomes\\nstiff as a log. It is very simple, and very wonderful,\\nand to some people very amusing, but really we fail\\nto find any particular benefit arising from it. It can be\\nproduced by suggestion in the same manner as you tell\\nthe subject that he is King of England. See Chap. XIV.\\nYour limbs and your whole body are becoming hard and\\nrigid are the words that can be used.\\nHallucination, sense delusion, is thoroughly explained\\nin Chapter IX.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0264.jp2"}, "265": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM, 249\\nAlso telepathic suggestion. Auto-suggestion plays\\na most important part in hypnotism, and we hope every\\nstudent will give this part of the book earnest study\\nand attention.\\nPost-hypnotic suggestion is also taught in this book\\n(Chap. IX). It means that a patient will carry out any\\ninstructions given him when in a hypnotic sleep (by the\\ndoctor or operator) after he awakens. He will do the act\\napparently unconscious of having received any suggestion\\nfrom the operator. (See cases cited.)\\nSomnambulism. (See Chapter X.) Professor Bern-\\nhelm calls somnambulism the Seventh Degree of Hyp-\\nnotism. It is certainly the most wonderful part of this\\nyet misunderstood science. In this degree of hypnotism\\nthe operator feels as If he was standing face to face with\\nthe Soul of Man.\\nNote The preceding Illustrations (occupying 14 pages), none of which were\\nnumbered, therefore the following Pages will commence with the correct Folio 264.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0265.jp2"}, "266": {"fulltext": "264 MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE.\\nANIMAL MAGNETISM.\\nThe origin of Animal Magnetism is coeval with the\\ncreation of Eve. The extremely subtil and invisible fluid,\\nwhich when in contact with the animal brain, is capable\\nof performing all the phenomena of this wonderful science,\\nhad existed millions on millions of years anterior to the\\ncreation of man, and is pro-\\nbably coeval with the birth\\nof the trilobite, or even with\\ncreation itself. The sun s\\nrays must pass through a\\nsuitable medium to cause the\\nphenomenon of light so this\\ninvisible fluid continued un-\\nknown, though not inactive,\\nuntil some of its inherent\\nproperties were developed in\\npassing through a suitable\\nmedium, which was found to\\nbe the complicate and delicate\\nbrain of the highest order in\\nthe organized forms of crea-\\ntion.\\nThe smallest insect, the\\nmost simple form of vegeta-\\ntion, and the more noble formation of matter in man,\\nwere all mediums through which this fluid ever has. and\\nstill continues to flow, producing all the symmetry, beau-\\nty and phenomena of nature, which, to superficial minds,\\nare scarcely noticeable, because they are of such frequent\\nand incessant occurrence, and are classed with the pheno-\\nmena of the earth, only the first time the brain receives\\ntheir impression by the force of that mysterious fluid\\nthrough the medium of the senses. A child is in mute\\necstacy at the first sound of the spring-rattle. He sees it;\\nthe m ysterious fluid pervading all space, instantly im-\\npresses on his brain, through the delicate lens of the eye,\\nthe form of the instrument from which such strange\\nnotes had proceeded. He leaps with joy when he per-\\nceives it is made of wood, and analogous to other forms\\nof things, long since familiar to his senses, by repeated\\nexamination of the impression of similar objects retained\\nin the vast store-room of the brain. He seizes with delight", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0266.jp2"}, "267": {"fulltext": "MYSTEBIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 265\\nthe play-thing, and wonders that an instrument so simple\\nin its construction, could have caused him to wonder,\\nwhen the strange music caused by its vibrations were\\nfirst transmitted to his ear. He continues the manipula-\\ntions and finds amusement in the harmony of sounds, un-\\ntil the sympathy of the nervous system, that accurate\\ntuning key of nature s wind-harp, softens the harsh tones\\nof the rattle: when the whole forms a perfect chord of the\\nbrain, v/hich continues to amuse the senses, until mono-\\ntony fatigues the imagination, and a new and more curi-\\nous phenomenon is sought for, probably in the decom-\\nposition, by fire of the very toy which once sent forth\\nsuch strange sounds to the ear. He scarcely ceases to\\nwonder at the flame issuing from his lighted torch, when\\nhe is called to the window to scan a still more marvel-\\nlous phenomenon in the air, a kite a kite a paper\\nkite, buoyed aloft with a simple thread, is now the ob-\\nject of mute astonishment, followed by loud demonstra-\\ntions of joy, as the mysterious fluid conveys through\\nthe eager distended eye to the brain, a perfect impression\\nof the object which first held him mute in astonishment.\\nThe most learned among men are but cliildren in\\nembryo, when their researches in science are compared\\nwith the vast and unlimited field which remain unex-\\nplored. Innumerable are the forms imprinted on the\\nbrain in the life time of man. Each form was a pheno-\\nmenon; each in tm-n became familar; the whole becomes\\nmonotonous, and the imagination, aided by the inven-\\ntive genius of the brain, seeks among the countless\\nmillions of forms in creation for some new phenomena to\\nfeed the insatiate vortex of familar monotony.\\nIn the eager desire to leach after phenomena, the\\nreasoning faculties are dormant, and man is capable only\\nof admiring the wonderful affect on his brain without\\nknowing the cause which produced it; when with less\\neagerness and more reason, man could refer to his brain\\nwhich ever retains the impression received from innu-\\nmerable objects, among which may be discovered forms\\nsufficiently analogus to reconcile the most wonderful phe-\\nnomenon to the known and familiar laws of nature, con-\\ntinually in operation around us; so the effects of Animal\\nMagnetism continued to be seen, felt and admired in its\\nvarious modifications, long before it received a name\\namong the sciences of the earth. In a subsequent chap-\\nter, I will give the theory which harmonizes and reconciles\\nall the phenomena attending this science, and show the\\nnatural causes continually operating to produce it. I\\nwill, likewise, divest it of every supernatui*al attribute", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0267.jp2"}, "268": {"fulltext": "266 MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE.\\nwhich its votaries and opposers are so zealous in ascrib-\\ning to it. Enough for the present chapter will shoAV its\\njrigin, its rise, and developments, under the various\\n*vrongly applied names of charms, sorcery, beguile-\\n/aents, fortune-telling bj^ the Gipsies, and witchcraft of\\nthe ancients and moderns.\\nThe same fluid, which now unperceived by the keen-\\nest eye, is flowing through all organized matter, sup-\\nporting life, when in a just equilibrim, and producing\\nthe effects called Animal MA ifETiSM, when forced from\\nits natural channel, was in existence from the creation,\\nand commenced its unnatural effects on our race in the\\ngarden of Eden. The beguilement by the serpent was\\nmerely the effect of this mysterious fluid operating on\\nthe brain and nervous system of Eve. The same fluid\\nheld Adam in magnetic sleep when he committed the\\nunholy deed, for which, we, his posterity, are doomed\\nto suffer as penance. The snake at all times has used\\nthe same fluid in subduing the feathered tribe. The\\ncharm attributed to this animal, is the self same magne-\\ntism which is now the subject of wonder in its effects\\non the brain of civihzed man. The sorcerers of India\\nknew the power of this fluid, and used it for the vilest\\npurposes of deception. Witchcraft in all countries, was\\na branch of Animal Magnetism; it was the effect to the\\nmagnetic fluid, called a volition of the will, emanating\\nfrom the witch by the animal force of the nerves the\\nbewitched was the needle obeying the will of the\\nmagnet, and exhibiting all the phenomena common to\\nthe present science of Animal Magnetism. The pointing\\ndownwards of a crotched stick to indicate a stream of\\nwater flowing ttoough the earth; the rat-catcher s charm\\nand the soothing power possessed by many of curing\\nscalded and burned flesh, are volitions of the will, and\\nmodified branches of this heretofore intricate science.\\nThe Gipsies, as a commmunity, probably knew more of\\nthe astonishing power to be derived from the magnetic\\nfluid than any collective race of beings on the globe. Their\\naccurate predictions of future events are now subjects of\\nhistory, and thousands of the most respectable inhabi-\\ntants of Europe have testified to the perfect fulfilment of\\nevents predicted by this people. Their origin and habits\\nof life are as curious as their magnetic phenomena. It is\\nsupposed that they came from Hindoostan, from the fact\\nthat their language resembles in all its parts Hindoosta-\\nnee, notwithstanding they have been dispersed and\\nwand ^ring nearly four centuries in various parts of the\\nearth. Like the witches in our own country, the Gipsies", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0268.jp2"}, "269": {"fulltext": "MYSTERIES OP MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE 267\\nhave been persecuted in civilized Europe. In 1530, we\\nfind penal statutes against them in England; a subsequent\\nact, made it death for them to continue in the kingdom;\\nand it is recorded, to the disgrace of England, that thir-\\nteen Avere executed for this oH ence alone, but a few years\\nprior to the restoration; this cruel act was not repealed\\nuntil 1783 when the science of Animal Magnetism was\\nsufficiently improved to show the injustice and inhumanity\\nof legislating against the laws which Nature designed to\\nbe established for some benevolent purpose to mankind.\\nThe Gipsies were expeUed from France in the middle of\\nthe sixteenth century, and Spain in 1591. Though expel-\\nled by statutes, they have not been entirely extirpated in\\nany country they are still numerous in Asia, and the\\nnorthern parts of Europe, and their collective numbers\\nare estimated at nearly a million of souls. Though scat-\\ntered over the globe, they retain then* similar and origi-\\nnal character and habits; their principal business is for-\\ntune-telhng, in which they succeed to an extraordinary\\ndegree, by the aid of the magnetic fluid, which they are\\nso long accustomed to use, that they far surpass the best\\nmagnetic somnambulists of this country.\\nGrellman, who wrote the liistory of the Gipsies, and in-\\ndeed all persons who have been nmch acquainted with\\nthe habits and manners of this interesting race, regard\\nthem as a very singular phenomena; they are not changed\\nby chmate, and the sword has not been able to extirpate\\nthem. In all countries they are the same wandering tribe,\\nhving in small huts, and though subject to the laws of the\\ncountry in which they reside, they nevertheless have\\ntheir own government as a connnunity, the head of which\\nis termed Queen of the Gypsies. Many of them attain\\na very advanced age. Margaret Finch, who died at\\nBecke nham, in Kent, Oct. 24th, 1740, lived to the extraor-\\ndinary age of one hundred and nine years; Margaret held\\nthe title of queen; after traveling nearly a century, she\\nsettled at Norwood,, where her extraordinary powers in\\nAnimal Magnetism, (denominated fortune-telling by\\nthe superficial philosophers and unlettered people,) at-\\ntracted, as it does in all countries, numerous visitors of\\nthe most respectable families in the country.\\nProm a habit of sitting on the ground, with her chin\\nresting on her knees, the sinews at length became so con-\\ntracted that she could not assume any other position.\\nAfter h er death, they were obliged to enclose her in\\ndeep square box. Her funeral was attended by two\\nmourning coaches; a sermon was preached on the occa-\\nsion, and a great concourse of people attended the cere-", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0269.jp2"}, "270": {"fulltext": "268 MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE.\\niriony. Her portrait irow adorns the sign-post of a hotel\\nin Norwood, called the Oipsey House. In an adjoining\\ncottage, resides to this day, the grand-daughter of queen\\nMargaret; she inherits the title of queen, and has reached\\na very advanced age. She is the niece of queen Bridget,\\nwho was buried at Dulwich, in 1768. She inherits a\\nknowledge of the magnetic fluid, and continues to prac-\\ntice with great success. She is unlettered, like all the\\nrace of this extraordinary people, and therefore her\\npowers are sufficiently systeniatised to rank in the\\nsciences, and though denominated fortune-telhng by\\nsome, and supernatural revelations by others it is,\\nnevertheless, a branch and most constituent part of the\\nscience of Animal Magnetism.\\nA very extraordinary feature in the magnetic power of\\nthe Gipsies seems to have escaped altogether the notice\\nof scientific men, and Anmial Magnetizers in particular.\\nI allude to the great difference in the manipulations or\\nprocess to produce magnetic somnambulism; it is well\\nknown by all who have witnessed experiments in Animal\\nMagnetism, that the somnambuhc sleep is produced by\\nthe volition of the will, as it is termed, from the mag-\\nnetizer, and there requires two persons to produce a mag-\\nnetic sonmambuUst. When it is equally well known by\\nall who have had the pleasure of witnessing the Gipsy ex-\\nperiments, that each one within themselves, is both the\\nmagnetizer and the magnetized, without any fluid what-\\never emanating from a second person; the volition of each\\nwill, instantly forms its own brain into a somnambulist,\\nwho can, not only travel instantly to any part of the\\nglobe, and with an extraordinary power of clairvoy-\\nance, tell the situation of things and passing events, but\\nlikewise look into futurity for hundi-eds and even thous-\\nands of years, and predict with nmcli accuracy the time\\nplace and circumstances to be connected with extraordin-\\nary events. The pages of history are proloflc in the ful-\\nfilment of such predictions. I will select one from the\\nthousands on record, to confound the most skeptical\\nopposer of the science, and carry conviction to the most\\nstubborn unbelievers, of a fluid which has existed in all\\ntimes and in all ages, and is constantly offering to our\\nsenses the proof of its power, when directed by a skillful\\nmagnetic sonmambulist. The case I would otter, is that\\nof the Empress Josephine, the consort of Napoleon. Her\\ncharacter stands above the reach of suspicion, as regards\\na,n extenuation of the extraordinary prophecy; and its\\nequally extraordinary fulfilment is too weU known by all\\npersons, to require any extracts on my part from history,", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0270.jp2"}, "271": {"fulltext": "MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 2Gd\\nto prove it. I will relate the circumstance in Josephine s\\nown words; and, reader, if you are an unbeiiev^er in\\nAnimal Magnetism, observe well your own emotions,\\nwhile perusing the prophecy, you will feel the very hairs\\nraise from your head, caus edby the transmission of the\\nsame magnetic fluid, which enabled the sable African\\nwhen in St. Domingo, to predict for years in advance, the\\nevents connected with the history of France, equally as\\nImportant and extraordinary as the fall of the ancient\\nJerusalem. Read it; it is from her, who under the most\\ntrying situations and circumstances, proved the most\\nnoble as she was the most amiable of her sex.\\nOne day, some time before my first marriage, while\\ntaking my usual walk, I observed a number of negro girls\\nassembled around an old Avoman, engaged in telling their\\nfortunes. I drew near to observe their proceedings. The\\nold sibyl, on beholding me, uttered a loud exclamation\\nand almost by force seized my hand. She appeared to\\nbe under the greatest agitation. Amused at these absur-\\ndities, as I thought them, I allowed her to proceed say-\\ning, So you discover something extraordinary in my des-\\ntiny Yes. Is happiness or misfortune to be my lot\\nMisfortune. Ah stop and happiness too! You\\ntake care not to commit yourself, my good dame; your\\noracles are not the most intelligible. I am not permitted\\nto render more clear, said the woman raising her eyes\\nwith a mysterious expression towards heaven. But to\\nthe point, replied I, for my curiosity began to get excited;\\nwhat read you concerning me in futurity? What do I\\nsee in the future? You will not believe me if I speak\\nYes indeed I assure, you. Come, my good mother, what\\nam I to fear and hope? On your own head be ill then:\\nhsten: You will be married soon; that union will not be\\nhappy; you will become a widow, and then\u00e2\u0080\u0094 then you\\nwill be Queen of France! Some happy years will be yours;\\nbut you will die in an hospital, amid civil commotion.\\nOn concluding these words, continued Josephine,\\nthe old woman burst from the crowd, and hurried av/ay,\\nas fast as her limbs, enfeebled by age, would permit, i\\nforbade the bystanders to molest or banter the pretended\\nprophetess on this ridiculous p -ediction; and took occasion\\nfrom the seeming absurdity of the whole proceeding, to\\ncaution the young negresses how they gave heed to such\\nsilly matters. Henceforth, I thought of the affair only\\nto laugh at it with my relatives. But afterward, when\\nmy husband had perished on the scaffold, in spite of my\\nbetter judgment, this prediction forcibly recurred to my", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0271.jp2"}, "272": {"fulltext": "270 MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE.\\nmind after a lapse of years; and though I was myself then\\nin prison, the transaction daily assumed a less improbable\\ncharacter, and I ended by regarding the fulfilment as\\nalmost a matter of course.\\nThe event of this extraordinary prophcey is well Itnown;\\nHer second marriage was to General Napoleon Bonaparte\\n9th March, 1796. On the 18th May 1804, was fulfilled the\\nprophecy of Queen of France, and the circumstances\\nattending her death are equaHy well known. All France\\nhad been a slaughterhouse, and all France was an\\nhospital at the time of her death.\\nThis black woman, like Gipsies, was capable within\\nherself of controling the magnetic fluid; she was both the\\nmagnetizer and somnambulist; she required no assistance\\nfrom a second person to put her asleep. She was able by\\nher own will to draw the magnetic fluid from remote\\nspace and even from futurity, through her own nervous\\nsystem and brain, which thereby received an impression\\nof all things past, present and future, which could readily\\nby the asisstance of speech, be made known to the in-\\nquirer, who for want of a true philosophical reasoning\\nwould be unable to see the analogus workings of the\\nmagnetic fluid in objects around him, and lost in amaze-\\nment, would p\u00c2\u00bbronounce the oracle a supernatural pheno-\\nmenon, and the magnetic somnambulist or fotune-teUer\\nin concert with some unlvnown and mysterious power.\\nThis superiority in the Gipsy and African sorcerers over\\nthe more scientific magnetizers, induced me to pursue\\nwith more zeal my inquiries in Animal Magnetism. I ad-\\nmire simplicity, and have generally observed that Nature^s\\nmost perfect works are always most simple. I planed\\nmy experiments, with a view to ascertain if the somnam-\\nbulist could not magnetize herself, and my efforts were\\ncrowned with the most perfect success. The process is\\nextremly simple and every one who will read these sub-\\nsequent chapters, no matter what may be the state of his\\nor ner nervous system, or age can be a Somnambulist and\\nMagnetizer, within themselves without the aid of a sec-\\nond pei son, and perform all the phenomena common to\\nAnimal Magnetism.\\nIn describing a few of the various forms un^er which the\\nmagnetic phenomena have appeared, since the serpent s\\nconquest in Eden, until it assumed a name among the sci-\\nences, I would notice the phenomenon called Trance,\\nfrequently developed at protracted meetings, for religious", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0272.jp2"}, "273": {"fulltext": "MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 271\\nrites in churches, and more frequently in the forest, un-\\nder the name of camp meetings. Tlie trances are too\\nwell known to need much description from me in this\\nplace. I will notice them more fully, Avhen I explain the\\ncauses which produce it.\\nIt is the effect of the same mysterious fluid; the person\\naffected by it suddenly falls in a magnetic sleep; they are\\nthen magnetic somnambulists, and perform all the phe-\\nnomena peculiar to Animal Magnetism; their spirit freq-\\nuently leaves the body, and after traversing the confines\\nof earth, returns to its case of organized clay, and there,\\nthrough the organs of speech, relate to the wondering\\ncrowd all the incidents actually occuring at that mom-\\nent, perhaps thousands of miles distant, in some tavern\\nor convent, secm-ed by walls and doors of cemented stone\\nand iron, impenetrable to sight or animal strength of\\nmortals in possession of the ordinary functions of life.\\nEven more, they have been known in the short space\\nof an hour, to travel in spirit to the regions of punish-\\nment and reward for the dead, and on awaking, have re-\\nlated the cheering and heart-rending scenes to thousands\\nof the most respectable witnesses, many of whom are\\npreachers and can testify to the frequent occurrence of\\nsuch facts. The phenonomen known as clairvoyance,\\nis in the trance quite as remarkable as that exhibited in\\nthe usual magnetic sleep, and even far exceeds that of\\nreading a letter through various envelopes of paper, or of\\ntelling the time by a clock, in a remote or adjoining\\nbuilding or room.\\nAnother class of phenomena which belongs to this\\nscience, is the clahvoyance exhibited by natural son-\\nambulists. A very extraordinary case occurred in Spring-\\nfield, Massachusetts, in June, 1833, and continued for\\nnearly one year. My readers are undoubtedly aware,\\nthat I refer to the case of Miss Jane C. Rider. A very\\nscientific description of her case has been published by\\nprofessor L. W. Belden, M. D., her attendant physci an.\\nI will hereafter show the cause of this phenomenon, and\\nfor the present will merely cite the words of Dr. Belden,\\nto prove the clairvoya^nce of Miss Rider.\\nOn Nov. 10th, it was proposed to ascertain whether\\nshe could read with her eyes closed. She was seated\\nin a corner of the room, the lights were placed at a\\ndistance from her, and so screened as to leave her in\\nalmost enthe darkness. In this situation, she read with\\nease a great number of cards, which were presented to\\nher, some of which were written with a pencil, and so", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0273.jp2"}, "274": {"fulltext": "273 MYSTERIES OF MAaNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE.\\nobscurely, that in a faint light nei trace could be dis-\\ncovered by common eyes. She told the date of coins,\\neven when the figures were obliterated. A visitor handed\\nher a letter, with the request that she would read the\\nmotto on the seal, which she readily did, although several\\npersons present had been unable to decipher it with the\\naid of a lamp. The whole of this time, the eyes were to\\nall appearance perfectly closed.\\nShe fell asle p while I w^as prescribing for her, and\\nher case having now excited considerable interest, she\\nwas visited during that and the following day by proba-\\nbly more than a hundred people. To this circumstance\\nundoubtedly, is to be attributed the length of the parox-\\nysm, for she did not wake till Friday morning, forty-eight\\nhours after the attack.\\nDuring this time, she read a variety of cards, written\\nand presented to her by different individuals; told the\\ntime by watches, and wrote short sentences.\\nFor greater security, a second handkerchief was\\nsometimes placed below the one which she constantly\\nwore over her eyes, but apparently without causing any\\nobstruction to the vision. She also repeated with great\\npropriety and distinctness, several pieces of poetry, some\\nof which she had learned in childhood but had forgotten,\\nand others which she had merely read several years\\nsince, without having committed them to memory. A\\ncolored girl came in and seated herself before her; she\\nwas asked if she knew that lady; she smiled and returned\\nno answer. Some one said: has she not Jane laughed\\nheartily, and said, I should think she was somewhat\\ntanned.\\nThe high respectability of Miss Rider, and the probity\\nand undoubted science of Dr. Belden, precludes the possi-\\nbilit}^ of doubt in the case referred to. The only erroi\\\\\\nwhich is conmion to all the preceding cases, was, attribut-\\ning the phenomena to some special supernatural cause,\\ninstead of classing them where they certainly belong, as\\na branch of the science of Animal Magnetism; which can\\nbe clearly demonstrated by the well known and anolog-\\nous laws which govern the universe. It is left for me to\\nperform that task, which I hope to accomplish so clearly,\\nthat a child may control the science, and all persons be\\nabl at a glance to range all the phenomena produced by\\ntht magnetic fluid under its proper title.\\nI have thus noticed a few of the various phenomena\\nproduced by this mysterious fluid, from the creation of\\nman until the middle of the eighteenth century, when an\\napparent new phenomenon was produced by certain", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0274.jp2"}, "275": {"fulltext": "MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 373\\nmanipulations and volitions of Avill, producing sleep on\\npersons affected with nervous irritability, and performing\\nnumerous cures in those submitted to the action of the\\nfluid, supposed to be transmitted by the operator s mani-\\npulations and volition of will. This new phenomenon\\nreceived the name of Animal Magnetism, from the unusual\\nphysiological effects being produced by the will of an-\\nother animal (man,) employing a fluid, supposed analo-\\ngous to that which gives the magnetic property to iron.\\nThis new science, afforded a broad field for philosophi-\\ncal hypothesis, conjecture and research; the principal\\nagent (fluid) was invisible, yet producing by its agency,\\nthe most wonderful, and to many, supernatural effects\\nphysiological constitution of man. The superstitious re-\\nquired but a sight, or even the description of a single\\ncase, to bring them in the pale of its followers. Scientific\\nand philosophical reasoners gradually became its support-\\ners, and drew with them a large proportion of the less\\nscientific, though more sensible and intelligent, to worship\\nat the shrine of this partially occult science, the pheno-\\nmenon of which, w^ould be the foundation Oj. a new theory^\\n(to be raised on the ashes of the Mosaic, Copernician and\\nNewtonian,) whose cano^Dy would over-arch COSMOGONY,\\nand whose structure would elicit the spontaneous pro-\\nduction of life.\\nIn the first discovery of this new science, somnambu-\\nlism was rare, and clairvoyance unknown. It remain-\\ned for other more ingenious philosophers to discover, by\\nrepeated experiments, the most extraordinary faculty of\\ntraveling in spirit, to see and communicate the situation\\nof things thousands of miles distant from the body of the\\nsonmambulist. Enough, however, was known to inspire\\nthe most enthusiastic and wild expectations. Its princi-\\npal uses was curing of diseases, and exhibitions of its\\nwonders, to gratify the curious, with lectures to instruct\\nthe uninitiated in the manipulations necessary to produce\\nthe phenomenon. Some of its advocates claimed for it\\npowers of a very superior order, and asserted it was a\\ndivine inspiration given to man for benevolent purposes,\\nand to be wrested from his grasp the moment his object\\nshould be perverted to base and unholy designs on his\\nrace.\\nAmong the most fervent advocates of the science at\\nthat time, was Antony Mesmer, born at Wieler, in Ger-\\nmany. He tought publicly the doctrine; wrote several\\ntreatises on the science, and performed many wonderful\\ncures by the aid of the magnetic fluid, during an ex-\\ntensive travel which he performed through Germany,", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0275.jp2"}, "276": {"fulltext": "274 MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE.\\nSwabia, Switzerland, and Bavaria. Wonder followed his\\nfootsteps and fame heralded his approach in advance.\\nHe arrived at the French metropolis in 17/8, where he\\nperformed many wonderful cures, which drew to the\\nstandard of Animal Magnetism thousands of all classes in\\nthe community, who embraced the doctrine in its fullest\\nextent, and hailed the discovery of the magnetic fluid\\nas a panacea to remove all manner of diseases, and to\\nrenew and invigorate age. Enthusiasts in the cause were\\nnot wanting, v/tio claimed an immediate divine revelation\\nfor the power, and indeed the very manipulations to pro-\\nduce such extraordinary results, induced the most sober\\nphilosophers among its votaries, to believe the whole\\nscience of Animal Magnetism a supernatural pheno-\\nmenon.\\nSuch high pretensions in a civilized country, might well\\nbe supposed to create opposition from those fearful of\\nentire pervision of the established laws and order of\\nsociet}^ Its advocates became enthusiasts; its opponents\\ngj-ew loud in tlieir demands on the civil authority to\\nsuppress it. The King s government instituted an in-\\nquiry into its pretensions and merits. The commission\\nwas composed of men of exalted character and science,\\nchosen from the Society of Medicine, and the French\\nAcademy of Science. Dr. Franklin, then a Plenipoten-\\ntiary from the United States to the French Court, was\\none of the commission. M. D Eslon, who wrote a treatise\\nentitled, Ohser oat ions sur le Mag netlsme, was a member of\\nthe Royal Academy of Medicine, and a firm disciple of\\nMesuier, who pronounced him a powerful magnetizer.\\nFrom this gentleman the connnission obtained the most\\nof their experiments; perhaps because of evasion on the\\npart of Mesmer to furnish suitable opportunities for in-\\nvestigations. Be that as it may, the commission re-\\nported against Animal Magnetism in 1784, and the weight\\nof their characters and decision had sufficient influence\\nto suppress, only for a time, the progress of this science\\nin France.\\nDui ing Mesmer s experiments in Paris, other portions\\nof Europe felt the influence of this mysterious fluid. The\\nscience was born and cradled in Germany, where the\\ngiant continued to disseminate light, and gain converts\\nto tiie faith. England furnished her share of its cham-\\npions, and among them was Mainaudus, whose success in\\nhealing the sick and gaining converts to Animal Magne-\\ntism, almost equalled that of Mesmer in France. In some\\nrespects, Mainaudus was superior; his lectures contained\\nmore philosophical reasoning, and were therefore more", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0276.jp2"}, "277": {"fulltext": "MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 275\\npowerful in plaining converts from the scientific and\\nphilosophical opposers of the science.\\nI shall not, said Deleuze, (as reported in his life by\\nFoissac,) permit myself to form any theory, but will\\nonly state what has been witnessed by myself, and others\\nworthy of credit. After giving a sketch of the history\\nof its discovery, and various oppositions to it, he devotes\\na long chapter to the examuiation of proofs on which the\\nscience is founded.\\nHe first lays down undisputed, correct principals of the\\nprobaUlity of testimony, and applies them, with sound logic\\nto the examination of the proofs of Animal Magnetism.\\nHe shows that its effects have been attested by thousands\\nof respectable witnesses, among whom are physicians,\\nsavans and enlightened men who have not been afraid to\\nmeet ridicule while obeying the dictates of conscience\\nand fulfilling a duty to humanity; that the many who\\nhave published their opinions, and the yet greater num-\\nber who make their observations in silence, and content\\nthemslves with acknowledging their belief when question-\\ned on the snbject, have all either seen for themselves or\\nactually produced the phenomenon of which they speak;\\nwhile among the opposers of the science, not one can be\\nfound Avho has examined the subject in the only proper\\nway, by experimenting for himself with scrupulous at-\\ntention in exact accordance with the prescribed directions.\\nThe science, under, Deleuze, gained converts from\\namong the most learned men in the Empu-e. Mr. Foissac\\na distinguished member of the medical faculty of Paris\\nreadily embraced the doctrine, and from being a skillful\\nmagnetizer himself, wrote a memoir to the Academy of\\nMedecine, in 1825, inviting that learned society to make a\\nnew examination of Animal Magnetism. His proposition\\nwas after much discussion adopted, and a conmiission\\ncomposed of its members, Bourdois de la Motte, Fouquier,\\nGueneau de Mussy, Guersent, Itard, Leroux, Magendie,\\nMarc, Thillaye, Husson, and Double, were appointed to\\nconduct the experiments and report to the Academy.\\nThe commission spent five years with the most scrutin-\\nizing experiments, and finally, in 1831, reported unfavor-\\nable to the science, but acknowledged in the report have-\\ning seen many extraordinary and unaccountable facts,\\nwhich was sufficient to show their prejudice and total\\nincapability of judging in a science in which the funda-\\nmental, principals were above their comprehension.\\nThe respectabiUty of the society which appointed the com-\\nmission had some inflnence in retarding the rapid ad-\\nvances which the science was making; but truth cannot be", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0277.jp2"}, "278": {"fulltext": "276 MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE.\\nhid, and many intelligent ip\u00c2\u00b0 sijon saw the injustice oc-\\ncasioned by the report, and oiiiisted themselves in favor of\\nAnimal Magnetism which is again on a triumphant march\\nthrough all the civilized sections of the globe.\\nThe limits of this work will not admit the details con-\\nnected with the rise and progress of this science in\\nEurope, or of giving the many thousand well attested\\nfacts, which are recorded in its favor on the pages of\\nhistory, neither are they essential to my purpose; for\\nwhen I treat of its progress in America, I will give the\\nniinutia of so many well authenticated facts, as shall leave\\nno doubt on the minds of the most skeptical.\\nBefore entering on its rise in this country, I will giv^e\\nthe manipulations, or mode of magnetizing, as practised\\nby Mesmer and Deleuze, with their followers, described\\nby the last named commission in their report to the soci-\\nety.\\nThe person says the report who was to be magnet-\\nized was placed in the sitting position, on a convenient\\nsofa or upon a chair. The magnetizer, sitting on a little\\nhigher seat, before his face, and at about a foot distant,\\nrecollects himself a few moments, during which he holds\\nthe thumb of his patient, and remains in this position\\nuntil he feels that the same degree of heat is established\\nbetween the thumbs of that person and his own. Then\\nhe draws off his hands in turning them outwards, and\\nplaces them upon the shoulders for nearly one minute.\\nAfterwards he carries them down slowly, by a sort of\\nfriction, very light, along the arms, down to the extremi-\\nties of the fingers, he begins again the same motion five\\nor six times; it is what magnetizers call passes. Then\\nhe passes his hand over the head, keeps them there a few\\nmoments, brings them down in passing before the face,\\nat the distance of one or two inches, to the epigastrium,\\nwhere he stops again, either in bearing upon that region,\\nor without touching it with his fingers. And he thus\\ncomes down slowly along the body, to the feet. These\\npasses, or motions, are repeated during the greatest part\\nof the course, and when he wishes to finish it, he carries\\nthem even beyond the extremities of the hands and feet,\\nin shaking his fingers at each time. Finally, he performs\\nbefore the face and the chest some transversal motions,\\nat the distance of three or four inches, in presenting his\\ntwo hands, put near one another, and in removing them\\nabruptly. At other times, he brings near together the\\nfingers of each hand, and presents them at three or four\\ninches distant from the head or the stomach, in leaving\\nthem in that position for one or two minutes; then, alter*", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0278.jp2"}, "279": {"fulltext": "MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 277\\nnately drawing them off, and bringing them near those\\nparts, with more or less quickness, he imitates the motion\\nthat we naturally execute when we wish to get rid of a\\nliquid which wet the extremity of our fingers.\\nThese various modes were followed in all our experi-\\nments, without adhering to one rather than to the other,\\noften using but one, sometimes two; and we never were\\ndirected in the choice that we made of them, by the idea\\nthat one mode would produce a quicker or better marked\\neffects than another. The commission will not follow\\nin the enumeration of the facts it has observed; the order\\nof the times when each of them was produced; we thought\\nit more convenient, and above all, more rational, to pre-\\nsent them to you, classed according to the degree, more\\nor less decided, of the magnetical action that it recognized\\nin each of them.\\nI will give a single experiment from the many reported\\nby the commission, to prove the influence of the magne-\\ntic fluid.\\nThe commission found among\\nits members a gentleman who\\nwas willing to submit himself to\\nthe explosion of the somanm-\\nbule; it was, Mr. Marc. Mile\\nCeline was requested to care-\\nfully examine the state of\\nhealth of our colleague; she ap-\\nplied her hand on his forehead,\\nand the region of the heart,\\nand after three minutes, said\\nthat the blood was rushing to\\nthe head; that Mr. Marc actual-\\nly had a pain in the left side of\\nthat cavity; that he often felt\\nsome oppression, especially\\nafter his meals; that he was of-\\nten troubled with a slight\\ncough, that the lower part of\\nthe chest was filled up with blood; that something troub-\\nled the passage of the food; that the part called the\\nregion of the xiphoid (appendix,) had grown narrower;\\nthat to cure Mr. Marc, it should be necessary to bleed\\nhim in an abundant manner; apply, on the interior part\\nof the breast, poultices made with hemlock, and rub it\\nwith laudanum that he should drink lemonade, in which\\nhe should dissolve some gum arable; eat little, and oftenj\\nfinally he ought not to walk immediately after eating.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0279.jp2"}, "280": {"fulltext": "278 MYSTERIES OF MAGJNETIO CLAIRVOYANCE.\\nWe longed to hear from Mr. Marc, whether he had\\nreally felt what the soiiinauibule had announced; he said\\nthat he had, indeed, some oppression when he walked\\nInmiediately after his meals; that he was often troubled\\nwith cough, and that before the experiment, he had a\\npain in the left side of his head, but felt no difficulty in\\nthe passing down of his food.\\nThe present chapter, as I before remarked, sketches\\nthe era in Avhich somnambulism and clairvoyance were\\ndiscovered in persons under the force of the magnetic\\nfluid, and theref re a description of those extraordinary\\npowers would be desirable and appropriate in this place.\\nMagnetic Somnambulism, called simply soumam-\\nbulism, when treating of this science, differs only from\\nthe conmion somnambulism, or sleep walking, by being\\nthe known effect of magnetic fluid directed by the mani-\\npulations which excites the phenomena; while the common\\nsonmambulism or sleep-walking is produced by a natural\\nsleep. Magnetic somnambulism, according to Deleuze,\\nis an inexplicable diancje lohich occur i in the function of the\\n)iervous system^ in the play of the 07 gans, and in the manner of\\nreceiving and transmitting sens(ttion. The same author gives\\nlucid directions for ascertaining when the patient is a\\nsonmambulist; the following are the words If your\\npatient speaks, and to the question, Do you sleep\\nanswers, Yes; he is a somnambulist. The same author\\ncontinues, when your somnambulist shall have given\\nan affirmative answer to your first question, Are you\\nasleep V you may address others to him. These questions\\nshould be simple, clear, well adapted, and concise; they\\nshould be made slowly, with an interval between them,\\nleaving the somnambulist all the time he wishes to reflect\\non them.\\nFrom the earliest times recorded in history we observe\\nwell-authenticated accounts of persons appearing, at var-\\nious times, who seemed to be endowed with supernatural\\npowers of mind or body, which have enabled them to\\ninfluence their fellow-men in a manner altogether inex-\\nplicable, according to any ordinary laws of nature.\\nAmong the evidences of this fact we may mention the\\nhistory of the ancient oracles, to which the wisest philos-\\nophers of antiquity bowed Avith a reverence that we now\\nconsider superstitious; the power of curing diseases by\\nthe touch, carried to an extent that seems, to our ordin-\\nary comprehension, absolutely miraculous; the power of\\npredicting events by knowledge coumiunicated in dreams", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0280.jp2"}, "281": {"fulltext": "MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 279\\nthe influence possessed by great orators and certain\\nreligions impostors, who have from time to time led thou-\\nsands of seemingly intelligent followers into the l)elief of\\nthe grossest absurdities that the imagination of man is\\ncapable of inventing; the effects on health and conduct\\nproduced by what has been termed witchcraft, and attri-\\nbuted to the direct agency of the spirit of evil, with many\\nother mysteries of a similiar character.\\nHowever we may endeavor to rid ourselves of all belief\\nin these unusual, and seemingly uriaccountable phenom-\\nena, the force the multitude and the respectability of the\\nevidence compel us reluctantly to admit the truth of\\nthese wonderful stories. We cannot refuse to acknowl-\\nedge the facts, whatever we may think of theories and\\nopinions based upon them. That man possesses some\\nmysterious power over the feelings, thoughts and even\\nthe vital operations of his felloAV-man a power that can-\\nnot be resisted, and may be employed for good piirpose\\nat least, if not for evil ones is a belief that has prevailed\\nfrom the earliest times down to the present day. But it\\nis only since the progress of physiology, electrical and\\nmagnetic science, during the last centuy, that any thing\\nlike a theory or philosophical explanation of these curi-\\nous facts has been attempted. A\u00c2\u00a5lien it was found out\\nthat the nerves of an animal could be violently excited by\\na mere contact of different inetais, and that a slight spark\\nof electricity, would produce convulsions in the body of a\\ndead animal, it was very natural that all the unaccount-\\nable effects produced upon the human system by exter-\\nnal agents, should be attributed to the subtle and invisible\\nfluid that could thus seemingly awake the dead The effects\\nof the electric shock on the living body, were well\\ncalculated to cause a belief that the nervous system was\\nconstantly under the influence of this fluid; and numerous\\ncurious experiments were made which tended to convince\\nmany philosophers that life itself was but the result of the\\naction of electricity circulating through the nerves, and\\nprobably formed in the brain for this express purpose.\\nWhen the identity of electricity and lightning had\\nbeen proved by Dr. Franklin, Vvhen the strange action of\\nmetals upon the nerves was traced to the same general\\ncause, and when it was discovered that the wonderful\\npower of the magnetic needle to point towards one fixed\\nspot in the heavens could be given, taken away, or al-\\ntered by lightning, electricity or galvanism, it is not supris-\\ning that those who considered electricity as the vital\\nprincipal, should give the name of aidmal magnetism to the\\npower by which one mdividual appeared to be able to", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0281.jp2"}, "282": {"fulltext": "280 MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE.\\ndraw, or attract that vital principal from one part of the\\nbody to another, so as to cure diseases by the touch,\\nor to cause a sick person to sink into slumber at wiU.\\nPLAN OF MESMER\\nThe celebrated Mesmer, who claimed the discovery of\\nanimal magnetism, always employed a complex appara-\\ntus to generate, or rather to collect the magnetic fluid\\npervading, as he believed, all space and to direct a\\nstream of it upon the patient, in order to cure diseases.\\nIn these recent times, when it is believed that all the as-\\ntonishing effects of animal magnetism are produced by\\nthe action of the mind of one individual upon the nervous\\nfluid of another, or by the actual transfer of the vital\\nspirits from the magnetizer to the person magnetized, by\\na simple effect of the will, it is curious to recall the rude\\nmethods of Mesmer, who produced the same effects with-\\nout being at all conscious of the mental character of his\\noperations. The following description is an account of\\nhis apparatus and mode of acting, as given by the Royal\\nCommissioners appointed by Louis XVI. to examine liis\\npretensions, in 1784.\\nIn the middle of a large room was placed a circular ves-\\nsel or tub, a few feet in hight, furnished with a lid in two\\nparts, inovii g on hinges in a central line. This lid was\\nperforated with holes, through which were inserted a\\nnumber of firm and movable rods. Its interior was occu-\\npied by bottles filled with water previously magnetized.\\nThese were placed over one another in such a manner,\\nthat the first row had their necks converging towards the\\ncentre of the vessel, and their bases turned to the circum-\\nference; and the next set was arranged in an opposite\\ndirection. The tub itself contained also a certain quan-\\ntity of water, filling up the interstices which were left\\nby this symmetrical arrangment of bottles; and to this\\na quantity of iron filings, pounded glass, sulphur, man-\\nganese, and a variety of other substances, was occasion-\\nally added. The patients then stood round the appara-\\ntus, and applied the iron rods to the affected parts of the\\nbody, or encircled themselves with a hoop suspended for\\nthat purpose. Sometimes they laid hold on each other\\nby the thumb and index finger, and formed what was\\ncalled a chain. The magnetizer then held an iron rod,\\nwhich he moved to and fro before them, for the purpose\\nof directing at will the course of the magnetic fluid. The\\nwhole apparatus, or water, bottles and metallic rods, was\\nsupposed to facilitate the circulation of the fluid; and du-", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0282.jp2"}, "283": {"fulltext": "MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 281\\nring this time a person occasionally played on the piano\\nor harinonicon; for it was one of Mesmer s opinions that\\nthe magnetic flQid was especially propagated by sound.\\nThough the apparatus just described was used to increase\\nthe power of the magnetizer, yet the universal fluid was\\nsupposed to be every where, and the magnetizer himself\\nwas thought to possess a certain quantity which he could\\ncomumnicate and direct, either by means of a rod, or\\nsimply by the motion of his outstretched fingers. To\\nthese gestures, perfoi-uied at a distance, were also added\\ncertain slight touching on the hypochondria, the epigas-\\ntric region, or the limbs. In order to increase the power\\nof these processes, trees, water, food and other objects,\\nwere magnetized, for ail the bodies in nature are, accord-\\ning to Mesmer, susceptible of magnetism.\\nTlie following parti(;ulars are taken from Mesmer s\\nown directions for using animal magnetism\\nWlien a healthy person is brought into immediate con-\\ntact with a sick person, in whom one or more functions\\nare disordered, the latter feels, in the morbid part, sensa-\\ntions more or less acute.\\nIn order to magnetize the patient, you must place your-\\nself opposite to hhn, with your back turned towards the\\nnorth, and draw your own close against his feet; you\\nmust then place, without pressure, both your tliumbs up-\\non tlie plexus of nerv^es in the epigastrium (the pit of the\\nstomach), and stretcli your fingers towards the hypo-\\nchondria (the part of each side of the body where the\\nshort ribs are found). It is beneficial, occasionally, to\\nmove the fingers on the sides, especially in the region of\\nthe spleen.\\nBefore you cease magnetizing, you must endeavor to\\nput the magnetic fluid in equilibrium in every part of the\\nbody. This may be done by presenting the index finger\\nof the right hand at the summit of the head, t)n the left\\nside, and tlien drawing it down the face to the breast,\\nand over the lower extremities. In this manoeuvre an\\niron rod may be used instead of the finger. When patients\\nform a chain, in the manner already described, by taking\\nhold of each other s hands, the power of magnetism is\\naugmented.\\nThe effects produced by such process, says the Baron\\nDupotet, were not less strange than the processes them-\\nselves. The patients experienced many unusual sensa-\\ntions, such as undefinable pains in tlie body, particularly\\nin the head and stomach; an increase or suppression of\\ncutaneous perspiration of the heart, and a momentary\\nobstruction of breathing. Sometimes a certain exaltation", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0283.jp2"}, "284": {"fulltext": "2S2 MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE.\\nof the mind, and a lively sense of comfort were ex-\\nperienced. The nervous system in particular, was often\\npowerfully affected. Ringing in the ears, vertigo, and\\nsometimes somnolency of a peculiar kind supervened.\\nThese effects were varied according to the constitution\\nand the disease of the patients, but they increased as the\\noperation proceeded, and terminated in convulsions!\\nWheia many patients were magnetized at once, and one\\nbecame affected with convulsions, the others soon ex-\\nhibited the same symptoms. The condition was termed\\na magnetic crisis; it was regarded as an effort of nature\\nt\u00c2\u00bb effect a cure, and it was tiie constant aim of Mesmer to\\nproduce it. Many very curious moral phenomena were\\nalso commonly displayed during the magnetic operation.\\nSome patients burst into innnoderate fits of laughter;\\nothers were dissolved in tears. Some seemed attracted\\ntowards each other by the strongest affection, while\\nothers displayed mutual antipathy. But the most sur-\\nprising circumstance was the prodigious influence that\\nthe magnetizer exercised over his patients. The least\\nsign of his will excited or calmed the convulsions, and\\ncommand love or hatred. He thus stood before them\\nlike a magician with his wand, keeping their souls and\\nbodies in submissive obedience.\\nPRINCIPLES OP DELEUZE.\\nBut the progress of science since the days of Mesmer,\\nhas proved that many of his processes were altogether un-\\nnecessary, and the use of machinery, or metallic wands,\\nis now entirely relinquished. Though convulsions are still\\nproduced, in some persons, by the magnetizer, it is no\\nlonger his desire to produce them; for all the benefits,\\nand all the curious mental phenomena, of magnetism\\nmay result without any such consequence. The manual\\nprocesses of different operators are now exceedingly var-\\nious; and it is found, that after an individual has been\\nplaced several times under the influence of magnetism,\\nall ics effects may sometimes be produced by the simple\\nwill of the magnetizer, without any manipulation what-\\never Two doctrines now divide those who practice on\\nthe principles of this science into different sects. The\\nfirst attributes all the phenomena to the action of the\\nnervous fluid of one individual, directed by the will, over\\nthe nervous system of another; while the second con-\\nsiders the soul itself as one of the chief agents in produc-\\ning these effects. To avoid confusing the mind of the\\nreader with unnecessary statements of these differences", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0284.jp2"}, "285": {"fulltext": "MYSTERIES OP MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 283\\nof mere opinion, it will be best to give the doctrines of\\nthe science, as now generally believed, from the work of\\nM. Deleuze, one of the most active and successful practi-\\ntioners of animal magnetism, omitting only those of his\\nprinciples that have been dispr\u00c2\u00aeved, or rendered doubt-\\nful by the experience of his brethern. In his chapter of\\nGeneral Views and Principles, this highly distinguished\\nauthor makes the following statements:\\n1. Man has the faculty of exercising over his fellow\\nmen a salutary influence in directing towards them, by\\nhis will, the vital principle,\\n2. The name of Magnetism has been given to this\\nfaculty; it is an extension of the power which all living\\nbeings have, of acting upon those who submitted to their\\nwill-\\n3. We perceive this faculty only by its results; and we\\nmake no use of it, except so far as we will use it.\\n4. The first condition of action, then, is to receive the\\nwill.\\n5. As we cannot comprehend how a body can act upon\\nanother at a distance, without something to establish a\\ncommunication between them, we suppose that a sub-\\nstance emanates from the magnetizer, and is conveyed to\\nthe magnetized persons, in a direction dicta.ted by the\\nwill. This substance, which supports life in us, we call the\\nmagnetic fluid. Its nature is unknown, and even its ex\\nistence has not been demonstrated; but everything takes\\nplace as if it existed, and this justifies us in admitting its\\nexistence.\\n6. Belief in our power to accomplish our purpose is as\\nnecessary to the eflect as the will to doit; for without self\\nconfidence the magnetizer will not succeed.\\n7. In order that one individual should act upon\\nanother, it is necessary that there should be a moral and\\nphysical sympathy between them; and when this sym-\\npathy is produced, we say that the parties are in cbm-\\numnication with each other.\\n8. In order that the action of animal magnetism\\nshould be safe and useful, it is necessary that the magnet-\\n*It appears from the evidence of other observers, that the rule is\\nsubject to some exceptions; for there are a few persons so hap-\\npily constituted, that tliey have beeti known to mag-netize others\\nwithout any intention, and even when they had no taith in the soi-\\nance; but these cases very seldom occur. Many of the wonderful\\netfects of oratory, and certain religious exercises, as well as the\\npersonal intiuence of some physicians in curing- the sick by their\\nmanner and presence, almost without medicine, are probably ow-\\ning to a magnetic influence, of which the actors are themselves\\nunconscious,", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0285.jp2"}, "286": {"fulltext": "2?4 MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE.\\nizer should be influenced only by the desire of doing\\ngood.\\n9. Direct communication betAveen persons is not abso-\\nlutely necessarj^ to the transfer of the magnetic fluid; for\\nwater, food, and other bodies may be charged with the\\nfluid, and employed to convey it to the person for whom\\nthe magnetizer expressly designs it.\\n10. Magnetism or the operation of magnetism, spring^\\nfrom three things: the will to act, a sign to express that\\nwill, and confidence in the success of the attempt; and\\nunless the purpose be also good, the effects, though\\nobvious, will be irregular.\\n11. The faculty of magnetizing exists in every one, but\\nnot to the same extent. The difference is caused by the\\nmoral and intellectual superiority of some over others,\\nand the most important requisites is a powerful mag-\\nnetizer and self-confidence, energy of Avill, the power of\\nconcentrating the attention and the Avill upon one object\\nfor a long time, benevolence, moral courage, and self-\\npossession on the occurance of alarming crises, and pa-\\ntient calmness of mind. Good health also increases the\\npower, because it is a mark of vital energy. When all\\nthese advantages in a high degree are combined in \u00c2\u00a9ne\\nindividual, he is often found to possess such magnetic\\npower that sometimes he may be obliged to moderate it.\\nThe power is very much increased by practice.\\n12. The magnetic influence flows from all parts of the\\nbody, and the will may direct it any where; but the\\nhands and the eyes are better fitted than other parts to\\nthrow off and direct the current determined by the Avill.\\n13. Magnetism can be conveyed to great distances\\nwhen persons are in perfect communication.\\n14. There are some individuals who are sensible of mag-\\nnetic action; and the same individuals are more or less so,\\naccording to their tenporary dispositions at that moment.\\nPersons in good health rarely feel its effects; nor are we\\nable to judge, except by trial, who is subject to them,\\nand who is not; but at least three-fourths of manldnd\\nmay be acted upon.\\n15. Women and men possess the power of magnetizing\\nin an equal degree.\\n16. Whatever vital energy or magnetic fluid is convey-\\ned to the patient by the magnetizer, is lost by the latter;\\nand if the sessions be continued too long, or be too fre-\\nquently repeated, he may become very much exhausted\\nby this loss. The weakness sometimes felt by the mag-\\nnetizer is not produced by the motions and exertions that", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0286.jp2"}, "287": {"fulltext": "MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 285\\nhe uses, but by the flow of the fluid from him to his pa-\\ntient.\\n17. Cofldence on the part of the person magnetized is\\nnot necessary to success.\\n18. The choice of a particular process is not necessary\\nto give direction to the action of magnetism. But it is\\nbest to choose and follow some one method, so as never\\nto be perplexed and compelled, while acting, to draw off\\nthe attention, in order to decide what motion it is most\\nproper to take.\\n19. It is very dangerous to interrupt a crisis, however\\nalarming it may be; and we should never attempt to act,\\nunless we are secured against all interruptions from our\\nown affairs the person magnetized or his friends.\\nSuch are the doctrines now usually adopted by the pro-\\nf essers of animal magnetism.\\nINFLUENCE OF ANIMAL MAGNETISM ON THE BODY.\\nThe effects of animal magetism are very various, be-\\ncause they are influenced not only by the constitution,\\nactual condition, and faith of the patient, but also by the\\nenergy and the moral and physical character of the\\noperator.\\nMany of these effects are so astonishing, that the\\nstudent of this wonderful subject is absolutely alarmed,\\nat first, by the multitude of well authenticated facts that\\nseem to exceed the bounds of faith. But when they are\\nattentively examined, beginning at first with those which\\nare of a more simple nature, and then proceeding to those\\nwhich are less consistent with our preconceived notions\\nof the laws of nature; especially when we compare these\\neffects with the symptoms observed in natural somnam-\\nbulism, in certain cases of epilepsy and in hysteric catal-\\neptic ecstacy, we shall be prepared to acknowledge that\\nit is impossible to refuse them our credence, however\\ndifficult it may be to explain them in a manner complete-\\nly satisfactory. We cannot deny the truth of well-\\nauthenticated facts simply because they are mysterious,\\nfor all nature is a mystery.\\nWhen an individual is placed under the influence of\\nmagnetism, the symptoms most commonly observed in\\nthe first instance are as follows Slight pricking and\\nwinking of the eyelid an increased, or sometimes a\\ndiminished, rapidity of the pulse; a sensible alteration\\nof the temperature of the body a flushing or an ex-\\ntreme paleness of the cheeks, and a remarkable change\\nof the countenance; stretchmg, or a deep yawning comes", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0287.jp2"}, "288": {"fulltext": "286 MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE.\\non; a gurgling in the throat is often heard; the patient\\nmay feel a desire to move, but finds himself unable to\\ndo so he experiences an indescribable couiposure, and\\na sense of calm delight the breathing becomes much\\naffected, and is sometimes rendered much slower, even\\nwhen the pulse increases in rapidity. These are the\\nsimplest effects, but often, under circumstances not to\\nbe foreseen, piienomena of a more remarkable charac-\\nter appear. The eyelids are spasmodically affected, and\\nclose against tlie will of tlie patient. He finds it im-\\npossible to keep awake, and, if the operation be con-\\ntinued, he gradually sinks into a slumber more or less\\nprofound. Tiie head falls on the chest, or thrown back-\\nwards; the eyelids are generally half open, and the eye-\\nball moves slowly in the socket, but gradually becomes\\nfixed; drops of mucus fall from the lips, the limbs become\\ncold, and the respiration audible. If spoken to, the\\nsleeper may attempt to speak, without success or he\\nmay start awake, rub his eyes, stare round with as-\\ntonishment, and remember what has passed as we\\nremember a dream. To disturb any one in this state is\\nhighly improper, for this may produce convulsions, and\\nthe interference of others with the proceedings of the\\nmagnetizer ma.y produce dangerous consequences. Con-\\nvulsions, or crisis of the kind described by Mesmer, are\\nnot at all uncommon.\\nThe kind of sleep just described differs entirely from\\nnatural sleep. Its phenomena were first discovered by\\nthe Marquis de Puyeegur, and have escaped, in a great\\ndegree, the observation of Mesmer. In order to dis-\\ntinguish it from the natural, has been termed the magne-\\ntic sleep, or Somnambulism. It may be more or less\\ncomplete.\\nIn order to give the reader an idea of the condition of\\na person who has been thrown into the state of magnetic\\nsleep, we will now describe the phenomena observed by\\nall who have given serious attention to this singular\\nsubject. In this peculiar state the surface of the body is\\nsometimes actually sensible; but more frequently, the\\nfeeling is totally destroyed. The jaws are firmly locked,\\nand cannot be opened by any effort; the limbs are often\\nrendered inflexible; the senses of sight, hearing, and\\nsmell are so completely benumbed, that neither the\\nstrongest light, the loudest sounds, nor the most pungent\\nodors, can arouse the slighest attention. We may prick,\\npinch, tear, or burn any part of the body, without\\nawakening the consciousness of the patient. Extreme,\\nand altogether unwarrantable cruelties have often been", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0288.jp2"}, "289": {"fulltext": "MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 287\\npracticed upon persons in magnetic sleep, and though\\nunfelt at the time, they have given rise to great tortui-e\\nafter the senses were recovered. Though these proceed\\nings were most unwarrantable, it is now too late to re-\\nmedy them, and we may quote them without impropriety\\nin proof of the wonderful effects of magnetism, after pro-\\ntesting against the repetition of such injurious and\\ndangerous experiments.\\nMany incredulous physicians of Paris induced Baron\\nDupetet to perform a series of experiments of that cele-\\nbrated hospital, the Hotel Dieu of Paris, in the jenr 1820.\\nIn speaking of the trials made to test the insensibility of\\nthe patients, he states that their nostrils and lips were\\ntickled with feathers, smoke was introduced into their\\nnostrils, their skin was bruised by pinching till the blood\\ncame, and the feet of one person were placed in a hot\\ninfusion of mustard seed, but no change of countenance\\nwas produced; but on waking, they all experienced the\\npain such treatment was likely to occasion. Some of these\\nphysicians learned the art of magnetizing, and carried\\nthese cruelties much farther for their own satisfaction.\\nDr. Roboum, who was then attached to the hospital,\\nreports the following facts in relation to the case of a man\\nnamed Starin, v/hose bed was No. 8 of the ward Sainte\\nMadelaine. M. Recamier (a physician of high celebrity\\ni$i Paris) first threatned the patient that he would burn\\nhim with moxa (a slow fire applied to the part), if he\\nsuffered himself to go to sleep. Dr. Roboum then magne-\\ntized him, and forced him to sleep against his will, and M.\\nRecamier applied the moxa on the front of the right\\nthigh, producing an eschar nearly an inch and a half long\\nand an inch in breadth. Starin showed no sign of pain,\\neither by look or cry, nor was his pulse in the least altered\\nuntil Dr. R. roused him from the magnetic sleep.\\nIn another case, reported by the same physician, a\\nfemale patient, named JLeroy, was magnetized, and while\\nin the magnetic sleep, agaric, one of the most pungent\\nsubstances known to us, was burned immediately under\\nher nose by M. Gilbert. M. Recamier then applied moxa\\nover the pit of the stomach, producing an eschaj of nearly\\nthe same size, but not the slightest sign of feeling was\\nproduced until after her sensibility was restored by the\\nmagnetizer, when she suffered intensly.\\nIt has been mentioned, that, while under the effects\\nof magnetism, the patient is completely under the control\\nof the magnetizer, and when cast into the state of slum-\\nber and insensibility, it often ha|)pens that the continu-\\nance of the operation produces wliat is called the som-", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0289.jp2"}, "290": {"fulltext": "288 MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE.\\nnambulic state. The patient then appears to be awake\\nto the influence of the niagnetizer, or any other person\\nor thhigs with whom tlie latter has been chosen to put\\nhim in comnmnication, but is perfectly asleep and insen-\\nsible to all the rest of this world When in this condition,\\nthe magnetic sleeper, while absolutely insensible to all\\nother external impressions, is mentally conscious of every\\nact and thought of the niagnetizer. He will hear even\\nat a distance, the slightest modulation of his voice,\\nthough inaudible to those around. The following case,\\nreported in the same manner with the two former, will\\ngive some idea of the phenomena attending the somnam-\\nbulic condition\\nCatherine Samson, a young girl of much natural timid-\\nity, was put to sleep in about fifteen minutes. Many\\npersons present endeavored to rouse her, by first indivi-\\ndually, and then collectively, screaming suddenly in her\\nears. They struck violently, with their clinched fists,\\nupon various pieces of furniture, but could not obtain\\nany symptom of her hearing the loudest noise. On\\nanother occasion she feel asleep in three minutes. M.\\nRecamier opened her eyelids, shook her violently, struck\\nthe table with all his might, pinched her repeatedly,\\nsqueezed her hand violently, raized her from her seat and\\nsucldenly let her fall. Still no change was perceptible,\\nnothing which could convey an idea that the patient\\neither saw or felt. When the niagnetizer spoke, how-\\never, she heard him distinctly. M. Recamier then alter-\\nnated his voice with that of the niagnetizer, but to his\\nvoice she was insensible.\\nOn the third trial she fell asleep in three minutes. The\\nbystanders attempted to rouse her by abuse. They called\\nher an impostor, taxed her with scandalous conduct, and\\nthreatned to kick her out of the room; but even this very\\nphilosophical proceeding produced no effect. In the\\nevening of the same day she was again magnetized in\\nbed, fell asleep in a few minutes, and remained in the\\nsomnambulic state all night. Those appointed to watch\\nher observed that she never moved. They pulled and\\nplucked out her hair by the roots, but could detect no\\nsign of sensation. More than six years after this, the\\nsame Mademoiselle Samson was magnetized before the\\nsecond committee of investigation, some of whom were\\nwell acquainted with her, and had the fullest confidence\\nin her good faith.\\nIn a case reported by M. Bouillet, professor of philoso-\\nphy at the college of Saint-Barbe, a young woman was\\nmagnetizeti by him, and when somnambulic, was Intro-", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0290.jp2"}, "291": {"fulltext": "MYSTERIES OP MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 2S9\\nduced into the presence of about twenty persons. This\\n,9eance, says he, was nearly a repetition of the same\\nboisterous scenes wliich had before occured at the Hotel\\nDieu; and every possible means was had recourse to for\\nthe purpose of making the patient hear others, and pre-\\nventing her hearing nie. She was tormented in a thous-\\nand ways without effect, a young man who was present\\nhaving provided himself, unknown to me, with a pocket-\\npistol, with the view of making a decisive experiment,\\nsuddenly and unexpectedly fired it off close to her ear.\\nEvery person present started, and several ladies taken\\nby surprise, screamed out violently; but the somnambu-\\nlist was not interrupted in quietly continuing a sentence\\nwhich at the moment she was addressing to me. It\\nsliould be added that the pistol was fired off so close to\\nhe I- ear, that the bonnet and cap of the poor girl were\\nscorched, and some of the powder lodged under the\\ncontused cuticle, yet did she remain perfectly insensible,\\nalthough, on being awakened, she felt the most acute\\npain in the neck, and discovered with indignation the\\nstate into which, to my deep regret, she had been thrown,\\nand from wliich, for upwards of a fortnight, she suffered\\nseverely.\\nImportant Medical testimony in favor of Mesmerism.\\nAmong other astonishing proofs of the insensibiliy of\\nthe magnetic somnambulist, the following facts, very\\nrapidly selected from the mass of evidence, may be pre-\\nferred on account of the very high character of the au-^\\nthorities from which they are derived. M. Husson\\npresident of the Academy of Medicine of Paris, states that\\nhe has seen a bottle containing several ounces of concen-\\ntrated ammonia held for five, ten, fifteen or more min-\\nutes, immediately under the nose of the sleeper, without\\nthe slightest effect. Dr. Bertrand saw forty or fifty pins\\nthrust simultaneously by as many witnesses, mto the\\nflesh of a somnambulist who was singing, without\\ncausing the least appreciable alteration in his voice.\\nThis horrible cruelty was committed at the request of the\\nmagnetizer? M. Sauvage-de-la-croix, in the Memoires de\\nTAccidemie des sciences, gives an account of a girl at\\nMontpelier, on whom, when somnambulic, he tried, among\\nother vain attempts to rouse her, putting brandy and\\nspirits of hartshorn in her mouth, tickling th\u00c2\u00a9 ball of the\\neye with a feather, blowing snuff into the nostrils, and\\nviolently twisting the fingers. She neve^ gave the slight-\\nest sign of sensation.\\nIn the tenth volume of the Bibliotheque de Medecine,\\nthere is an account of a female somnambulist, who was", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0291.jp2"}, "292": {"fulltext": "290 MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE.\\nseverly whipped over the bare shoulders without effect,\\nand once had lier back most savagely smeared with honey\\nand was exposed to the stinging of bees: but she fel t\\nnothing till she was awakened, wlien, of course, she\\nsuffered acute agony. Messrs. Poissac, Foquier, Guersent\\nand Itard, men of liigh celebrity, and members of the in-\\nquest establisiied by the Royal i ^ademy, all give testi-\\nmony to facts of a similar nature.\\nBut even severe surgical operations have been perfor-\\nnaed on patients without their knowledge, while their\\nsenses were buried in magnetic sleep A man in the\\ndepartment of Gers, in France, had an extremely painful\\nabscess of the thigti, and it was resolved to spare him\\nthe pain of operation, by performing it while under the\\neffects of magnetism. This was done by Dr. Larieu,\\nalter the patient had been rendered somnambulic by\\nthe Counte de Brivazac. During the operation the pa-\\ntient remained motionless as a statue. When awa-\\nkened, M. Roc asked him whether he would submit to\\nthe operation; he replied, I suppose I must, since it\\nis necessary. M. Roc tiien informed him that it was\\nover. The astonishment of the patient may be con-\\nceived, when he discovered the fact, for he had neither\\nseen nor felt it; and the last thing he remembered was,\\nthe act of M. de Brivazac laying his hand on his fore-\\nhead to induce sleep\\nAll the tests of insensibility that have been mention-\\ned, except the more surgical operations, have been\\ntried again and again in this country, and even in this\\ncity. The observations of Dr. Capron, of Providence,\\nR. I., have led to so much public discussion, that almost\\nevery one must have some knowledge of them. Dr. J.\\nK. Mitchell and Dr. Pierce, of Philadelphia, have both\\nexperimented extensively on this subject. The former\\nis said to have caused teeth to be extracted from pa-\\ntients during the magnetic sleep, without awakening\\nany consciousness; and the latter found somnambulists\\nperfectly insensible to the strongest odors, while their\\nthoughts, their taste, and their muscular power, seem-\\ned to be entirely subjected to the will of the magne-\\ntizer.\\nBut the most astounding case of magnetic insensibi-\\nlity that has been recorded, is that reported by M\\nJules Gloquet to the French Academy. The high cha-\\nracter, deep learning, and great practical ability of M.\\nCloquet, render it impossible to doubt the truth of any\\nstatement to which he would affix his name. The case\\nwas as follows", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0292.jp2"}, "293": {"fulltext": "MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 291\\nMadame Plantin, a lady of sixty-four years of age,\\nconsulted M. Cioquet on the 8th of April, 1829, for an\\nulcerated cancer in the right breast, with which she\\nhad been afflicted for several years, and which was\\ncomplicated with a considerable enlargement of the cor-\\nresponding axillary glands. M. Chapelain, her physician,\\nhad heen in the habit of magnetizing her, without any\\nother good effect than producing the magnetic sleep,\\nwith its usual insensibility. He proposed that M. Cio-\\nquet should operate upon her while in this state, Avhich\\nwas agreed to.\\nOn the day appointed for the operation, M. Cioquet,\\non his arrival at half- past ten o clock in the morning found\\nthe patiesnt dressed and sitting in an arm chair, in the\\nattitude of a person in a tranquil, natural sleep. She had\\nreturned, nearly an hour previously, from mass, which\\nshe was accustomed to attend at that time. M. Chape-\\nlain had thrown her into the magnetic sleep after her re-\\nturn, and she then spoke with umch composure of the\\noperation she was about to undergo. All the arrange-\\nments being made, she undressed herself, and seated her-\\nself in a chair. M. Chapelain supported her right arm,\\nand the left was suffered to hang down. M. Pailloux,\\neleve interne of the Hopital St. Louis, was employed to\\npresent the instruments and tie the vessels. The first in-\\ncision, couunencing at the armpit, was carried round the\\nloAver part of the tumor till it met the first. The enlarged\\nglands were then dissected with precaution, on account of\\ntheir vicinity to a very large artery, and the tumor was\\nextirpated. The operation lasted from ten to twelve min-\\nutes, and during the whole time the patient continued\\nconversing tranquilly with the operator, and did not give\\nthe slightest sign of sensibility no motion of the limbs or\\nof the features no change in the respiration or the voice;\\nno alteration even in the pulse could be perceived the\\npatient never ceased to be in that state of automatic aban-\\ndon and passiveness in which she had been for some min-\\nutes before the operation. It was not even necessary to\\nhold her they only supported her. A ligature was ap-\\nplied to an artery that had been divided (the most pain-\\nful part of all operations and the wound was dressed.\\nThe first dressings were remoyed, and the wound cleansed\\nand redressed, on the 14th, without any sign of pain being\\ngiven. After this dressing, M. Chapelain awakened her,\\nthe magnetic sleep having continued from an hour before\\nthe operation for two entire days. She was then again\\nput to sleep, but it is not stated for how long a tune.\\nThough some persons seem to be incapable of being", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0293.jp2"}, "294": {"fulltext": "292 MYSTERIES GF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE.\\nmagnetized powerfully, and others yield with difficulty\\nyet there are some who fall under this influence almost\\nalmost instantaneously. M. Dupotet remarks, A young\\ngirl, or rather a child, for she is not twelve years of age,\\nat this moment attends my demonstrations, who is so\\nsusceptible of the magnetic influence, that she almost in-\\nstantly falls asleep, and the approximation of my fingers\\ntowards her causes a short and quick convulsive start,\\nwhich seems to pervade her whole frame.\\nNECESSARY PRECAUTIONS.\\nSuch is the command of the will of the magnetizer over\\nthe muscles of the magnetic sleeper, that he can deter-\\nmine, in many cases, what part of the body shall be at\\nrest, and what part in motion. Sometimes the hand of\\nthe patient will follow that of the operator in all its\\nmovements as the needle, will follow the magnet.\\nEven the whole person may appear to be attracted in\\nthis manner; and when a magnetizer allows himself to\\nbecome alarmed at the consequence of his own acts, this\\ncondition of things may become exceedingly distressing.\\nThere is a well-authenticated story of a French nobleman\\nwho magnetized his favorite daughter in mere sport, be-\\nfore a considerable circle of observers, neither of them\\nhaving faith in the process. But to the utter horror of\\nthe father, the laughter of the daughter at the whole pro-\\nceeding, which had gradually assumed more and more\\nthe character of fatuity, without his suspecting that the\\nchange was other than a jocose affection, was soon set-\\ntled into a complete appearance of idiocy; and when he\\nturned from it in distress, the daughter rose and followed\\nhim about the range of apartments, as if actuated by his\\nwill alone, nor could he escape the presence of that dis-\\ntorted and convulsed countenance that he had agitated,\\nbut had not presence of mind to allay. This young lady\\nwas seriously in danger of suffering permanently from the\\nconsequences of her father s want of self-possession and\\nfirmness; for it is extremely injurious to lose sight of the\\noriginal purpose when a crisis is impending, until that\\ncrisis is complete. The magnetizer should never leave\\nhis patient until all signs of undue agitation have sub-\\nsided, in case where convulsive symptoms are present.\\nThe following extracts from the report of the com-\\nmissioners of the French Academy, will give an idea of\\nthe extent to which the motions of the sleeper may be\\nsometimes controlled by the operator. The gentleman", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0294.jp2"}, "295": {"fulltext": "MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 293\\n(M. Petit) subjected to this experiment was affected with\\na paralysis of tiie face from an abscess.\\nTlie patient was in a short time put to sleep; after\\nwhich, in order to remove every suspicion of any previous\\nunderstanding between him and the operator, the com-\\nmissioners handed to M. Dupotet a note, written at the\\nmoment, wherein they had specified the parts they wish-\\ned to be convulsed. Possessed of this instruction, M.\\nDupotet first directed his hand towards the right wrist,\\nwhich immediately became convulsed. He then stood\\nbehind the patient, and directed his finger first towards\\nthe left thigh, then towards the left elbow, and lastly\\ntowards the head. Each of these parts was almost im-\\nmediately seized with convulsive movements. M. Du-\\npotet then directed his left leg against that of the pa-\\ntient, which became so much agitated that he nearly\\nfell off his seat. Ke then directed liis foot towards the\\nright elbow of M. Petit, which became violently agitated;\\nhe then stretched his foot towards the left hand and\\nelbow, and violent convulsive movements developed\\nthemselves in the upper limbs. One of the commis-\\nsioners, M.. Marc, with the intention of obviating more\\nefl ectually every possibility of deception blindfolded the\\npatient, and the preceding experiments were repeated,\\nwith a slight variation in the result. Messrs. Thillage\\nand Marc directed their fingers towards different parts\\nof the body, and provoked some convulsive movements,\\nwhich were, however, less promptly developed and more\\nfeeble. Tiiis occurred vvhether his eyes were blinded or\\nnot, and these convulsive movements were more mark-\\ned when the parts operated upon were submitted to the\\naction of a metallic rod, whether in the shape of a key\\nor the branch of a pah of spectacles.\\nINFIiUE]!fCE OF AjVniMAIi MAGNETISM ON THE MIND.\\nThus far the attention of the reader has been direct-\\ned to the physical effects of animal magnetism on the\\nbod}^ but the effects produced upon the mind, in those\\npersons who are rendered somnambuhc, are often far\\nmore wonderful.\\nIt was the celebrated Marquis de Puysegur who first\\nparticularly observed the mental condition that has been\\ntermed magnetic somnambulism. He was a student of\\nMesmer, and a most able magnetizer, practising the art\\nsolely for the benefit of the sick, and univ^ersally beloved\\nfor his benevolence and amiability. The history of his\\ndiscovery is as follows", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0295.jp2"}, "296": {"fulltext": "204 MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE.\\nWhile magnetizing his gardener, an ignorant rustic,\\nhe observed him fall into a deep and tranquil sleepi\\nIt then occurred to him to address to the sleeper a few\\nquestions, which he did, and the man immediately an-\\nswered him with intelligence and clearness. He soon\\nfound that he possessed a peculiar power over the mind\\nof his patient, and that he had but to will a question\\nand it was answered. Their souls seemed to be in com-\\nmunication as well as their bodies In speaking of his\\ngardner while in this condition, he says He is no\\nlonger, when in the magnetic state, a peasant who can\\nhardly utter a single sentence, he is a being to describe\\nwhom I cannot find a name. I need not speak; I have\\nonly to think before him, when he instantly hears and\\nanswers me. Should any body come into the room, he\\nsees him if 1 desire it, and addresses him, and says what I\\nwish him to say, not indeed exactly as I dictate to him,\\nbut as truth requires. When he wants to add any thing\\nmore than I deem it prudent strangers should hear, I\\nstop the flow of his ideas, and of his conversation, in the\\nmiddle of a word, and give his thoughts quite a different\\nturn. I know of no subject more profound, more lucid,\\nthan this peasant in his crisis. I have several patients\\napproaching his state of lucidity, but none to equal him.\\nTlus patient, like many others since observed, had the\\npower of perceiving his own\\ninternal structure, and dis-\\ntinguishing what was the dis-\\nease. He prescribed what\\ntreatment he required, when\\nhe would be benefited by be-\\niig magnetized again, and\\nA hen he would be well, if so\\nreated. The Marquis follow-\\ned his du-ections, and every\\nliing happened as he pre-\\ndicted.\\nAll the magnetizers who\\nnow attempt to trea,t diseases\\nin this manner, prefer the\\nknowledge of the patient when\\npossessed of this luciditv and second-sight (clairvoyance\\nand prevoyance) to their own judgment, and the result\\nproves the propriety of doing so. These patients,\\nsays the Marquis, during the crisis, possess a supernar\\ntural power, by which, on touching a patient presented\\nto them, as passing their hand even over the clothes,\\nthey feel which is the affected viscus (internal organj\u00e2\u0080\u0094", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0296.jp2"}, "297": {"fulltext": "MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 295\\nthe suffering part; they point *t out, and indicate pretty\\nnearly the suitable reu iedies. One of these sleepers told\\nthe Marquis that he was subject to frequent headaches\\na buzzing in his ears, which was true, though he had\\ncomplained of it to no one. A young man w^io was pre-\\nsent at this experiment, but who ridiculed the preten-\\nsions of magnetism, Avas told that his complaint consisted\\nin pains of the stomach and other disorders in the abdo-\\nmen, that had been produced by a disease which he had\\nsuffered from some years before. And when, still doubt-\\ning, he applied to be examined by another magnetic\\nsonmambulist, distant some twenty yards from tlie first,\\nhe was told JQst the saine thing, by which he was utterly\\nconfounded.\\nA w^ell-knov^Ti physician of high standing at Provi-\\ndence, Rhode Island, at one time employed a sleeper in\\nhis family, to assist in determining the character of occult\\ndu eases in patients who consulted him at his office. The\\nresults were singular and important. Once she declared\\nthe cause of deafness by describing the internal ear and\\nbrain, and at another time pointed out the cause of an\\nIncurable blindness, by describing a red tumor at the\\nback part of the eye. She knew nothing of anatomy,\\nand the parts described are entirely out of the reach of\\nnatural vision.\\nM. Husson describes the condition of the sleeper in this\\nstate as fallows:\\nTiie somnambulist has his eyes closed. He neither\\nsees with his eyes, nor hears with his ears; yet he sees\\nand hearb better than a waking person. He sees and\\nhears only those with whom he is in relation. He sees\\nonly that at which he looks, and he usually looks at\\nthose objects only to wiiich his attention is directed. He\\nis submissive to the will of the magnetizer in all things\\nwliich cannot injure himself, and in all that does not\\noppose his own ideas of justice and truth. He sees,\\nor rather he has a perception of the interior of his\\nown body and that of others; but he usually remarks\\nthose parts only wliich are not in a natural state, and\\nwhich disturb the harmony of it. He recalls to his\\nmemory things which he had forgotten in his ^vaking\\nstate. He has provisions and presentiments which may\\nbe erroneous in several circumstances, and which ai-e\\nlimited in their extent. He expresses himself with sur-\\nprising faculty. He is not free from vanity. He becomes\\nmore accurate by degrees, for a certain time is guided\\nwith discretion, but if ill directed he goes astray. When\\nreturned to his natural condition, he entirely loses the", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0297.jp2"}, "298": {"fulltext": "296 MYSTERIES OF MAGNETIC CLAIRVOYANCK\\nrecollection of all the sensations and ideas he had during\\nhis state of souinambulisni; so that those two states are\\nas entirely strangers to one another as if the somnambu-\\nlist and the waking man were two different persons.\\nNo obstacle seems to bound the vision of the somnam\\nbulist, and at the will of the magnetiser he can see some-\\ntimes from the back of the head, and sometimes from the\\npit of the stomach, or the tips of the fingers.\\nM. Rostan, in the Diciiinaire des Sciences^ Medieaies art Mag-\\nnetisme^ gives an account of an experiment performed by\\nhim in the presence of M. Ferres. I took my watch\\nand held it afc the back of the head of the somnambulist\\nat a distance of three or four inches from the occiput. I\\nasked her if she saw anything. Certainly, said she I\\nsee something shining; it gives me pain. Her counte-\\nnance was expressive of pain, and ours bespoke our as-\\ntonishmento We stared at each other, and M. Ferrers at\\nlast broke silence by observing to me, that if she could\\nsee something shine, she could probably see what it was.\\nWhat do you see shining O I do not know; I\\ncannot tell. Look well., Why, it fatigues me so. AVhy,\\nit is a w^atch. Fresh surprise on our part. But if she\\ncan see that it is a watch, again said M. Ferrers, she\\nwill probably tell us of the time. Can you tell me what\\ntime it is? Oh no that is too difficult.. Pay attention\\nand look well Well, I will try\u00e2\u0080\u009e I can perhaps tell the\\nhour, but I can never see the minutes. When she had\\nlooked with the utmost attention, she said, It is ten min-\\nutes to eight which was then the exact time. M. Fer-\\nrers wished to repeat the experiment himself, which he\\ndid, with similar success. He altered the direction of the\\nhands on his watch several times, and when it was pre-\\nsented to her without our having looked at it, she was\\nright every time,\\nM. Chardel narrates a case of a magnetic somnambule,\\nwho, while quietly sitting in her chah-, saw him go into\\nanother room for a decanter of water. He went to a filter-\\ning tank, turned the cock, but no water came. He spfit\\nott a piece of wood and picked the spigot with it, think-\\ning that the passage was obstructed, but without success.\\nHe then picked the air-hole, but no water came; at last\\nhe filled his decanter with unfiltered water, the som-\\nnambule, on his return, told him all of his motions,\\nwithout omittting a single circumstance notwithstanding\\nthere were between her and him two wall and a par-\\nlor.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0298.jp2"}, "299": {"fulltext": "NEW THEOEY OE ANIMAL MAGNETISM. 297\\nNew Theory of Animal Magnetism.\\nIn searching for materials to form a theory of Animal\\nMagnetism, it is only necessary to sweep, with a thought,\\nthe accumulated obstructions from the pathway of time,\\nand look back on the chaotic mass as it moves in retro-\\nspection from behind the dim nebula to occupy the more\\nconspicuous station assigned to it in cosmogony. See now\\nthe simple forms of matter, all globular, and how few in\\nnumber; count them; there are less than one hundred,\\nbut they are all moving to join in various proportions,\\nand form an infinite number of objects; oxygen and nitro-\\ngen have come together, and now f oi-m a new transparent\\ncalled atmosphere. A new composition of matter is now\\nto be formed. See moving from a distance, two large\\ncollections of very small globules; the smallest collection\\nis oxygen, and extends six hundred and sixty-two miles;\\nthe largest collection is hydrogen, and extends one thou-\\nsand three hundred and twenty-five miles; the two col-\\nlections have now come together, and formed a pond of\\ntransparent water, only one mile in length. Again the\\nsimple globules are in motion, and now many of them\\nmeet together and form a granite rock others, collected\\nin another place, have formed earth, A new substance\\nis now to be formed, many kinds of globules are now\\nmoving; they are now together, and form iron ore. The\\nsimple globules are now every where in motion, and\\nmeeting together in different clusters, from all the inam-\\ninate objects-composing the universe. A more beautiful\\nformation is now to take place, the globules are collect-\\ning in the water; they meet from the trUobite, a marine\\nannual; it is alive, and is capable of re-producing its kind.\\nThe globules are every Avhere again in motion, and as\\nthey come together, form inumerable kinds of fishes,\\nbeasts, and birds. The globules are again congregating,\\nand see they have formed the most beautiful figure of\\nall; it is a Man; he is endowed with intellect, and seems\\nsuperior to all other forms of life; all the previous remain-\\ning globules have congregated in his formation, and there\\nseems nothing left. Look again, you will perceive some", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0299.jp2"}, "300": {"fulltext": "298 NEW THEORY OF ANIMAL MAGNETISM.\\nvery small globules left; they are mere molecules compared\\nwith the other globules, and appear mflnite in numbers;\\nthey do not seem to combine with any formed object,\\nand yet they move every where, and pass through every\\nthing. All objects being composed of round globules,\\nmust be porous, occasioned by the impossibility of round\\nglobules forming a perfectly solid mass. It is between\\nthese openings or pores that the last remaining globular\\nmoleules find a free passage through all objects in the\\nUniverse. In the unobstructed passage of these infinitely\\nsmall globules, moving in infinite numbers, they produce\\nsuch wonderful effects, that we will, for convenience,\\nname them collectively, magnetic fluid. This fluid some-\\ntimes collects in large masses in the atmosphere, which it\\ndisplaces to occupy the space itself; though collected in\\nlarge masses, it never coheres together, and being very\\nelastic, it sometimes starts suddenly to another place,\\nleaving a vacum where it comes from. This vacum being\\nsuddenly filled by the elastic atmosphere rushing to-\\ngether, forms the phenomenon called thunder the rapid\\npassage of the magnetic fluid through the atmosphere,\\nproduces a vivid light, called lightning^ by friction with the\\nglobules which form the atmosphere.\\nLet us now trace the course of the magnetic fluid\\nthrough the pores of objects on the earth. In passing\\nthrough some objects, particularly iron, it frequently\\ncontinues to keep up the stream, until stopped by a very\\nsimple process well known to man, and the iron through\\nwhich the stream passes is called the magnet large beds\\nof iron ore are found in the earth, having a stream of this\\nfluid passing through it from South to North; the South-\\nern part of the bed of ore where the fluid enters, is called\\nthe South Pole, and the Northern end, where the fluid\\npasses out, is called the North Pole. If you break from\\nthe mass a piece of this ore, it will have a stream passing\\nthrough it with a South and North Pole this is called a\\nnatural magnetic fluid (first put in motion by the atmos-\\nphere,) will gradually work through the metal,\\nand in one or two years, form a permanent stream\\nthrough the tongs, which all have a North and South\\nPole, and perform all the phenomena of the horse shoe\\nmagnet. Draw a natural magnet lenthwise over a bar of\\niron or steel, and you start a stream of the magnetic fluid\\nthrough it; this bar, poised on a vertical pivot, forms the\\ncompass used by surveyors and mariners; it receives the\\nfluid at the South, and discharges it at the North; hence\\nit must follow, if the South Pole of one magnet h^ placed\\nto the North Pole of another magnet, they will cling to-", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0300.jp2"}, "301": {"fulltext": "NEW THEORY OF ANIMAL MAGNETISM. 2:3\\ngether, for the fluid in passing out of the North Pole of\\none, enters the South Pole of the other, and continues\\nan unbroken streajn; that is called attraction in magnets;\\nand hence, it also follows, that if two North Poles come\\ntogether, they will fly off, because two streams come to-\\ngether from opposite directions; that is called magnetic\\nrepulsion. The same fact will be seen, if you take two\\nhorse shoe magnets and bring them together the two\\nNorth and the two South Poles, which will repel each\\nother, and if one is suspended the other will fall; but if\\nyou turn one over so as to bring the north of one to the\\nsouth of the other, they will adhere by the circular\\nstream of magnetic fluid running through the whole\\nhence it follows incontrovertibly, that as the magnetic\\nfluid can pass through the pores of all substances, two\\nmagnets must continue to attract each other, even\\nwhen other substances are placed between them; this\\nis found to be invariably true, in all cases tried with\\nthe most dense substances, such as glass, wood, metals,\\nwater, stones, etc., and the magnets aKvays continue\\nto attract the same as if nothing intervened. There\\nIS ONE EXCEPTION ONLY TO THIS GENERAL LAW,\\nCERIN,* AN ANIMAL FAT, (THE GLOSULETS OF WHICH ARE\\nSO SOFT, THAT THEY MASH TOGETHER, AND CLOSE UP ALL\\nTHE PORES,) WHEN SPREAD ON PAPER AND HELD BE-\\nTWEEN TV^O MAGNETS, CUTS OFF THE MAGNETIC STREAM\\nAND RENDERS THE MAGNETS AS POWERLESS AS WOOD. If\\na streai of magnet fluid can be caused to run through a\\nbar Oj iro b}^ drav/ing a natural magnet in one direction\\novej. it i follows that the stream can be changed or stop-\\nped by drawing the natural magnet over it in an opposite\\ndirec^ on. This is also true in practice; and even a com-\\nmon spike drawn hard over a magnet needle from the\\nNorth to i-he Sou^h Pole, will deprive the needle of its\\nmagn tic pr perties, and destroy the compass,\\nTh magn tic fluid pervades the pores of all substances\\nand is generally inactive, or nearly so, until put in mo-\\ntion by the firiction of some other globules striking\\nagainst it. It ha^. a great affinity for animal hair, and a\\nstill great r for me 1; hence, a deer s tail whirled in the\\natmooDhere, collects the fluid, and the tail striking on a\\nmetaliv. i^.ate, communicates the fluid to the plate, from\\nthence it may be conducted by a string to a stop cock,\\nThis wonderful substance, Cerin, is like the larnin of Teddy\\nO Rourke, it must be spi-ead thin and made to g-o a great ways,\\nor else the fabric will explode, as it comes ia contact with the dull\\nbrain of a scieati c numskull.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0301.jp2"}, "302": {"fulltext": "300 NEW THEORY OF ANIMAL MAGNETISM.\\nrom which hydrogen gas may issue and take fire by\\nthe fluid; such a lamp is used for instructive lectures\\nat most colleges in the country. The fluid is collected\\nby the same principle in the electric machine. The\\nmagnetic fluid pervades all substances, animate as well\\nas inanimate, and produces singular effects in animals.\\nA small portion of it conducted from an electric ma-\\nchine into man, will prodnce drowsiness a very large\\nportion of it will produce death, by forcing asunder\\nthe globules of which nian is composed the hairs on\\nman are continually collecting small portions of the fluid\\nfrom the atmosphere; woolen clothes also collect it, and\\ncomniunicate it to the system, from whence it again\\npasses off to the atmosphere. A small portion of the\\nfluid is always necessary to support life, by warming\\nthe blood with friction as it passes through the pores;\\nsufficient for this purpose is collected from the carpet\\nand earth by the feet, which forms the South Pole of an\\nanimal magnet; the eye by continually straining after ob-\\njects, causes the fluid to pass off at the retina, which\\nforms the North Pole, (when awake,) of an animal mag-\\nnet; change and relaxation, ebb and flow, are essential to\\nall things; the nerves, by fatigue with manual labor\\nduring ten or twenty hours, loose the power to draw the\\nfluid up, and the eyes by fatigue with looking, loose\\nthe power to throw off the magnetic fluid, which must\\nnow begin to ebb or run downwards, entering in at the\\neye, which now becomes the South Pole, and passes off\\nat the feet, which in turn becomes the North Pole of the\\nanimal magnet; the eye being transparent, receives the\\nfluid faster than it can pass off at the North Pole, (feet,)\\nwhich surcharges the system and produces the natural\\nsleep. In sleep there is a relaxation of the nervous sys-\\ntem, and consequently the whole body is gradually in-\\nvigorated, until the eye gains sufficient strength to open\\nand change the magnetic current, receiving the fluid\\nagain at the feet, (South Pole,) and throw it off from the\\neye, (North Pole this is called natural waking.\\nIn the waking state, man is capable of forcing a more\\nthan natural magnetic stream from the eye; particularly\\nif he desires to see or have the object towards which he\\ndirects the eye; this is called will. Hence man is able\\nto will a magnetic current from his eyes; the magnetic\\nfluid can pass through the pores of all substaces, (except\\nCERIN) and consequently the current thrown out by the\\nwill can be sent to another person s eye, which (if\\nawake) will likewise be a north pole, and offer an opposing\\ncurrent; two currents meeting f\u00c2\u00ab\u00c2\u00abom opposite directions,", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0302.jp2"}, "303": {"fulltext": "NEW THEORY OF ANIMAL MAGNETISM. 301\\nthe weakest must be turned. Hence if a strongman will\\na magnetic current from his eye, (North Pole, it nmst\\nturn the weak current from a woman s eye, which now\\nbecomes the South Fole^ receiving the magnetic current\\nfrom the North Pole of a man. In nature, when the eye\\nbecomes the South Pole, the person is in natural sleep\\nhence, when by the animal will, the eye of a women\\nbecomes the South Pole, the woman is in a magnetic\\nSLEEP, and can be a magnetic sonmambulist, the same\\nas one in a natural sleep, can be a natural somnambulist.\\nIn the magnetic sleep, the magnetic fluid passes from\\nthe brain and eye (North Pole,) of the magnetizer to the\\neye (South Pole) and brain of the magnetic sonmambu-\\nlist the magnetic fluid is composed of globular\\nmolecules which touch each other, and form strings or\\nmagnetic cords from one brain to the other; hence, if the\\nbrain of the magnetizer be moved by a sense of exter-\\nnal things, the magnetic cords instantly conveys the\\nsame sympathetic move or sense of external things\\nto the brain of the magnetic somnambulist.\\nA sense of external things is knowledge^ hence, all\\nknowledge possessed by the magnetiser is instantly pos-\\nsessed by the magnetic somnambulist, who is, consequen-\\ntly, capable of answering correctly any question which\\nthe magnetizer could answer himself.\\nDiseases are obstructions in the pores of the body. The\\nmagnetic fluid carries off all obstructions in its passage\\nthrough the pores of the system hence, all diseases are\\ncarred off from the system by the magnetic fluid, in its\\npassage through the pores of the system.\\nThe magnetizer can force the fluid through all ob.ieets,\\n(except cerin,) and consequently can force the fluid by\\nhis will, in a curve through the brain of a third person,\\nin its passage to the brain of the magnetic somnambulist;\\nand consequently, the third person will be in magnelic com-\\nmunication with the magnetic sonmambulist, who will be\\nable to answer correctly, ah questions which the person\\nin magnetic communication could answer himself.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0303.jp2"}, "304": {"fulltext": "302 PEOCESS USED IN INDIA.\\nProcess used in India to Produce\\nMagnetic Sleep.\\nHaving ascertained from my first case that coma might\\nbe induced with the patient s eyes closed, and feeling the\\nnecessity of an easy attitude for both operator and pa-\\ntient where an hour s labor was given, I mesmerised my\\nnext patient lying in bed, with his eyes closed, and in a\\ndarkened room. If the open eye were not necessary, I\\nconcluded that it would probably be a source of distrac-\\ntion; and the sitting posture was also objectionable for\\nthe same reason, as a person instinctively resists going to\\n^sleep in the erect posture. My second patient was ac-\\ncordingly mesmerised lying in bed, with his eyes closed,\\nand the room darkened. This succeeded perfectly,\\nand, from its convenience, was the routine followed ever\\nafterwards without exception.\\nThe patient was desired to lie down and compose him-\\nself to sleep his head was brought to one end of the bed\\nand the mesmeriser seated himself so as to be able to\\nbreathe upon the head and extend his hands readily to\\nthe pit of the stomach.\\nWe then began making passes from the back of the\\nhead down to the pit of the stomach, breathiug gently\\non the head and eyes also. The fingers were held loosly\\nin the shape of claws, and carried slowly over the parts\\nat the distance of an inch from the surface, dwelling\\nlonger over the eyes, nose, mouth, and sides of the neck\\nand, on reaching the pit of the stomach, the hands were\\nsuspended there some minutes.\\nHaving continued this process for a quarter or half an\\nhour, the passes may be advantageously ended by press-\\nmg both hands for some minutes on the pit of the sto-\\nmach. This done for an hour daily was the routine\\nwhich enabled me to perform so many mesmeric opera-\\ntions, and often on the first day of treatment. The lads\\nvaried this routine, however, to suit their convenience.\\nOne preferred to place both hands on the pit of the sto-\\nmach from the beginning to the end of the process,\\nbreathing on the eyes and head all the time. Another\\nplaced one hand on the pit of the stomach at the begin-\\nning, and made passes slowly over the face with the other,\\nchanging hands when tired. A third would make his\\npasses from the stomach upwards to the head: and they\\nseemed to me to succeed all equally well\u00e2\u0080\u0094 provided they at-\\ntended to their work.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0304.jp2"}, "305": {"fulltext": "PROCESS USED IN INDIA. ^03\\nA moderate degree of continued attention is indispensa-\\nble. Otherwise the passes are mere mechanical move-\\nments without vitality, and the lads knew from experience\\nthat if they did not work with a will, they were losing\\ntheir time.\\nIt is better not to test the patient s condition at first\\nby speaking to him, but by gently raising his arm; and,if\\nit fall helplessly down without subsequent movement, or\\nis found cataleptic when bent, or rigid on attempting to\\nbend it, we may consider the mesmeric sleep to be\\nestablished. When the patient is insensible to the loudest\\nsounds, to pricking of the navel, and pinching of the nip-\\nple the operation may be performed. But the muscular ir-\\nritabihty cannot be extinguished in some persons; they\\nshow signs of irritation on being pricked, pinched, and\\nburned still if protracted testing does not awake them\\nthe operation may be confidently performed, as the signs\\nof sensibility are usually not increased during it, and the\\ncase is as successful for all practical purposes as when the\\npatient lies like a corpse.\\nThe more delicate European process may be resorted to\\nwhen required, and is performed in this manner.\\nThe patient is seated in a comfortable chair for sleep-\\ning in. The mesmeriser seats himself in front with the\\npatient s knees between his, and, laying hold of both\\nhands, opposing the thumbs to each other, he concen-\\ntrates his attention upon the patient, and desires him to\\nlook steadily at the operator. He having held his hands\\ntill there is an equihbrium of heat estabUshed, passes are\\nmade slowly from the forehead dov/n to the pit of the\\nstomach, and from, the crown of the head down both\\nsides of the neck, and along both arms to the fingers.\\nThe eye shows very satisfactorily the progress made.\\nWhen it begins to follow the mesmerizer s hand involun-\\ntarily, and a peculiar tremor of the eyelids, or a pro-\\nlonged heavy wink, is observed, it is very encouraging,\\nand ought to induce the mesmerizer to increase his\\nattention. The eye at last closes, but the eye-lashes\\ngenerally continue to quiver as if from an instinctive\\nattempt to open the eye. This the patient cannot now\\ndo, even though he may still retain his general sensibility\\nand consciousness. The process being continued, or\\nrepeated, at last brings on the mesmeric coma wliich\\nbeing tested the operation is performed.\\nBut this process seems to induce a state of artificial\\nsomnambulism in the European muvih more frequently\\nthan in the Asiatic; and possibl}^ the difference of the\\nroutine followed may partly account for this. Our object", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0305.jp2"}, "306": {"fulltext": "304 PROCESS USED IN INDIA.\\nwas to knock the patient down as fast as possible, and to\\nkeep him from rallying from, or even feeling, the first\\nimpression made on the system; and this appears to be\\nmore effectuaily done by the more intimate and contin-\\nued contact of the two bodies. My patients seemed to\\nescape the first stimulating effects of Mesmerism (the\\nsomnambulistic stage), and to plunge at once into the\\ncoma. But painless operations may be as satisfactorily\\nperformed in somnambulism as in mesmerism.\\nIn the treatment of chronic diseases suited for\\nMesmerism, coma is not often required. If it occur, it is\\nprobably because nature needs it. But we ought to be\\nsatisfied with the improvement of the patient, though it\\nbe unaccompanied by any striking phenomena. The sys-\\ntem is often recruited, not the less effectually because sil-\\nently- -just as the best digestion is least felt.\\nFor refreshing the nervous system and procuring sleep,\\nmesmerising a longs courants, as the French call it, will\\nusually be found sufficient. This consists in steady con-\\ntinuous tractions, with the points of the spread fuigers,\\nfrom head to foot; the head may be breathed upon also.\\nand the hand allowed to rest for a, few minutes at the pit\\nof the stomach, en passant. Half an hour, or an hour of\\nof tliis, will often soothe restlessness, bring back natural\\nsleep, and invigorate the nervous system.\\nLocAii MESMERisiNa is often very useful in removing\\npain (especially if the system has been previously affect-\\nby Mesmerism), and a few minutes of local passes, with\\nor without contact, combined with breathing on the part,\\nwill sometimes prove tiie speediest anodyne for local\\npains.\\nThe DEMESMERisiisra Processes.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 The means used\\nfor dissipating the mesmeric influence are precisely those\\nemployed for rousing the brain in fainting or natural in-\\nsensibility. Although volition and consciousness are sus-\\npended in natural syncope and mesmeric coma, the invol-\\nuntary part of the nervous system still retains sensi-\\nbility to organic stimulants. Cold air and friction are\\nthe natural stimulants to the nerves of the skin, and are\\nthe most likely means used to restore their sensibility,\\nwhen it is diminished. The respiratory nerves of the\\nface and chest are more particularly sensitive to the im-\\npression of cold air and friction; and these natural agents\\nare the popular and most successful remedies in restoring\\npersons to their senses who have fainted. This result\\narises, I presume, from the organic irritation of the\\nnerves of the skin being propagated to the brain, there-\\nby arousing it again to activity and re-establishing the", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0306.jp2"}, "307": {"fulltext": "PROCESS USED IN INDIA. 305\\ninterrupted sympathy between the voluntary and in-\\nvoluntary parts of the nervous system.\\nThe equilibrium of the nervous circulation is equally\\nderanged in the mesmeric condition. But organic life\\nseems to be exalted at the expense of the life of voli-\\ntion, and the nerves of the surface are often preterna-\\nturally sensitive to organic stimuli; so much so, that\\nblowing in the face of a mesmeric sleeper will often\\ncause a shock that rouses the brain into activity in a\\nmoment, and the person instantaneously recovers his\\nsenses. How this happens I cannot imagine, unless it\\nbe by driving the nervous currents back to the surface\\nthat had been concentrated upon and had oppressed the\\nbrain.\\nBlowing sharply in the eyes, rubbing the eyelids and\\neyebrows, rapid reverse or transverse passes, sprinkling\\ncold water on the face and chest, or exposing the sur-\\nface of the body to a cold current of air, are the usual\\nmethods employed for demesmerising the brain; and\\nwhen locally applied are equally efficacious in demes-\\nmerising cataleptic or rigid limbs.\\nBut it sometimes happens that all these means fail to\\nawake the sleeper, and I know nothing for it but to\\nleave him alone and let him sleep it out, which is\\nalways done without any bad consequences that I ever\\nobserved.\\nThe smallness of the cause, and the greatness of the\\nresult, when we restore a person in a moment to the\\nfull possession of his senses and intellect by blowing in\\nhis eyes or sprinkling cold water on his face when in\\nthe mesmeric coma, are quite as remarkable in natural\\nfainting, in which the effects from the same causes are\\nequally striking and instantaneous, although the two\\nconditions can have nothing in common in their origin.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0307.jp2"}, "308": {"fulltext": "306\\nTHE ART OF MIND READING.\\nW\u00c2\u00ab ire indebted to that valuable and interesting magazine\\nthe Popular Science Monthlj^^, tor the following explanation\\nof thv\u00c2\u00bb pLenomenon of mind reading. It was written by a\\nphysician of high standing (George M. Beard, M. D.) who has\\ngiven much attention to this and kindred subjects.\\nIn the history of science and notably in the history of phy-\\nsiology and medicine, it has often happened that the ignorant\\nand obscuie have stumbled upon facts and phenomena which,\\nthough wrongly interpreted by the mselves, yet, when investi-\\ngated and explained, have proved to be of the highest interest.\\nThe phenomena of the emotional trance, for example, had been\\nImown tor ages, but rot until Mesmer forced them on the\\nscientific world, by his. public exhibitions and his ill-founded\\ntheory of animal magnetism, did they receive any serious and\\nintelligent study. Similarly the general fact that mind may so\\n(ict on body as to produce involuntary and unconscious muscu-\\nlar motion was by no means unrecognized by physiolo-\\ngists, and yet not until the mind-reading excitement\\nwas it demonstrated that this principle could be utilized\\nfor the finding of any object or limited locality on which a sub-\\nject, with whom an ojperator is in physical connection, concen-\\ntrates his mind.\\nAlthough, as I have since ascertained, experiments of this\\nkind had been previously performed in a quiet, limited way in\\nprivate circles, and mo tiy by ladies, yet very few had heard\\nof or witnessed them they were associated in the popular\\nmind very naturally with mesmerism or animal magnet-\\nism, and by some were called mesmeric games. The phy-\\nsiological explanation had naver been even suggested hence\\nthe first public exhibitions of Brown, with his brilliantly suc-\\ncessful demonstrations of his skill in this direction, were a new\\nrevelation to physiologists as well as to the scientific world in\\ngeneral.\\nThe method of mind-reading, introduced by Brown, which\\nis but one of many methods that have been or may be used, is\\nas follows\\nThe operator, usually blind-foirded, firmly applies the back", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0308.jp2"}, "309": {"fulltext": "THE ART OF MIND EEADING. 307\\nof the band of the subject to be operated on against his owB\\nforehead, and with his other hand presses lightly upon the\\npalm and fingers of the subject s hand. In this position he\\ncan detect, if sufficientlj expert, the slightest movement, im-\\npulse, tremor, tension, or relaxation, in the arm of the subject.\\nHe then requests the subject to concentrate his mind on some\\nlocality in the room, or on some hidden object, or on some one\\noi the letters of the alphabet suspended along the wall. The\\noperator, blindfolded, marches sometimes very rapidly with\\nthe subject up and down the room or rooms, up and down\\nstairways, or out-of-doors through the streets, and, when he\\ncomes near the locality on which the subject is concentrating\\nhis mind, a slight impulse or movement is communicated to\\nhis hand by the hand of the subject.\\nThis impulse is both involuntary and unconscious on the\\npart of the subject. He is not aware, and is unwilling, at first,\\nto believe, that he gives any such impulse and yet it is suffi-\\ncient to indicate to the expert and practised operator that he\\nhas arrived near the hidden object, and then, by a close study\\nand careful trials in cMfferent directions, upward, downward,\\nand at various points of the compass, he ascertains precisely\\nthe localit5% and is, in many cases, as confident as though he\\nhad received verbal communication from the subject.\\nEven though the article on which the subject concentrates\\nhis mind be very small, it can quite frequently be ])icked out\\nfrom a large number, provided the subject be a good one, and\\nthe operator sufficiently skillful. The article is sometimes\\nfound at once, with scarcely any searching, the operator going\\nto it directly, without hesitation, and with a c^^lerity and pre-\\ncision that, at first sight, and until the physiological explana-\\ntion is understood, justly astonish even the most thoughtful\\nand skeptical. (In New Haven I saw Brown, before a large\\naudience, mai ch ofi rapidly through the aisle and find at once\\nthe person on whom the subject was concentrating his mind, I\\nalthough there was the privilege of selecting any one out of a\\nthousand or more present.) These experiments, it should be\\nadded, are performed in public or private, and on subjects of\\nunquestioned integrity, in the presence of experts, and under\\na combination of circumstances and conditions for the elimina-\\ntion of sources of error that mak it necessary to rule out at\\nonce the possibility of collusion.\\nThe alternative is, therefore, between the actual transfer of\\nthought from subject to operator, as has been claimed, and the\\ntheory of unconscious muscular motion and relaxation on the\\npart of the subject, the truth of which I have demonstrated by\\nnumerous experiments.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0309.jp2"}, "310": {"fulltext": "308 THE AET OF MIND READING.\\nOn? of the gentlemen with whom I have experimented, Judge\\nBlydenberg, who begun to test his ])owers directly after I lirst\\ncalled public attention to the subject in New Haven, claims to\\nBiicceed, even with the most intellectual persons, provided\\nthey fully comply with the conditions, and honestly and per-\\nsistently concentrate their minds. One fact of interest, with\\nree; .rd to his experiments, is the exceeding minuteness of the\\nobjects that he tinds. A large number of the audience empty\\ntheir pockets on the table, until it is covered with a medley of\\nkeys, knives, trinkets, and miscellaneous small objects. Out\\nof them the subject selects a small seed a little larger than a\\npea, and even this the operator, after some searching, hits\\nprecisely.\\nOne may take n large 1 unch of keys, throw them on ihe\\ntable, and he picks out the very one on which the subject con-\\ncentrates his mind.\\nAnother fact of interest in his experiments is that, if a sub-\\nject thinks over a number of articles in different parts of the\\nroom, and, after some doubt and hesitation, finally selects some\\none, the operator will lead him, sometimes successively, to the\\ndifferent obj-ects on which Le has thought, and will wind up\\nwith the one that he finally selected- He also performs what\\nis known as the double test, which consists in taking the\\nhand of a third party, who knows nothing of the hidden ob-\\nject, but who is connected with another party ho does know,\\nand who concentrates his mind upon it. The connection of\\nthese two persons is made at the wrist, and the motion is com-\\nmunicated fiom one to the other through the arms and hands.\\nThe double test has been regarded by some as an argument\\nagaiast the theory that this form of nn nd-reading was simply\\nthe utilizing of unconscious muscular motion on the part of\\nthe persons operated upon.\\nThis gentleman represents that the sensation of muscular\\nthrill is very slight indeed, even with good subjects; and, in\\norder to detect it, he directs his own mind as closely as pos-\\nsible to the hand of the subject.\\nIn all these experiments, with all mind-readers, the require-\\nment for the subject to concentrate the mind on the locality\\nagreed upon is absolute if that condition is not fulfilled,\\nnothing can be done, for the very excellent reason that, with-\\nout such mental concentration, there will be no unconscious\\nmuscular tension or relaxation to guide the operator.\\nExperiments of the following kind I have made repeatedly\\nwith the above-named gentlemen\\nA dozen or more pins may be stuck about one inch or half\\nan inch apart into the edge of a table I concentrate my mind", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0310.jp2"}, "311": {"fulltext": "THE AET OF MIND READING. J^09\\non any one of these pins, telling no one. The operator enters\\ntbe room, gets the general direction of the object in the usual\\nway, and, when he has come near to the row of pins, he will\\nlimit the physical connection to one of his index-fingers, j^res-\\nsing firmly against one of mine, and m this way he soon finds\\nthe head of the pin on which my mind has been concentrated.\\nThe only limitation of area in the locality that can be founc\\nby a good mind-reader with a ^ood subject is, that two objects\\nshould not be so near to each other that the finger of the oper-\\nator strikes on both at once\\nWhen I began the study of this subject, I supposed, even\\nafter the true theory of the matter had become clear to me,\\nthat very small objects and narrow areas could not be found in\\nthis way. Subsequent experiments showed that this suppo-\\nsition was erroneous. In a wide hall, in the presence of alarge\\naudience, where the subject had the right to think of any ob-\\nject he chose Brown once found, after considerable search-\\ning, so limited an area as a capitrl letter in the title of a news-\\npaper pinned up on the wall and barely -within reach. About\\nan hour after, in the same place, he found a very small vial out\\nof quite a large number ranged in a row. Although reasoning\\ndeductively from the known relations of mind to body, I had\\nestablished conclusively to my own mind that the so-called\\nmind-reading was really muscle-reading, yet I could not be-\\nlieve, until the above-named experiments had been made, and\\nfrequently repeated, that it was possible for even the most ex-\\npert operator to fi.nd such small objects and no physiologist,\\nI am sure, would have believed such precision in these exper-\\niments conceivable until his general deductions had been\\nmany times verified, and supplemented by observations in\\nwhich every source of error was guarded against.\\nAs already remarked, there are a variety of ways of making\\nthe physical connection between subject and operator. A lady\\nmay go out of the room, and while she is absent an object is\\nhidden. She returns, and two ladies, who know where the\\nobject is, stand up beside her in the middle of tbe room and\\nplace both of their hands upon her body, one hand in front,\\nthe other behind all three stand there for a moment, the two\\nsubjects who know where the object is, keeping their minds\\nintensely concentrated on that locality. In a moment or so\\nthis lady who is to find the object moves off in the direction\\nwhere it is, the other ladies with her still keeping their hands\\nupon her, and in nearly all cases she finds it. This is accom-\\nplished Lythe unconscious muscular tension of the two ladies\\nwho know where the object is, acting upon the person of the\\nlady who is seeking it.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0311.jp2"}, "312": {"fulltext": "310 THE ^V OF MIND BEADING.\\nThis experiment I hAv^ repeated with a mynber of amateur\\nperformers, and in all cases with pretty uniform success.\\nThis method is easier, both to learn and to practice, than some\\nof the others it is also far less artistic, and is not at all adapt-\\ned for the finding of very small localities. It illustrates, how-\\never, the general principle of mind acting on body producing\\nmuscular tension in the direction of that locality on which the\\nthoughts are concentrated.\\nThe relaxation, when the locality or its neighborhood is\\nreached, is not so distinctly appreciated in this method of ex-\\nperimenting, which is Fufficient, however, to enable the opera-\\ntor to get the right direction and to proceed until the corner\\nor side of the room is reached; then, by a combination of\\nmanipulation and giiess-work, she will, after a few trials, get\\nhold of the precise object hidden, or locality thought of.\\nWhen the operator and subject are connected by the methods\\npractised by Brown, it is possible to detect also the relaxation\\nwhen the locality is reached, and, guided by this, the master\\nin the art knows just when and where to stop and, in very\\nmany cases, feels absolutely sure that he is right, and with a\\ngood subject is no more liable to error than he would be to\\nhear wrongly or imperfectly if directed by word of mouth.\\nThe special methods of muscle-reading here described may\\nbe varied almost indefinitely, the only essential condition\\nbeing, that the connection between the subject or subjects is\\nof such a nature as to easily allow the sense of muscular ten-\\nsion or relaxation to be communicated. Instead of two sub-\\njects, there may be three, four, or half a dozen, or but one.\\nWith a number of subjects the chances of success are greater\\nthan with one, for the two-fold reason that the united muscu^\\nlar tension of all will be more readily felt than that of but one,\\nand because any single subject may be a bad one\u00e2\u0080\u0094 that is, one\\nwho is capable of muscular controi while among a number\\nthere will be very likely one or more good ones. For these two\\nreasons, amateurs succeed in this latter method when they fail\\nor succeed but imperfectly after the method of Brown.\\nA method frequently used, although it is not very artistic,\\nconsists in simply taking the hand of the object and leading\\nhim directly, or, as is more likely to be the case, indirectly to\\nthe locality on which his mind is concentrated.\\nJ. Stanley Grimes thus describes the performance of a mind-\\nreader in Chicago I repeatedly witnessed similar perform-\\nances with different experts in this branch and under circum-\\nstances where every element of error from intentional or unin-\\ntentional collusion was rigidly excluded. At the request of the\\ncompany the same young lady was again sent from the room", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0312.jp2"}, "313": {"fulltext": "THE AUT OF MIND BEADING. 311\\nn(\\\\ blindfolded, as on previous occasions. The gentleman\\nrequested tbe company to Riiggebt anytbin they desired the\\nsubject shoukl be willed to do, thus removing any possibility\\nof a secret agreement to deceive betM^een the parties. It was\\nsug ^ested tliat the young lady should be 1, rought into the\\nroom and placed in a position with her face toward the north\\nthat the gentleman shoiild then place his lingers upon her\\nshoulder as before that she should turn immediately to the\\nright facing the south and proceed to a certain figure in the\\nparlor-carpet then turning to the west, she was to approach\\na sofa in a remote corner of the room, from which she should\\nremove a small tidy, which she should take to the opposite\\nside of the room, and place it upon the head of a certain\\nyoung gentleman in the company she was then to proceed to\\nthe extreme end of the parlor, and take a coin from the right\\nvest pocket of a gentleman, and return to the opposite side of\\nthe room, and place the coin in the left vest pocket of another\\ngentleman named she was then to remove the tidy from the\\nhead of the gentleman ujDon whom it had been placed, and\\nreturn it to the iete-a-ieie where she originally found it.\\nI must confess to no little surprise when I saw the young\\nlady perform with the most perfect precision every minute de-\\ntail as above described, and with the most surprising alacrity;\\nin fact so quick were her motions that it was with the greatest\\ndifficulty that the gentleman could keep pace with the young\\nlady s movements.\\nI have seen a performer who though one of the pioneers in\\nthis art is far less skillful than many with whom I have exper-\\nimented\u00e2\u0080\u0094take a hat from the head of a gentleman in a small\\nprivate circle, and carry it across the room and put it on the\\nhead of another gentleman take a book or any other object\\nfrom one person to another or go in succession to different\\npictures hanging on the w^all and i^erform other feats of a sim-\\nilar character, while simply taking hold of the wa-ist of the sub-\\nject. In the experiment described by Mr. Grimes the subject\\nplaced three fingers of his right hand on the shoulder of the\\nope^-ator. Note the fact that in all these experiments direction\\nand .ocality are all that the mind-reader finds the quality of\\nthe object found or indeed whether it be a movable object at\\nall or merely a limited locality as a figure in the carpet or on\\nthe wall, is not known to the mind-reader until he picks it up\\nor handles it then if it be a small object as a hat, a book, or\\ncoin, or tidy, he very naturally takes it and moves off with it\\nin the direction indicated by the unconscious muscular ten-\\nsion of the subject, and leaves it where he is ordered by un-\\nlonscions muscular reiasation. In the great excitement that", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0313.jp2"}, "314": {"fulltext": "312 THE AET OF MIND READING.\\nattends these novel and most remarkable experiments the en-\\ntranced audience fail to notice that the operator really finds\\nnothing but direction and locality.\\nI have said that various errors of inference, as well as of ob-\\n(Servation, have been associated with these experiments. A\\nyoung lady who had been quite successful as an amateur in\\n-,bis art was subjected by me to a critical analysis of her\\n)owers before a large private audience. She supposed that it\\nwas necessary for all the persons in the audience to concentr?.te\\ntheir minds on the subject as well as those whose hands were\\nupon her. I proved by some decisive experiments, in which\\na comparison was made with what could be done by chance\\nalone, that this was not necessary and that the silent, unex-\\npressed will of the audience had no effect on the operator, save\\ncertain nervous sensations created by the emotion of expect-\\nancy. Similarly I proved that when connected with the sub-\\njects by a wire, she could find nothing, although she exper-\\nienced various subjective sensations, which she attributed to\\nmagnetism, but which were familiar results of mind acting\\non body.\\nAnother lady, who is quite successful in these experiments,\\nthought it was necessary to hide keys, and supposed that\\nmagnetism had something to do with it. I tcld her that\\nthat was not probable, and tried another object, and found\\nthat it made no difference what the object was. She supposed\\nthat it was necessary that the object should be secreted on\\nsome person. I found that this was not necessary. She does\\nnot always succeed in finding the exact locality at once, but in\\nsome cases she goes directly to it she very rarely fails.\\nIn order to settle the question beyond dispute whether un-\\nconscious muscular action was the sole cause of this success in\\nfinding objects, I made the following crucial experiments with\\nthis lady Ten letters of the alphabet were placed on a piano,\\nthe letters being written on large pieces of paper. I directed\\nher to see how many times she would get a letter which was\\nin the mind of one of the observers in the room correctly by\\nchance purely, without any physical touch. She tried ten\\ntimes and got it right twice. I then had her try ten experi-\\nments with the hand of the person operated on against the\\nforehead of the operator, the hand of the operator ligntly\\ntouching against the fingers of this hand, and the person op-\\nerated on concentrating her mind all the while on the object,\\nand looking at it. In ten experiments tried this day, with the\\nsame letters, she was successful six times. I then tried the\\nsame number of experiments with a wire, one end being at-\\ntached to the head or hand of the subject, and the other end", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0314.jp2"}, "315": {"fulltext": "THE ART OF MIND READING. 313\\nto the head or hand of the operator. The wire was about ten\\nfeet long and was so arranged -being made fast at the middle\\nto a chair\u00e2\u0080\u0094 that no nuconscious muscular motion could bo\\ncommunicated through it from the person on whom she was\\noperating. She was successful but once out of ten times.\\nThus we see that by pure chance she was successful twice\\nout of ten times by utilizing unconscious muscular action\\nin the method of Brown she was successful six times outoften.\\nWhen connected by a wire she was less successful than when\\nshe depended on pure chance without any physical connec-\\ntion. In order still further to contirm this, I suggested to this\\nlady to find objects with two persons touching her body in the\\nmanner we have above described. I told these two to deceive\\nher, concentrating tlieir minds on the object hidden, at the\\nsame time using conscious motion toward some other part of\\nthe room. These experiments several times repeated, showed\\nthat it was possible to deceive her, just as we had found it pos-\\nsible to deceive other muscle-readers.\\nThe question whether it is possible for one to be a good\\nmuscle-reader and pretty uniformly successful, and yet not\\nknow just how the trick is done, must be answered in the af-\\nfirmative. It is possible to become quite an adept in this art\\nwithout suspecting even remotely the physiological explana-\\ntion. The muscular tension necessary to guide the operator\\nis but slight, and the senoation it produces may be very easily\\nreferred by credulous, uninformed operators to the passage\\nof magnetism and I am sure that with a number of oper-\\nators on whom I have experimented this mistake is made.\\nSome operators declare that they cannot tell how they find the\\nlocality, that their success is to them a mystery these\\ndeclarations are made by private, amateur performers, who\\nhave no motive to deceive me, and whose whole conduct\\nduring the experiments confirms their statements. Other\\noperators speak of thrills or vibrations which they feel, auras\\nand all sorts of indefinable sensations. These manifold\\nsymptoms are purely subjective, the result of mind acting\\non the body, the emotions of wonder and expectancy devel-\\noping various phenomena that are attributed to animal mag-\\nnetism, mesmerism or electricity \u00e2\u0080\u0094in short, to every-\\nthing but the real cause. I have seen amateurs who de-\\nclared that they experienced these sensations when trying\\nwithout success to read mind through the wires, or per-\\nhaps without any connection with the subject whatever.\\nPersons who are in the vicinity of galvanic batteries, even\\nthough not in the circuit, very often report similar exper-\\niences.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0315.jp2"}, "316": {"fulltext": "314 fTHE AET OF MIND READING.\\nThe facts whicli sustain the theory that the so-called mind-\\nreading is really muscle-reading that is, unconscious muscu-\\nlar tension asnd relaxation on the part of the subject may be\\nthus summarized\\n1. Mind-readers are only able to find direction and locality,\\nand in oider to find even these, they must be in physical con-\\nnection with the subject, who must move his body or some\\nportion of it\u00e2\u0080\u0094 as the fingers, hand or arm. If the subject sits\\nperfectly still, and keeps his fingers, hand and arm perfectly\\nquiet, so far as it is possible for him to do so by conscious ef-\\nfort, the mind-reader can never find even the locality on which\\nthe subject s mind is concentrated be can only find the direc-\\ntion where the locality is. Mind-readers never tell what an\\nobject is nor can they describe its color or appearance locality\\nand nothing more definite than locality is all they find. The\\nobject hidden may be a coin or a corn-cob, a x in or a pen-hol-\\nder, an elephant s tusk or a diamond pin\u00e2\u0080\u0094 it is all the same.\\nAgain, where connect ior of the operator with this subject is\\nmade by a wire, so arranged that mass-motion cannot be com-\\nmunicated and the subject concentrates his mind ever so\\nsteadily, the operator does just what he would do by pure\\nchance and no more. Tbis I have proved repeatedly with good\\nsubjects and expert performers.\\n2. The subject can successfully deceive the operator in\\nvarious ways first of all, by using muscular tension in the\\nwrong direction, and muscular relaxation at the wrong locality\\nwhile at the same time the mind is concentrated in the right\\ndirection. To deceive a good operator in this way is not al-\\nways eas3^ but after some practice the art can be acquired, and\\nit is a perfectly fair test in all experiments of this nature.\\nYet another way to deceive the mind-reader is, to think of\\nsome object or locality at a great distance from the room in\\nwhich the experiments are made, and if there be no ready\\nmeans of exit, the performer will be entirely baffled. I am\\naware that some very surprising feats have been done in the\\nway of finding distant out-of-door localities by muscle-readers\\nbut in these cases there has usually been an implied under-\\nstanding that the search was to be extended to out-of-doors\\nmuscle-readers have thus taken their subject up and down\\nstairs or from one room or hall into another, and out-of-doors\\nuntil the house or locality was reached.\\nIn Danielsonviile, Connecticut, Brown after an evening s ex-\\nhibition in v/hich his failures had been greater than usu.al (the\\nintelligent committee having the matter in charge being pre-\\npared by previous discussion of the theory of unconscious\\nmuscular motion), took a subject and led him from the hotel", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0316.jp2"}, "317": {"fulltext": "THE AET OF MIND EEADING- 315\\nia the darkness tbrongli tlie streets, to some rathev ont-of-the\\nway building on which the subject had fixed his mind. A\\nsomewhat similar exploit is recorded of Core} a performer in\\nDetroit.\\nAnother way in which deception may be practise 1 is for the\\nsubject to select some object or locality on the pei son of the\\nmuscle-reader. This object may be a watch, or a prcket-book,\\nor a pencil-case, or any limited region ol his clothin,?, as a but-\\nton, a cravat, or wristband. If such a selection be Hade, and\\nthe method of physical connection above described be used,\\nthe experiment will be a failure, provided the muf cle-reader\\ndoes not know or suspect than an object on his oM n person, is\\nto be chosen. Similarly if the subject selects a loca/i: y on his\\nown person, as one of the fingers or finger-nails of the hand\\nthat connects with the muscle-reader. When such tests are\\nused, there is not, so to speak, any leverage for the t^insion of\\nthe arm toward the locality on which the mind is copcentrated\\nand the muscle-reader eitlier gets no clew, or else one that\\nmisleads him.\\n3. When a subject who has good control over his montal and\\nmuscular movements keeps the arm connected with the oper-\\nator perfectly stiff, even though his mind be well concentrated\\non the hidden object, the operator cannot find either the dir-\\nection or the locality. This is a test which those who have the\\nrequisite physical qualifications can sometimes fulfill without\\ndifiaculty.\\nHere I may remark that the requirement to concentrate the\\nmind on the locality and direction sought for all the time the\\nsearch is being made is one that few if any can perfectly fulfill.\\nAny number of distracting thoughts will go through the best-\\ntrained mind of one who, in company with a blindfolded op-\\nerator, is being led furiously up and down aisles, halls, streets\\nand stairways, fearful each moment of stumbling or striking\\nhis head, and followed it may be, by astonished and eager in-\\nvestigiitors. And yet these mental distractions do not seem to\\ninterfere with the success of the experiment unless the aim is\\nkept studiouslj rigid, in which case nothing is found save by\\npure chance. The best subjects would appear to be those who\\nhave moderate power of mental concentration and slight con-\\ntrol over their muscular movements. Credulous wonder-loving\\nsubjects are sometimes partially entranced through the amo-\\ntions of reverence and expectation with subjects in thisDtate\\noperators are quite sure of success.\\n4. The uncertainty and capriciousness of these experiments,\\neven with expert operators, harmonize with the explanation\\nhere giyeiL Even with good subjects all mind-readers do not", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0317.jp2"}, "318": {"fulltext": "316\\nTHE ABT or MIND HEADING.\\naniformly succeed there is bnt little certainty or precision to\\ntbe average results of experiments, however skillluily perform-\\ned. An evening s exhibition may be a series of successes or a\\nseries of failures according to the character of the subjects;\\nand even in the successful tests the operator usually must try\\nvarious directions and many localities sometimes for ten or\\nfifteen minutes before he finds the locality sought for cases\\nwhere the operator goes at once in the right direction, stops at\\nthe right locality, and knows when he has reached it, excep-\\ntional.\\n5. Many of those who became expert in this art are aware\\nthat they succeed by detecting slight muscular tension and re-\\nlaxation on the part of the subject.\\nSome operators have studied the subject Bcie.utificaTly, and\\nare able to analyze with considerable precision the different\\nsteps in the process. In the minds of many this fact alone is\\nevidence adequate to settle the question beyond doubt.\\n6. A theoretical and explanatory argument is derived froro\\nthe recent discovery of motor centers in the cortex of the\\nbrain.\\nI was repeating the experiments of Fritsch and Hitzig at the\\ntime when my attention was first directed to the remarkable\\nexhibitions of Brown, and the results of my studies in the\\nelectrical irritation of the brains of dogs and rabbits suggested\\nto me the true explanation of mind-reading before any oppor-\\ntunity had been allowed for satisfactory experiments.\\nThe motto when we think, we move, which I have some-\\ntimes used to illustrate the close and constant connection of\\nmind and body, seems to be justified by these experiments on\\nthe brain, and may assist those who wish to obtain a con-\\ndensed statement of the physiology of mind-reading. Taking\\ninto full consideration the fact that all physiologists are not in\\nfull accord as to the interpretation to be given to these experi-\\nments, whether for example, the phenomena are due to direct\\nor reflex action, still it must be allowed by all who study this\\nsubject experimentally, that thought-centers and muscle-cen-\\nters are near neighbors, if not identical.\\nThe popular theory to account for these failures is the weari-\\nness or exhaustion of the operator but both in New York and\\nin New Haven it was observed that Brown met with his mosfe\\nbrilliant successes in the latter }:art of the evening, the reason\\nbeing that he happened then to have better subjects.\\nFrom an editorial in the Boston Medical and Surgical\\nJournal, (September 23, 1875,) referring to the mind-reading\\nexhibitions, and acceptinpf the ex]ilanation here given, I make\\nthe following extract The whole performance seems to us", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0318.jp2"}, "319": {"fulltext": "THE AET OF MIND EEADINQ. 317\\nto furnish good illustrations of one or two weU-knowJl prin-\\nciples of great physiological interest. Of these the most im-\\nportant is one that finds at once support and application in the\\nmodern doctrine of the natin-e of aphasia and kiudred disor-\\nders namely, that the th^^^ght, the conscious mental concep-\\ntion of an act differs from the voluntary impulse necessary to\\nthe performance of that act only in that it corresponds to a\\nfainter excitation of nervous centers in the cortex cerebri which\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2in both cases are anatomically identical. Thus in certain forms\\nof aphasia, the power to think in words is lost at the same time\\nwith the power of speech. Some persons think definitely only\\nwhen they think aloud, and it would readily be believed in\\nthe case of children and uneducated persons that the ability\\nto read would often be seriously interfered with if they were\\nnot permitted to read aloud. Similarly a half-premeditated\\nact of any kind slips often into performance before its author\\nis aware of the fact. Further, there is reason to think, from\\nthe experiments of Hitzig, that these same centers may be ex-\\ncited by the stimulus of electricity so as to call out some of\\nthe simpler co ordinated movements of the muscles on the\\nopposite side of the body. Applying now, this principle to\\nthe case in hand, it will be evident that for the person exper-\\nimented with to avoid giving muscular hints,* of either a\\npositive or negative kind, would be nearly impossible.\\nIn all these experiments it should be observed there is no\\none muscle, there is no single group of muscles, through\\nwhich this tension and relaxation are developed it is the\\nfinger, the hand, the arm, or the whole body, according to\\nthe method employed. Among the various methods of ma-\\nki^ connection between the subject and operator, are the\\nfollowing\\n1. The back of the subject s hand is held firmly against the\\nforehead of the operator, who, with his other hand, lightly\\ntouches the fingers ot the subject s hand.\\nThis is, undoubtedly, the mostartistic of all known methods.\\n2. The hand of the operator loosely grasps the wrist of the\\nsubject.\\nThis is a very inartistic method, and yet great success is of-\\ntentimes attained by it.\\n3. Oue finger of the operator is applied to one finger of\\nthe subject, papillae touching papillae.\\nThis is a modification of the first method by it exceedingly\\nsmall objects or localities are found.\\n4 The operator is connected in the usual way with a third\\nparty who does not know the locality thought of by the subject,\\nbut IS connected with the subject by the wrist double test.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0319.jp2"}, "320": {"fulltext": "318\\nTHE AliT OF MIND BEADING.\\nIn this experiment, which astounded even the best obser-\\nvers, the unconscious muscular motion was communicated\\nfrom the subject to the arm of the third party, and through\\nthe arm of the third party to the operator.\\n5. Two, three or more subjects, who agree on the locality to\\nbe thought of, apply their hands to the body of the operator in\\nfront and behind.\\nThis method is excellent for beginners, and the direction is\\neasily found by it but it is obviously not adapted for the\\nspeedy finding of small objects it is frequently used by\\nladie\\n6. The hand of the subject lightly rests on the shoulder of\\nthe operator.\\nIn all these methods the operator is usually blindfolded, so\\nthat he maj get no assistance from any other source than the\\nunconscious muscular action of the subject.\\nThe movements of the operator in these experiments may be\\neither very slow, cautious, and deliberate, or rapid and reck-\\nless. Brown in his public exhibitions, was very careful about\\ngetting the physical connection right, and then moved off very\\nrapidly, sometimes in the right direction, sometimes in the\\nwrong one, but frequently with such speed as to inconvenience\\nthe subject on whom he was operating. These rapid move^\\nments give greater brilliancy to public experiments and serve\\nto entrance the subject, and thus to render him far more like-\\nly to be unconscious of his own muscular tension and relaxa-\\ntion through which the operator is guided.\\nIhe power of muscle-reading depends mainly, if not entire-\\nly, on some phase of the sense of touch. Dr. Hanbury Smitk\\ntells me that a certain maker of lancets in London, had a\u00c2\u00ab-\\nq-uired great reputation for the superiority of his workman-\\nship. Suddenly there was a falling off in the character of the\\ninstrument that he sent out, and it was found that his wife,\\non whom he had depended to test the sharpness of the edge on\\nher finger or thumb, had recently died.\\nThat the blind acquire great delicacy of touch has long been\\nknown Laura Bridgman is a familiar illustration. Dr. Car-\\npenter states (although there are always elements of error\\ntlirough the unconscious assistance of other senses in cases of\\nthis kind) that Miss Bridgman recognized his brother, whom\\nehe had not met for a year, by the touch of the hand alone.\\nEvery physician recognizes the fact of this difference of sus-\\nceptibility to touch and in the diagnosis of certain conditions\\nof disease, much depends on the tacius eruditus. I am not sure\\nwhether this delicacy of perception, by which muscle-reading\\nis accomplished, is the ordinary sense of touch, that of coo", "height": "3546", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0320.jp2"}, "321": {"fulltext": "TSE AUT OF MIND REaDIKO. 3l9\\ntact, or of some of the special modifications of this sense. It\\nis to physiologists and students of diseases of the nervous\\nsystem a well-known fact that there are several varietiesof sen-\\nsibility\u00e2\u0080\u0094 to touch, to temperature, to pressure or weight, and\\nto pain\u00e2\u0080\u0094 which, possibly, represent different rates or modes of\\nvibration of the nerve-force.\\nThe proportion of persons who can succeed in muscle-read-\\ning, by the methods here described, is likewise a natural sub-\\nject of inquiry. Judging from the fact that out of the compar-\\nitively few who have made any efforts in this direction, a large\\nnumber have succeeded after very little practice, and some\\nfew, who have given the matter close attention, have acquired\\ngreat proficiency, it is probable that the majority of people of\\neither sex, between the ages of fifteen and fifty, could attain,\\nif they chose to labor for it, with suitable practice, a certain\\ngrade of skill as muscle-readers, jirovided, of course, good\\nsubjects were experimented with. It is estimated that about\\none in five or ten persons can be put into the mesmeric trance\\nby the ordinary processes and, under extraordinary circum-\\nstances, while under great excitement, and by different causes,\\nevery one is liable to be thrown into certain stages or forms of\\ntrance the capacity for the trance-state is not exceptional it\\nis not the peculier property of a few individuals it belongs\\ntro the human race similarly with the capacity for muscle-\\nreading.\\nThe age at which this delicacy of touch is most marked is an\\ninquiry of interest experience, up to date, would show that\\nthe very old are not good muscle-readers. I have never known\\nof one under fifteen years of age to study this subject al-\\nthough it is conceivable that bright children, younger than\\nthat age, might have sufficient power of attention to acquire\\nthe art, certainly if they had good instruction in it.\\nIn these mind-reading experiments, as indeed in all similar\\nor allied experiments with the living human beings, there are\\nsix sources of error, all of which must be absolutely guarded\\nagainst if the results are to have any precise and authcrative\\nvalue in science.\\n1. The involuntary and unconscious action of brain and\\nmuscle, including trance, in which the subject becomes a pure\\nautoinaton. I have used the phrase involuntary life to\\ncover all these phenomena of the system that appear indepen-\\ndently of the will. The majority of those who studied the\\nsubject of mind-reading eyen physicians and physiologists\\nfailed through want of a proper understanding or apprecia-\\ntion of this side of physiology.", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0321.jp2"}, "322": {"fulltext": "S20 THE AET OF MIND EEADINO.\\n2. Chance and coincidences. Neglect of ibis source of error\\nwas the main cause of the unfortunate results of the wire and\\nchain experiments with mind-readers.\\n3. Intentional deception on the part of the subject.\\n4. Unintentional deception on the part of the subject.\\n5. Collusion of confederates. To guard against al l the above\\nsources of error it is necessary for the experimenter himself tp\\nuse deception.\\n6. Unintentional assistance of audience or bystanders.\\nWhen the muscie-reader performs before an enthusiastic\\naudience, he is likely to be loudly applauded after each suc-\\ncess and, if the excitement be great, the applause, with\\nshuffling and rustling, may begin before he reaches the right\\nlocality, while he is approaching it when, on the other hand,\\nhe is far away from the locality, the audience wall inform him\\nby ominous silence. The performance thus becomes like the\\nhide-and-seek games of children, where they cry Warm\\nas the blindfolded operator approaches the hidden object;\\nHot as he comes close lO it and Cold when he wan-\\nders far from it. Some of the apparent successes with the\\nwire-test may be thus explained.\\nIn regard to all the public exhibitions of muscle-i^.aders, it\\nshould be considered that the excitement and eclat ot the occa-\\nsion contribute not a little to the success of the operator the\\nsubject grows enthusiastic\u00e2\u0080\u0094 are partly entranced, it may be\\nbecome partners in the cause of the performer end uncon-\\nsciously aid him far more than they would do in a pimilar en-\\ntertainment that was purely private. In a private ontertain-\\nment of muscle-reading at which I was present, ore of the\\nsubjects, while standing still, with his hands oi .he peratoi,\\nactually took a step forward toward the locality on which his\\nmind was concentrated, thus illustrating in a visiba n \u00c2\u00bbuinei\\nthe process by which muscle-reading is made possible.\\nThe subject under discussion, it will be observed, to be\\nstudied both inductively and deductively. The general claim\\nof mind or thought reading is disproved not by any such ex-\\nperiments as are here detailed, no matter how accurate or nu-\\nmerous they may be, but my reasoning deductively from the\\nbroad principle of physiology, that no human being has or\\ncan have any qualities different in kind from those that be-\\nlong to the race in general. The advantage which one human\\nbeing has ovpr rt of Iter\u00e2\u0080\u0094 not excepting the greatest geniuses\\nand the gtwWiwsit flJWUsters\u00e2\u0080\u0094 is, and must be, of degree only,", "height": "3659", "width": "2181", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0322.jp2"}, "323": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0323.jp2"}, "324": {"fulltext": "Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process\\nNeutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide\\nTreatment Date: Nov. 2004\\nPreservationTechnologies\\nA WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION\\n1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive\\nCranberry Township, PA 16066\\n(724)779-2111", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0324.jp2"}, "325": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3269", "width": "2166", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0325.jp2"}, "326": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3536", "width": "2464", "jp2-path": "scienceofhypnoti00youn_0326.jp2"}}